epMotion® 5075 mit integriertem PC und epBlue

epMotion® 5075 mit integriertem PC und epBlue
Operating
®
ep
on
see
Motion
p.
Tab.
Fig.
—5075
p. mitmanual
integriertem PC und epBlue
Operating manual
epMotion® 5075 with integrated PC and epBlue
5075 900.831
Operating manual
epBlue Version 20
Copyright© 2010 Eppendorf AG, Hamburg. No part of this publication may be reproduced without the prior permission of
the copyright owner.
Trademarks
epMotion®, epT.I.P.S.® and eppendorf® are registered trademarks of Eppendorf AG, Hamburg, Germany.
Falcon® is a registered trademark of Becton Dickinson, Franklin Lakes, USA.
LightCycler® and MAGNA PURE® are registered trademarks of Roche Diagnostics.
SIMATIC® is a registered trademark of Siemens AG
Registered trademarks are not marked in all cases with ® in this manual.
5075 900.831-01/0311

epBlue Version 20
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Table of contents
1
1
Table of contents
User instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
2
Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
3
Using this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Danger symbols and danger levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.1
Hazard icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.2
Degrees of danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Symbols used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Abbreviations used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Main illustration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delivery package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1
Principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of hardware and labware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.1
Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2
Labware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3
Important volume terms for tubes and wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
12
13
13
14
14
22
25
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information on product liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warnings for intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
30
30
33
4
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
First steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1
Check correct installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.2
Creating the first user account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Placing labware on the worktable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1
Placing the gripper and gripper holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2
Manually filling the vacuum unit (epMotion 5075 VAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.3
Position labware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting and exiting epBlue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.1
Start epBlue and log in with your user account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.2
Logging out or exiting epBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.3
General information on working with ID tracking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Home tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.1
Overview of the Home tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.2
Open recent application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.3
Open and manage barcode ID lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The file window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1
Access to the file window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.2
Opening an application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.3
Creating a new folder in your user directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.4
Creating a new application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.5
Copying applications and folders from other user directories to one's own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.6
Editing folder and application properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.7
Deleting applications and folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
35
35
38
39
40
41
42
42
43
44
46
46
47
48
49
49
50
51
52
54
55
55
3
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
6
Quick start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
6.1
6.2
7
Short instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.1
Select and start the epMotion method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example method for epMotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1
Method objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.2
Sample preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.3
Create an example method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.4
Starting the method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
127
128
128
128
128
137
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
7.1
7.2
7.3
4
5.5.8
Import applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
5.5.9
Exporting applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.5.10 Open labware for editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
5.5.11 Deleting a labware combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
The Work tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5.6.1
Overview of the Work tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5.6.2
Worktable tab - equip the worktable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
5.6.3
Procedure tab - defining a procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
5.6.4
Reference list of commands and parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5.6.5
The Run tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.6.6
The Control tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.6.7
The Logs tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
The Labware tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.7.1
Overview of the Labware tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.7.2
Activate or deactivate labware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
5.7.3
Adjusting the labware bottom tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.7.4
Filling racks and module racks with tubes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5.7.5
Fill reservoir rack with reservoirs and filled module racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
The Functions tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5.8.1
Overview of the Functions tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5.8.2
Barcode reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5.8.3
Optical sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
5.8.4
Tool interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
5.8.5
Gripper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.8.6
Thermal module x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.8.7
Thermomixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
5.8.8
Firmware Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
5.8.9
Dosing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
The Admin tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
5.9.1
Logging in as administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
5.9.2
Overview of the Admin tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
5.9.3
Account Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5.9.4
Edit accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
5.9.5
Set up a new password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
5.9.6
Group overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Error search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1
Read error of the optical sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2
Dispensing error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
139
140
140
140
140
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
8
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8.1
8.2
8.3
9
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.1
Replacing the sealing rings of the eight-channel dispensing tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.2
Replacing the seals of the vacuum unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.3
Replace the sealing mat of the Vac Lid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.4
Maintaining the dispensing tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.5
Maintaining the gripper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.1
Cleaning the worktable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.2
Cleaning the work surface adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.3
Cleaning the dispensing tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.4
Cleaning the gripper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.5
Cleaning the vacuum unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.6
Cleaning the thermomixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.7
Cleaning the barcode reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.8
Cleaning the thermoadapter, thermoblock and thermorack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.9
Cleaning the Vac Lid / Vac Thermo Lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.10 Autoclave hardware and labware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Decontamination before shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
172
172
172
172
173
173
173
173
173
173
174
174
174
174
174
174
174
175
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight/dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dispensing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Further specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6.1
Barcode reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6.2
Noise level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6.3
Optical sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6.4
Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6.5
Gripper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6.6
Vacuum unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6.7
Thermomixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6.8
Thermal module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6.9
Vac Thermo lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
176
176
176
176
177
178
178
179
179
179
179
179
179
179
180
10 Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
10.1
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.1 Automated pipetting system epMotion 5075 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.2 Dispensing Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.3 Gripper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.4 Thermal module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.5 Accessories for nucleic acid purification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.6 epT.I.P.S. Motion pipette tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.7 Reagent reservoirs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.8 Racks for individual tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.9 Modular rack components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.10 Height Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.11 Additional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.12 Expansion/upgrade kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1.13 Accessories for real-time PCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
181
181
181
181
181
182
182
183
183
183
184
184
185
185
5
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
11 Transport, storage and disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
11.1
11.2
11.3
Shut down. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Installation after transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
12 Appendix A: Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
Labware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.2 Overview of labware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.3 Abbreviations used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.4 Labware definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.5 Compile your own labware combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools (dispensing tools) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermal module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.2 Detection version 1: detecting liquid surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.3 Detection variant 2: Tip detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.4 Detection variant 3: Location detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.5 Detection limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
189
189
190
205
206
207
208
209
210
210
212
214
214
215
13 Appendix B: Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
Commands, parameters, options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.1 Number of Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.2 Sample Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.3 Reagent Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.4 Dilute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.5 Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.6 Pool One destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.7 Mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.8 Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.9 Temperature (only epMotion 5075 with thermal module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.10 Thermomixer (only epMotion 5075 with thermomixer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.11 Vacuum (only epMotion 5075 VAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.12 Wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.13 Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.14 User intervention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Importing commands from a CSV file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.1 Creating a CSV file for import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.2 Importing a CSV file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Importing and exporting labware combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.1 Importing labware combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3.2 Export labware combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Predefined methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4.1 Nucleic acid prep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4.2 PCR setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4.3 Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4.4 Sequencing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
216
216
218
229
230
233
234
236
238
238
239
240
241
241
242
242
243
244
247
247
248
248
249
249
249
250
14 Appendix C: BIOS password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
14.1
Changing the BIOS password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
6
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
1
User instructions
1
1.1
User instructions
Using this manual
Material damage due to incorrect use.
NOTICE!
 Only use the product for its intended purpose as described in the operating manual.
 Ensure adequate material resistance when using chemical substances.
 In case of doubt, contact the product manufacturer.




Before using the epMotion 5075 for the first time, please read the operating manual.
Please view this manual as part of the product and keep it somewhere easily accessible.
When passing on the device, always enclose the operating manual.
If this manual is lost, please request another one. The current version of the operating manual
can be found on our website at www.eppendorf.com.
1.2
Danger symbols and danger levels
1.2.1
Hazard icons
1.2.2
Biohazard
Explosion
Electric shock
Hot surface
Hazard point
Material damage
Degrees of danger
The degree of danger is a part of a safety note and distinguishes the possible results of
non-observance from each other.
1.3
DANGER
Will lead to severe injuries or death.
WARNING
May lead to severe injuries or death.
CAUTION
May lead to light to moderate injuries.
NOTICE
May lead to material damage.
Symbols used
Depiction
Meaning

You are requested to perform an action.
1.
Perform these actions in the sequence described.
2.
•
Text
List.
Terms and key names from the software.
References useful information.
7
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
1.4
Abbreviations used
DWP
epT.I.P.S.
1.5
Deepwell plate
eppendorf Totally Integrated Pipetting System
LH
Liquid Handling
MTP
Micro test plate
PCR
Polymerase Chain Reaction
VAC
Vacuum
Glossary
A
Administrator
Application
Barcode ID
Barcode reader
Users with special rights. Configuration settings and several system settings are primarily
reserved for the administrator. The administrator has a special PIN for logging in.
For the epMotion 5075, application is the broad term for epMotion methods and cycler programs.
B
String (representation of a barcode) used by the system to identify a sample, labware or a
reagent.
Hardware for reading a barcode.
C
Command
Describes a procedure in a method including all parameters required for the optimal execution of
this process.
Comment
With the Comment command you can enter a comment line.
Dilute
D
The Dilute command is a modified Sample Transfer command making it easier to carry out
diluting series. A defined volume is transported from one well to the next several times by means
of pipetting.
E
Entry list
A list containing information on barcode IDs (e.g. position, name of the sample or reagent). Input
or result lists can be used as entry lists. The entry list can be used instead of the manual barcode
ID entry. Entry lists can be imported into the system as CSV or XML files.
F
Filling volume
Maximum filling volume of a tube or well that can be aspirated or whose tube, rack or plate can
be transported (transport only epMotion 5075).
G
Gripper
The gripper is for the transport of plates, lids, thermoblocks and other labware. In most cases,
plates are held in the gripper jaws using four pins. For the thermoadapter, an inserted PCR plate
can be transported via the gripper. For heavy or metallic labware (e.g. Vac Frame), the labware is
held in place by pegs located behind the pins. Tip racks, racks, height adapters and
thermoadapters cannot be transported via the gripper.
H
Height adapter
The height adapter is for mounting very short labware that is placed next to taller labware (e.g.
reservoir rack) on the worktable. Travel distances and, therefore, operating times are reduced
with the height adapter.
I
Input list
8
List containing the IDs, positions and other information on samples or reagents in a source
Labware (see also Result List). For every source labware identified by an ID an input list is
automatically created in the system when starting a method.
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
L
Labware
General term for racks, plates, tips, etc., that can be positioned on the worktable. The
administrator specifies which labware can be used by selecting labware that is available in the
software. The most current labware version can be viewed on the homepage
www.epMotion.com.
Location
Position of a plate, tips or rack on the worktable. Depending on the version, several locations are
available on the epMotion worktable
M
Method
Mix
Module racks
Saved sequence for loading the surface (worktable) for the method start and the required
procedures for the epMotion.
With the Mix command you can mix liquids in a tube.
The temperature-controlled module racks can be loaded with tubes in various models. Using an
adjusting pin, the tubes can be positioned at five different heights in the module racks. Up to
seven module racks can be positioned in a reservoir rack.
N
Number of samples
Use the Number of Samples command to specify how many samples are to be processed in the
subsequent steps of a procedure.
P
Pattern
Distribution pattern; specification of the aspiration and dispensing positions within a dispensing
command. With automatic pattern detection, patterns can be defined as simple standard patterns
or free patterns. Patterns are direction-independent in x-direction and y-direction (e.g. from left to
right or from right to left).
PCR clean
PCR clean is an Eppendorf AG purity standard for disposables. Products labeled with PCRclean
are certified free of human DNA, DNase, RNase and PCR inhibitors. A batch-specific certificate
can be downloaded from our homepage www.eppendorf.com.
Pool
Pool One
destination
Procedure
Rack
Reagent Transfer
With the Pool command you can transfer liquids from several source tube locations into
destination tube locations.
With the Pool One Destination command you can transfer liquids from several source tube
locations into a single destination tube location.
List of commands in chronological order of execution.
R
Mount for tubes or pipette tips.
Use the Reagent Transfer command to transfer liquid from a source tube into one or several
locations of a destination tube.
Reservoir
The 30 mL and 100 mL reservoirs (pans, tubs) for the reagent presentation are suspended in a
reservoir rack (max. 7 reservoirs per rack). Reservoirs with a capacity of 300 mL or 400 mL are
placed at the location without a reservoir rack.
Result list
List containing the IDs, end positions and other information on samples or reagents in a
destination labware (see also Input List). For every destination labware identified by an ID a result
list is automatically created in the system at the end of the method process.
S
Sample Transfer
Use the Sample Transfer command to transfer several liquids from various locations of a source
tube into several locations of a destination tube.
Source and
destination
Source and destination tube. A location occupied with labware becomes either a source tube or a
destination tube in the commands Sample Transfer or Reagent Transfer.
9
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
T
Temperature
Specifies the temperature of a thermal module.
Thermal module
With the thermal module, labware can be cooled or heated using Peltier elements. A temperature
between 0°C and 110°C can be selected. When heating, only accordingly heat-resistant labware
can be placed at a location with a thermal module.
Thermoadapter
This is placed on the thermal module on the epMotion 5075. On the epMotion 5075, a plate can
be placed on the thermoadapter, and removed again, using the removal tool (depending on
thermoadapter PCR or DWP).
Thermoblock
Metal body for combining with PCR plates and PCR tubes. In the software, thermoblocks are
pre-configured units of a PCR plate and thermoblock. A thermal module controls the temperature
of the plate on the thermoblock. Thermoblocks are always placed on the worktable with a PCR
plate.
Thermorack
Rack with metal body. For smaller tubes (e.g. Eppendorf Safe-Lock tubes for 0.5 ,1.5 mL or
2 mL), a temperature-controlled thermorack with lid holder and 24 positions can be used.
Tips
epT.I.P.S. Motion; pipette tips. Only epT.I.P.S. Motion can be used on the epMotion. Tips with or
without filter are used. epT.I.P.S. Motion with filter are PCR clean. Pipette tips are delivered
ready-for-use in PP racks.
Tool
Dispensing tool. 6 different dispensing tools can be used as alternatives.
Transport
Tubes
User intervention
Using the Transport command you can transport labware to a different location or to the vacuum
unit (epMotion 5075 VAC) using the gripper.
Individual tubes that can be placed in a rack.
U
With the User Intervention command you can insert steps into your method that the user must
execute manually.
V
Vacuum
Vacuum unit
With the Vacuum command you can create a vacuum in the vacuum unit and can optionally
carry out a follow-up inspection using the optical sensor (epMotion 5075 VAC).
All components required to aspirate liquids from a filter plate using a vacuum are part of the
vacuum unit. The essential components are the vacuum manifold, vacuum pump and Vac Frame
for lowering the collecting vessel into the vacuum manifold, and the leak-tight mounting of the
filter plate.
W
Wait
Working volume
Worktable
1.6
10
The Wait command is used to select a pause before the next command.
Recommended working volume. Up to the working volume, liquids can be dispensed in a tube or
well with various liquid types with minimal contamination.
Graphic display of loading (tips, racks, plates ...) the surface by starting a method. If labware is
stacked at a location (e.g., height adapter and micro test plate), the stack is correspondingly
indicated in the worktable display.
Revision history
Operating instruction
version
Date
Corresponding
software version
Changes
5075 900.831-01
March 2011
epBlue 20
Adjustments for epBlue GxP
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
2
2
2.1
Product description
Product description
Main illustration
Abb. 1:
Front view of the epMotion 5075
1
6
Fig. 1:
3
5
4
Front view of the epMotion 5075
2
1
Carrier
2
Worktable
3
Front hood
4
Waste basket
5
Mouse
6
Monitor
Abb. 2:
Section of the rear view of the epMotion 5075
Fig. 2:
Section of the rear view of the epMotion 5075
1
PC
2
Interfaces
(see p. 187)
3
Mains connection
4
Mains connection
Only connect devices to the interfaces that meet the IEC 950/EN 609650 (UL 1950) standards.
11
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
2.2
Delivery package
The following accessories for the epMotion are included in the standard scope of delivery:
Quantity Order No.
(International)
Description
1
5075 753.006
Waste container
1
–
Optical sensor
1
–
Power cable
Compatible to the country where the order was placed or determined
1
5075 900.807
Operating Manual epMotion 5075 with integrated PC
1
–
Tool for transport safety device
The accessories for the epMotion 5075 LH are expanded by the following:
Quantity Order No.
(International)
1
5075 000.750
Description
Automated pipetting system epMotion 5075 LH with integrated PC
as 5075 000.008 plus integrated industrial PC, keyboard and mouse
The accessories for epMotion 5075 VAC are expanded by the following:
Quantity Order No.
(International)
Description
1
5075 000.768
Automated pipetting system epMotion 5075 VAC with integrated PC
as 5075 000.016 plus integrated industrial PC, keyboard and mouse
1
–
Reservoir 400 mL
1
5075 784.009
VAC frame 1
1
5075 778.009
Vac frame holder
1
5282 000.018
Gripper
The accessories for epMotion with epBlue from version 20 are expanded by the following:
Quantity Order No.
(International)
Description
1
– (only epBlue
ID)
Barcode reader
With USB connection cable and table stand
1
1
–
–
USB dongle ("eLicenser")
With epBlue hardware key code card
1
–
epBlue software installation CD-Rom
With an operating manual as a PDF
1
–
Recovery DVD for Simatic 627 industrial PC
1
–
Recovery DVD for Simatic 627 B industrial PC
The accessories for epMotion 5075 TMX are expanded by the following:
Quantity Order No.
(International)
1
5075 000.784
Description
Automated pipetting system epMotion 5075 TMX with integrated PC
as 5075 000.733 plus integrated industrial PC, keyboard and mouse
The accessories for the epMotion with epBlue ID expanded by the following:
12
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Quantity Order No.
(International)
Description
1
–
epMotion 5075/epBlue documentation folder
Expandable folder for certificates and system documents
1
–
USB dongle ("eLicenser")
With epBlue hardware key code card
1
–
epBlue CD-ROM installation
With an operating manual as a PDF
Hint!
2.3
A detailed overview of the accessories and the article numbers can be found
separately(see Accessories on p. 181).
Features
With epMotion 5075 you execute dispensing processes automatically. The PC with epBlue
software is used to control the epMotion 5075.
The epMotion 5075 can be supplied with a variety of dispensing tools which are inserted
automatically. These dispensing tools and the appropriate pipette tips in each case (epT.I.P.S.
Motion) can be used to dispense quantities of liquid in the volume range from 1 μL to 1000 μL.
The epMotion 5075 is available in the following versions:
• Liquid Handling (LH)
• Vacuum Unit (VAC)
• Thermomixer (TMX)
Also refer to the operating manual of the industrial PC and the keyboard.
Hint!
The epBlue ID variant allows the tracking of samples using barcodes and the connection to lab
information systems.
Barcode
2.3.1
Principle of operation
The liquid is samples from the source tube in pipette tips, transported and deposited in the
destination tube.
On request, an optical sensor automatically checks the correct selection and positioning of tubes,
available supplies and the position of pipette tips in the rack, as well as liquid level in some tubes.
With the aid of predefined commands, you can create and edit simple or complex dispensing
operations yourself and combine these into methods. In the process, you specify in the software,
among other things, the source location and destination location as well as the desired
dispensing or transport pattern.
The epMotion 5075 VAC is additionally equipped with a complete vacuum unit. This system is
designed for the processing of vacuum-based high-throughput systems for nucleic acid
purification in 96-well format, for example.
For further information, go to www.epMotion.com
13
ep
2.4
Motion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Overview of hardware and labware
Familiarize yourself with the epMotion 5075 and the labware prior to first use.
2.4.1
Hardware
1
Directions of movement of the carrier
2
Dispensing tool
3
Carrier
4
Optical sensor
5
Locations
6
Front hood
Can be pushed up to open the inner
space.
A and B locations for labware, C locations
optional for thermal modules, T locations
for dispensing tools and gripper
(optional). Depending on the variant,
locations for vacuum unit and Vac Frame.
7
Waste container (standard)
The waste container can be autoclaved;
can be washed in a dishwasher.
9
Mouse
8
Mains switch
For switching on and off.
10 PC monitor and keyboard.
2.4.1.1 Worktable
The locations on the worktable differ depending on the variant supplied.
The locations for dispensing tools, gripper and thermal modules are identical for all variants:
• Locations T1 to T4 are provided for dispensing tools which you can position in any sequence.
The locations of the dispensing tools are determined automatically following the start of a
method. Determination starts at T1.
• Position the gripper and the gripper holder at location T0.
• Up to three locations (C1, C2, C3) can also be equipped with a thermal module.
Location B0 can only be accessed by dispensing tools if it is occupied by a 300 mL or 400 mL
reservoir or similar labware.
14
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
epMotion 5075 LH
epMotion 5075 LH
Gripper
T0
Dispensing tools
T1
T2
B0
T3
T4
B1
A2
A3
A4
B2
B3
B4
Waste
C1
Option: Thermal module
C2
C3
Option: Thermal module Option: Thermal module
C4
The epMotion 5075 LH has 12 locations for labware (racks, plates, thermoracks and
thermoblocks or tips). Up to three thermal modules can be located on the locations C1, C2 and
C3.
epMotion 5075 VAC
epMotion 5075 VAC
Gripper
T0
Dispensing tools
T1
T2
T3
T4
A2
A3
B2
B3
A4
Vacuum
unit
B0
B1
Vac Holder
Waste
C1
Option:
Thermal module
C2
Option:
Thermal module
C3
Option:
Thermal module
C4
The epMotion 5075 VAC has 11 locations for labware. There is also the vacuum unit at location
B4. A Vac Frame can be temporarily stored on a Vac Holder in location C4. If you are using a Vac
Lid, this is positioned in location T0. Up to three thermal modules can be located on the locations
C1, C2 and C3. With the version with thermomixer and vacuum unit you cannot locate any
thermal modules.
epMotion 5075 TMX
The epMotion 5075 VAC has 11 locations for labware. In addition a thermomixer is located on
location A4. A thermal module can be optionally placed either onto location C1 or onto location
C2. With the version with thermomixer and vacuum unit you cannot locate any thermal modules.
15
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
2.4.1.2 Work surface adapter for the epMotion worktable
The work surface adapter for the epMotion worktable
consists of a set of 4 screw-on feet for adjusting the height
of the epMotion. The screw-on feet may only be installed
by service personnel authorized by Eppendorf.
2.4.1.3 Dispensing tools (tools)
A total of six different dispensing tools is available for selection. For the three volume ranges 1 to
50 μL, 20 to 300 μL and 40 to 1000 μL a single-channel dispensing tool (TS xx) and an
eight-channel dispensing tool (TM xx-8) are available in each case.
The dispensing tool required for a method is automatically picked up in the tool holder of the
carrier and set down again once the dispensing task is complete.
Abb. 4:
Single-channel dispensing tool
Abb. 5:
Eight-channel dispensing tool
50
Fig. 4:
Single-channel dispensing tool
Dispensing tool
TS 50
TM 50-8
TS 300
TM 300-8
TS 1000
TM 1000-8
16
Volume range
1 μL – 50 μL
20 μL – 300 μL
40 μL – 1000 μL
Fig. 5:
Eight-channel dispensing tool
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
2.4.1.6 Gripper
The gripper is for transporting labware. The transport of labware is controlled in the software by
means of the appropriate commands.
The 2 retaining pins on each of the gripper jaws hold the labware to be transported. Heavier
labware is held by the pegs behind them.
The gripper is automatically picked up and set down by the carrier.
Damage to the gold contacts from handling.
NOTICE!
The function of the gold contacts of the gripper can be impaired through handling or
contamination.
 Do not touch the gold contacts.
The gripper can transport the following labware.
• Thermoblock: joint transport of block with a plate on it as a fixed combination.
• Thermorack: joint transport of thermorack and tubes.
• Plates: all plates like MTP, DWP, skirted PCR plates and filter plates; also pick up or set down
plates on height adapter and thermoadapter.
• Reservoir 300 mL and 400 mL: watch filling levels when transporting.
• Vac Frame: transport to the vacuum unit or holder for Vac Frame.
• Vac Lid: transport to the filter plate before the vacuum is switched.
The following labware cannot be transported.
•
•
•
•
•
Tip racks
Height Adapter
Thermoadapter
Tubes + Racks
Tubs + Holders
2.4.1.7 Thermal module
Temperature control is effected with the aid of Peltier elements which cool or heat labware. A
temperature of 0°C to 110°C can be selected for the thermal modules.
Hazard when using flammable or explosive liquids.
WARNING!
 Do not use explosive substances.
 Heat slightly flammable substances only in small quantities below the boiling point.
 Do not exceed the boiling point of solutions.
Burns from hot surfaces.
 Do not touch the metal surface of the thermal module if the method is interrupted or after it is
CAUTION!
complete.
 Check the current temperature of the thermal modules. The temperature is displayed in the
status bar at the bottom edge of the screen.
 Wait until the thermal module has cooled down completely.
Hint!
Hint!
If a PCR plate is placed directly on the surface of the thermal module, the wells are not
temperature controlled as well and the secure location of the PCR plate on the thermal module
may be impaired by relatively large tolerances in well dimensions.
When heating tubes containing organic solvents or even water/solvent mixtures, observe the
safety measures and safety data sheets applicable to the solvent or the mixture.
17
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
2.4.1.8 Thermomixer
The thermomixer can temperature control labware and mix. Temperature control is effected with
the aid of Peltier elements which cool or heat labware. A temperature between 4°C to 95°C can
be selected.
Danger of injury from ejected labware when using the Thermomixer command
WARNING!
When employing too heavy labware and using too high speeds labware can come loose from the
holder and be hurled around.
 Ensure that the front cover is closed and undamaged.
 Select low speeds with heavy labware.
 Only use compatible labware.
Hazard when using flammable or explosive liquids.
WARNING!




Do not use explosive substances.
Do not heat highly flammable substances on the thermomixer.
Heat slightly flammable substances only in small quantities below the boiling point.
Do not exceed the boiling point of solutions.
Burns through hot thermomixer!
 Do not touch the metal surface of the thermomixer if the method is interrupted or after it is
CAUTION!
complete.
 Check the current temperature of the thermomixer. The temperature is displayed in the status
bar at the bottom edge of the screen.
 Wait until the thermomixer has cooled down completely.
Contusion through moving thermomixer
The thermomixer can cause light contusion during operation if touched.
CAUTION!
 Ensure that the front cover is undamaged and is closed during operation.
 Do not reach into the epMotion during operation.
Physical damage due to cross contamination and splashing liquid when using the
Thermomixer command
NOTICE!
With too high liquid level in the tubes and too high speeds liquids can splash out from the tubes
which damage the device and can lead to cross contamination.
 Do not mix at high rotational speed with high liquid levels.
Hint!
Hint!
Hint!
18
The lowest temperature reached by the thermomixer depends on the ambient temperature and
can be a maximum of 15°C below room temperature. With a room temperature of e.g. 20°C, the
lowest temperature reached by the thermomixer is 5°C
If a PCR plate is placed directly on the surface of the thermomixer, the wells are not temperature
controlled as well and the secure location of the PCR plate on the thermomixer may be impaired
by relatively large tolerances in well dimensions.
When heating tubes containing organic solvents or even water/solvent mixtures, observe the
safety measures and safety data sheets applicable to the solvent or the mixture.
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
2.4.1.9 Vacuum unit (epMotion 5075 VAC only)
In the vacuum unit, a vacuum pump generates a vacuum which enables the contents of filter
plates to be extracted into a collecting vessel. For example, a nucleic acid purification or PCR
cleanup process can run fully automatically. Filter plates can be positioned on the vacuum unit
with the aid of the gripper.
Example of load
1
2
3
4
5
1
Vac Lid
2
Filter plate
3
Vac Frame
4
Collection vessel
5
Vacuum unit
A collection vessel is first placed on the vacuum unit. A metal Vac Frame is used to lower the
collection vessel into the vacuum manifold. A filter plate is placed on the Vac Frame. To improve
the vacuum, a Vac Lid can be placed on the filter plate.
19
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
2.4.1.10 Barcode reader
Only for a epMotion with epBlue ID and barcode reader.
Barcode
1
2
1
Window
2
Key
The barcode reader is connected to a USB port of the industrial PC. To be able to use the
barcode functions in the software, the supplied dongle (hardware key, "eLicenser") must be
enabled (see separate enclosed leaflet) and connected to the industrial PC. The barcode reader
has 2 operating modes:
• Manual trigger mode: press the key on the barcode reader to read data.
• Demand mode: the barcode reader continuously reads data and only needs to be held in the
vicinity of a barcode for it to be able to detect and read it.
You can change the mode in the Admin tab of the epBlue software (see The Admin tab on
p. 117).
The system allows you to track samples and document the used samples and reagents using
barcode IDs. The barcode IDs can be read or entered at the start of a method run. After
completion of the method run, the system issues a result list with the barcode IDs of the samples
and their location in the labware.
20
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
2.4.1.11 Optical sensor
The optical sensor is located in a tube to the right of the carrier.
With the aid of an optical procedure the optical sensor measures the light reflection of surfaces,
e.g., of labware on the worktable or of liquids placed in the tubes.
The optical sensor performs the following checking tasks on the epMotion 5075:
• detecting codes on tip racks and tube racks
• determining existing stocks of tips in positioned tip racks so that tip racks which have been
started can also continue to be used
•
•
•
•
•
checking whether the correct rack has been inserted (height detection)
detecting height of plates
detecting whether a location programmed as occupied on the worktable really is occupied
detecting 30 mL or 100 mL reservoirs (tubs) and Module Racks in the Reservoir Rack
automatically checking the adjustment of the entire device by means of exact measuring
points on the surface of the worktable
• detecting the filling level of the liquids (liquid detection) in reservoirs, tubes and plates
CAUTION!
Faulty liquid detection due to air bubbles.
Liquid detection cannot be performed reliably if there are air bubbles in tubes or wells.
 Before the start of a method, ensure that there are no air bubbles in tubes or wells.
 Remove bubbles by tapping the tubes or plates sharply several times.
To save time and depending on the requirements of the current method, you can use the software
to activate or deactivate the individual functions of the optical sensor.
2.4.1.12 Waste system
The standard waste container can hold approx. 400 individually-ejected 1000 μL tips or
correspondingly more of smaller tip sizes.
21
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
2.4.2
Labware
The following list gives you an overview of the labware of the epMotion 5075. More information on
available labware components can be found in the appendix (see Labware on p. 189) as well as
in the Internet at www.epMotion.com.
Labware
Description
Labware folder/
more information
Tubes
You can use different tubes on the epMotion
5075 by loading module racks, racks and
thermoracks:
•
•
•
•
Racks
Equip Racks + Modules
with Tubes
Safe-Lock tubes
Standard tubes 3810X
PCR tubes
Falcon tubes and other tubes from various
manufacturers
Racks are tube holders for up to 24 tubes with Equip Racks + Modules
various diameters.
with Tubes
(see Racks for reagent
tubes on p. 192)
Height adapter
To keep carrier travel times and distances as Adapters
short as possible, there are various height
(see Height Adapter on
adapters (with a height of 40, 55 and 85 mm) p. 202)
which you can use to compensate for different
heights of plates.
Plates
You can use different plates on the epMotion
5075:
• Microplates (MTP) with 6, 24, 48, 96 or 384
Plates
(see Plates on p. 203)
wells
• Deepwell plates (DWP) with 24, 96 or 384
wells
• PCR plates with frame (skirted) with 96 or
384 wells
• Filter plates
• Tube plates with 96 individual tubes
• Rack for microtubes in a 96-well grid
Thermoadapter
The PCR thermoadapter is used for
temperature controlling 96-well and 384-well
PCR plates. However, it does not form a fixed
combination with a plate.
The thermoadapter DWP/96 is used for
temperature controlling 96-well DWP plates.
However, it does not form a fixed combination
with a plate.
22
Adapters
(see Thermoadapter on
p. 195)
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Labware
Description
Labware folder/
more information
Thermoblock
The thermoblock is used for temperature
Thermoblocks with plates
controlling 96-well PCR plates (e.g.,
(see Thermoblock (384
Eppendorf twin.tec semi-skirted or skirted). It wells) on p. 195)
forms a fixed combination with the plate which
can only be moved together.
Thermoracks
The thermorack with lid holder and 24
positions which can be temperature controlled
is for the temperature control of smaller tubes
(e.g., Eppendorf Safe-Lock tubes for 0.5 mL,
1.5 mL or 2 mL). The thermorack has a high
heat capacity and a slower heat transfer i.e. it
retains the temperature away from the
temperature control over a longer time period.
But it also takes longer to reach the desired
temperature.
Equip Racks + Modules
with Tubes
The thermorack TMX with lid holder and 24
positions which can be temperature controlled
is for the temperature-control of smaller tubes
(e.g., Eppendorf Safe-Lock tubes for 0.5 mL,
1.5 mL or 2 mL). It is optimized for the
application in the thermomixer as it is easier
than the normal thermoracks and therefore
permits higher rotational speed during mixing.
It has a lower heat capacity but a faster heat
transfer, i.e. it quickly reaches the desired
temperature but does not retain it for long
away from the temperature control.
Equip Racks + Modules
with Tubes
The reservoir rack is for taking up to seven
reservoirs or module racks.
Equip Holder with Tubs +
Modules
Thermoracks TMX
Reservoir rack
(see Thermoracks and
thermoracks TMX on
p. 193)
(see Thermoracks and
thermoracks TMX on
p. 193)
(see Reservoirs and
reservoir rack on p. 197)
Reservoirs (tubs)
To supply liquids, reservoirs in sizes 30 mL
and 100 mL are available. The reservoir rack
carries up to seven reservoirs.
Equip Holder with Tubs +
Modules
For larger volumes, an autoclavable reservoir
with a capacity of 400 mL is available.
Tubs
(see Reservoirs and
reservoir rack on p. 197)
23
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Labware
Description
Labware folder/
more information
24
Module racks
TC reservoir rack modules (temperature
Equip Holder with Tubs +
controlled) are loaded with tubes and placed in Modules
the reservoir rack in the form of module racks. (see Reservoir rack with
module racks on p. 198)
Tips
epT.I.P.S. Motion are pipette tips for single use Tips
with the epMotion. They are available in three (see epT.I.P.S. Motion on
volume sizes to suit the dispensing tools
p. 190)
(50 μL, 300 μL and 1000 μL), in each case
with or without filter. epT.I.P.S. Motion are
available as racks or reloads.
Tip holder
The tip holder is an adapter for holding the
epT.I.P.S. Motion Reloads.
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
2.4.3
Important volume terms for tubes and wells
The following remarks about volume terms are significant for selecting suitable tubes and plates
and for some of the sequences when editing a method.
Filling volume
Working volume
1.5
1.0
0.5
0.1
Optical sensor detection limit
Remaining volume removal
2.4.3.1 Filling volume
Maximum filling volume for a tube or well. A much larger volume is rejected by the software with
an error message.
2.4.3.2 Working volume
The working volume for wells is primarily in the range of 50% of max. filling volume. In the case of
larger tubes, the working volume is a correspondingly larger percentage. Statements about
working volume should be understood as recommendations.
Low-contamination dispensing into the well or tube is possible up to the working volume with key
classes of liquid.
MTP 96/384, PCR 96/384: fluid displacement in the working volume
A
B
A Well filled up to working volume
B Displacement if tip immersed to
maximum depth before aspirating
liquid
When immersing tips in filled wells of 96-well and 384-well plates, volume displacement can
cause the liquid to overflow if the optical sensor is switched off. You can avoid this by not
exceeding the working volume in the wells.
To display the filling volume, click in the Info file window or mark the desired labware in the
worktable mode.
Maximum immersion in wells is possible with all tips for 96-well plates and with 50 μL tips for
384-well plates (generally 1 mm from the bottom of the tube). To do so select in a command
(Sample Transfer, Reagent Transfer) the corresponding aspirate from bottom option
(see Immersion depth and dispensing height on p. 221).
25
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
2.4.3.3 Remaining volume
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.1
0.1
0.1
The term "remaining volume" refers to the volume which can no longer be aspirated from a tube,
and which is dependent on tube geometry.
The pipette tip is generally immersed 3 mm in the liquid before liquid is aspirated. The pipette tip
is moved downwards during aspiration of liquid. The immersion depth of 3 mm is maintained.
Under standard conditions, liquid can be aspirated up to the following limit data: 1.0 mm gap
between the bottom of the tube and the pipette tip and simultaneously an immersion depth of the
pipette tip into the liquid of 0.7 mm. The immersion depth of the pipette tip reduces at standard
conditions at the tube bottom from 3 mm to 0.7 mm. The remaining volume is therefore
calculated at standard conditions from a filling level of 1.7 mm.
Special cases for remaining volume
The initial immersion depth of 3 mm is included in the liquid type of the method. Higher
immersion depths are only achieved if Aspirate from bottom is used. In the case of very tall tubes
(e.g., primary tubes for blood), immersion to the bottom of the tube is not possible. In these
cases, the remaining volume increases. There are consequently varying remaining volumes
depending on tube type. Shorter 50 μL or 300 μL pipette tips and very tall tubes result in greater
remaining volumes than the long 1000 μL pipette tip. Aspirations of liquid up to the remaining
volume are liable to a greater risk of being incorrect. The curvature of the liquid surface could
trigger falsified aspiration results.
Changing remaining volume
Under standard conditions the smallest distance between the pipette tip and the tube bottom is
1 mm. Exceptions are 30 mL and 100 mL reservoirs where it is 2.5 mm.
Hint!
26
Note the comments on adjusting bottom tolerance (see Adjusting the labware bottom tolerance
on p. 102).
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
2.4.3.4 Multidispense
Reverse stroke in multi-dispensing
Abb. 5:
Multidispense before and after reverse stroke
Fig. 5:
Multidispense before and after reverse stroke
In multidispense, a reverse stroke takes place after aspiration of the liquid. Here the sampled
liquid is returned into the source tube. The volume of the reverse stroke is included in the
aspiration volume and the required volume in the source tube. At the start of the method, these
volumes are automatically included in the calculation of volume by the software.
The reverse stroke is of equal size in all liquids, but varies according to pipette tip.
When dispensing the defined errors for pipetting are exceeded(see Dispensing Tools on p. 177).
Hint!
Extra aspiration in multi-dispensing
Following the reverse stroke, there is more liquid in the pipette tip than is required for the
dispensing steps. This extra aspiration is dispensed after dispensing is complete.
The dispensing of the extra aspiration depends on the tip change. The extra aspiration is
returned to the source tube if no tip change has been defined before the liquid aspiration. The
extra aspiration is dispensed into the waste container if the tips are changed before each
aspiration of liquid.
When water is multidispensed, the following approximate extra aspirations result for each pipette
tip:
• 50 μL tip: approx. 2.5 μL extra aspiration
• 300 μL tip: approx. 5.0 μL extra aspiration (only about 3.7 μL with single-channel dispensing
tool)
• 1000 μL tip: approx. 35.2 μL extra aspiration
Aspiration volume
Aspiration volume is the volume which can be aspirated and which is required for the task in
question. The volume is calculated at the start of the method from the sum of all aspirations.
Hint!
In the case of multidispense, more liquid has to be aspirated for technical reasons than is
calculated from the sum of all dispensing steps.
The following volumes must be available in the source tube:
• 50 μL tip: approx. 5.8 μL reverse stroke
• 300 μL tip: approx. 45.2 μL reverse stroke (only approx. 16.7 μl with single-channel
dispensing tool)
• 1000 μL tip: approx. 50.3 μL reverse stroke
The reverse stroke is of identical size with all liquids.
27
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Example aspiration volumes with multidispense
A 96-well plate is to be filled with 10 μL water per well by the multidispense method. The
eight-channel dispensing tool TM 50-8 is used. Aspiration is from one reservoir. Tips are not
changed before the next aspiration of liquid.
Total aspiration volumes for multidispense:
•
•
•
•
10 μL for 96 wells: 960 μL
8 x 5.8 μL reverse stroke: 46.4 μL
8 x 2.5 μL extra aspiration: 20 μL
Total: 1026.4 μL
The volume calculation of the software increases the sum total automatically be the remaining
volume that cannot be aspirated from the source tube. We do not recommend using
multidispense for water before a dispensing volume of 3 μL. With small volumes, pipetting always
offers better free-jet capability as well as precision and correctness. With pipetting, only the
required volume is aspirated and dispensed.
2.4.3.6 Required volume
Required volume is the total of "aspirated volume" and "remaining volume" in the tube. The
minimum required volume is calculated at the start with the aid of the number of samples. For
reasons of reliability (meniscus formation varies in the tubes), the "Required Volume" should
always be exceeded.
2.4.3.7 Volume check
Knowledge of the software is required to perform the volume check.
If it is known that the solution for dispensing has a density significantly different from that of water,
check whether this needs to be compensated in the volume entry.
Perform the following check.
1. From the ep user and the Routine folder copy the Fill 96 method to your user directory.
2. Adapt the copied method to your own labware.
3. Weigh the corresponding plate empty.
4. Fill the plate in the epMotion with water with the aid of the modified method.
5. Weigh the plate again.
6. Repeat the process with the liquid to be tested and another plate.
7. Use the weighing results to perform a volume calculation (mass : density = volume). The
density of water at 20°C is approx. 0.9982 mg/μL; take account of the density depending on
the current temperature when converting (g/mL = mg/μL). In the case of the plate filled with
water, you obtain a statement about the correctness of the dispensing tool for the selected
volume. Assess the result with the test liquid accordingly, taking account of the density.
8. Depending on the result, adapt the volume in the commands. Rule of thumb: a change in
density of 10% for identical dispensing conditions affects the dispensing result by between
0.2% and 1%.
9. Other physical variables (viscosity, vapor pressure, surface tension etc.) of the solution
likewise affect the result.
28
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
2.4.3.8 Volume correction after optical sensor error message
Knowledge of the software is required to perform volume correction.
If the optical sensor detects a too high or too low filling level or the (correct) filling level cannot be
detected, a display appears during the Start sequence:
• Maximal volume indicates the maximum filling volume of the tube.
• Minimal volume indicates the required volume for aspiration based on the number of samples.
• Calculated volume is the volume calculated from the tube data and from measuring liquid level.
Perform the appropriate volume corrections at the tube:
• Reduce liquid if Calculated volume is larger than Maximal volume.
• Increase liquid if Calculated volume is smaller than Minimal volume.
Collision as a result of volume correction or changes at the worktable.
NOTICE!
 Perform volume correction only at the position displayed.
 Do not make any changes to the worktable.
Following volume correction at the tube, you have the following options.
• To perform Liquid Detection again, press the Repeat scan button and OK. Repeat scan can
also be selected, for example, if the optical sensor was unable to perform a successful
detection due to an air bubble in the liquid and this bubble has been removed by knocking etc.
User input should be selected if the filling volume is below the detection limit of the optical
sensor, for example.
Overwrite the preset volume in the bottom input field with the correct volume and then press
OK.
• Select accept level and continue if the displayed volume is to be accepted in a reagent transfer.
The optical sensor then scans the next tube.
• Cancel the method. Select abort and then press OK.
If you happen to be working with several sources, see the comments in the Appendix
(see Pattern with several plates as source or destination tubes on p. 219).
29
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
3
3
3.1
Safety
Safety
Intended use
The device can be used in laboratories for research, development, industrial and routine work
and training and education. Applications include but are not limited to the fields of life sciences,
biotechnology, chemistry, clinical research, routine diagnostics. epMotion 5075 automated
pipetting systems are designed for contamination-free, precise and correct measuring and
transferring of liquids. The autoclavable dispensing tools work in a volume range from 1 μL to
1000 μL.
The epMotion 5075 VAC with integrated vacuum station, for example, carries out fully-automatic
nucleic acid purification.
The epMotion 5075 TMX with an integrated thermomixer is used for applications which allow
mixing and incubating with open tubes.
The epMotion 5075 meets the relevant fundamental requirements of the EC directives and
standards listed in the declaration of conformity. epMotion 5075 automated pipetting systems are
only to be used in rooms and must only be used by qualified staff with the appropriate training.
3.2
Information on product liability
In the following cases, the protection provided by the device may be impaired. The liability for the
function of the device passes to the operator if:
• The device is not used in accordance with the operating manual.
• The device is used outside of the range of application described in the preceding chapters.
• The owner has made unauthorized modifications to the device.
3.3
Warnings for intended use
Read the operating manual first and observe the following general safety instructions before
using the epMotion 5075.
Lethal voltages inside the device.
 Ensure that the housing is always closed and undamaged so that no parts inside the device
WARNING!
can be contacted by accident.
 Do not remove the housing of the device.
 Do not allow any liquids to penetrate the inside of the housing.
 Do not allow the device to be opened by anyone except service personnel who have been
specifically authorized by Eppendorf.
Electric shock due to damage to device or mains cable.
WARNING!
 Only switch on the device if the device and mains cable are undamaged.
 Only use devices that have been properly installed or repaired.
 In case of danger, disconnect the device from the mains supply.
Danger of explosion!
DANGER!
 Do not operate the device in areas where work is completed with explosive substances.
 Do not use this device to process any explosive or highly reactive substances.
 Do not use this device to process any substances which could create an explosive
atmosphere.
30
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Damage to health from hazardous aerosols.
DANGER!
When working with substances that can be hazardous to health, harmful aerosols may form and
escape from the vacuum pump in an uncontrolled manner.
 Contact Eppendorf AG before starting to work with such substances.
Damage to health due to handling infectious liquids and pathogenic germs.
 Observe the national regulations for handling these substances, the biological security level
WARNING!
of your laboratory, the material safety data sheets and the manufacturer's application notes.
 Wear personal protective equipment (PPE).
 Follow the instructions regarding hygiene, cleaning and decontamination.
 Comprehensive information on the regulations for handling germs and biological material in
risk group II or higher can be found in the "Laboratory Biosafety Manual" (source: World
Health Organization, Laboratory Biosafety Manual, in the valid version).
Hazard when using flammable or infectious liquids.
The waste container may contain residues of flammable or infectious liquids in ejected tips.
WARNING!
 If you use flammable liquids (e.g., ethanol 98%), treat the waste before disposing of it in
accordance with your laboratory guidelines.
 Dispose of infectious material, waste or tips in accordance with national and local safety
regulations.
Risk from incorrect supply voltage
 Only connect the device to power supplies which correspond with the electrical requirements
WARNING!
on the nameplate.
 Only use sockets with a protective earth (PE) conductor and a suitable mains cable.
Risk to health due to contaminated device.
 Perform decontamination before storing or dispatching the device and/or its accessories.
WARNING!
Poor safety due to incorrect accessories and spare parts.
CAUTION!
The use of accessories and spare parts other than those recommended by Eppendorf may
impair the safety, function and precision of the device. Eppendorf cannot be held liable or accept
any liability for damage resulting from the use of incorrect or non-recommended accessories and
spare parts or from the improper use of such equipment.
 Only use accessories and original spare parts recommended by Eppendorf.
Damage to health due to ergonomically inadequate workstation.
 Follow the national regulations governing ergonomics of display workstations.
CAUTION!
Damage and corrosion from spilled liquids.
NOTICE!
 Disconnect the power plug if relatively large quantities of liquid are involved.
 Mop up spilled liquids immediately. When mopping up, pay particular attention to
specifications in the safety data sheet.
 Do not make long-term use of chemicals which form aggressive vapors (e.g., 37%
hydrochloric acid). Aggressive vapors and chemicals can cause color changes to the surface
or, in the course of time, cause damage to the moving parts and electronics.
31
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Damage and corrosion from liquids spilled in the vacuum unit.
NOTICE!
 Disconnect the power plug if relatively large quantities of liquid are involved.
 Mop up spilled liquids immediately. When mopping up, pay particular attention to
specifications in the safety data sheet.
Damage to the device from the device tilting.
NOTICE!
 Note that during transport epMotion 5075 the center of gravity is at the back.
 Follow national safety regulations regarding the transport of heavy loads.
 Carry the epMotion 5075 using at least two people and reach underneath the device at the
sides.
 Place it on an even and strong work surface epMotion 5075 of sufficient bearing capacity. The
device must not be placed on a trolley or at an angle. Check that it is horizontal using a spirit
level if necessary.
Damage from overheating.
NOTICE!
 Do not place the device close to sources of heat (e.g., radiator, drying cabinet).
 Do not expose the device to direct sunlight.
 Ensure free circulation of air by maintaining a distance of at least 6 cm from adjacent devices
and the wall, on all sides of the device, and keep the underside of the device clear.
Impaired function due to vibration.
 Do not place the epMotion 5075 on a surface with devices which generate vibration
NOTICE!
(e.g.,vortex mixer, thermomixer, centrifuges).
Size of disposables can change through autoclaving.
 Do not use autoclaved disposable products in automated applications.
NOTICE!
Faults caused by additionally installed software.
Temporary installed software can also cause faults.
NOTICE!
 Only use software preinstalled by Eppendorf.
 Any additionally required software must be approved by Eppendorf.
Data loss due to lack of data backup or incorrect storage of data carriers.
NOTICE!
epBlue saves all information on user accounts, applications, labware and logfiles in a database
on the epMotion PC. Damage to this database (e.g., due to a hardware fault) causes this
information to be lost.
 Carry out regular database backups via the function Backup in Admin tab.
 Save the backup file on a secure data carrier and store it in accordance with the manufacturer
instructions.
Eppendorf is not liable for data loss and its consequences.
32
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
3.4
Safety devices
This section explains the warning symbols on the epMotion and the location of the safety
devices.
1
WARNING
General hazard point. Follow the operating manual
and in particular the safety notes.
2
WARNING
Do not reach into the device when a method is
running!
3
DANGER
Risk of burns from hot surfaces.
4
The front hood serves as a safety device.
The front hood protects the user during operation of the device. A method can only be started if
the front hood is closed. If the hood is opened with a method running, an error message is issued
and the method is stopped.
Risk as a result of defective screens or failure of the protective function.
WARNING!
 Only operate the epMotion if screens are in perfect condition.
 Ensure that the front hood is closed during operation (e.g., for methods or test runs).
 Have defective screens replaced without delay.
Risk of injury from movements by the carrier.
CAUTION!
 Click the Stop button in the Control tab of the method.
 Wait until the carrier has completed its movements.
 Only open the front hood when all the movements are complete.
33
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
4
4
Installation
Installation
Hint!
34
Installation of epMotion 5075 must always be carried out by Eppendorf AG or an Eppendorf AG
service partner.
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5
5
Operation
Operation
Damage from UV radiation.
NOTICE!
UV radiation can cause color changes to the surface or, in the course of time, cause damage to
the moving parts and electronics of the epMotion.
 Avoid UV radiation.
5.1
First steps
5.1.1
Check correct installation
Before using the epMotion 5075 for the first time, please ensure
1. that the epMotion 5075 has been correctly connected and commissioned.
2. that the device is not damaged in any way
5.1.2
Creating the first user account
In order to be able to use epBlue, an operator's user account must be configured. It is
recommended that you create individual user accounts for every operator who will use the
epMotion 5075.
This section describes how, as administrator, you can create the first user account. Additional
information on user accounts and user groups and their administration can be found in the
extensive description of the Admin tab (see The Admin tab on p. 117).
1. Start epBlue and log in as administrator (see The Admin tab on p. 117).
2. Go to the administrator area and click there on the Admin tab on the left-hand side of the
program window.
3. In the left-hand area of the Admin tab select the Account entry so that it is highlighted, and
then select the Edit Account tab.
35
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
4. Click on New Account.
The following form is displayed.
36
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5. In the Account field, enter an account name for the new user.
6. In the Password and Confirm password fields, enter the password for the new user account. If
the entries in the two fields do not match exactly, a message will be displayed. In this case,
delete the contents of both fields and enter the password again.
7. In the Member of section, activate the user group to which you want the new user to belong.
The user will have the user rights defined for the selected group (see Group overview on
p. 125).
8. If you want to enable the account for a certain period of time, activate the Account valid until
option and enter the expiry date there.
You also have the option to lock the account until a certain day. To do this, activate the
Disabled until option and enter the expiry date there.
A disabled account can be enabled again by the administrator at a later time (see The Admin
tab on p. 117).
37
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
9. If you wish, you can enter further information about the new user, e.g., the user's name and
contact information. This information is optional. If you enter the name of the user he or she
will be addressed by this name in the Home tab after login. Otherwise the account name will
appear.
10. Click on Submit.
The new user account is created. The user name appears in the Account List in the
Edit Account tab.
11. If required, create further user accounts in the same way.
12. When you have finished, log out as administrator to prevent unauthorized access to the
system.
5.2
Placing labware on the worktable
This section provides you with an overview of the supply of labware on the worktable.
Hint!
Beyond the preconfigured standard labware available ex works, it is also possible to dimension
individual or external labware for use with the epMotion 5075 and to incorporate it in the labware
directories of the software. For more information on this, contact Eppendorf Service.
Burns from hot surfaces.
 Check the temperature of the thermal modules before supplying the worktable. The
CAUTION!
temperature must be below 30°C.
Material damage as a result of incorrect labware on thermal modules.
 At temperatures in excess of 60°C, only use labware made of metal, polypropylene (PP) or
NOTICE!
38
polycarbonate (PC) on the thermal module! An additional check of the temperature set and
the labware used is effected in the method.
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.2.1
Placing the gripper and gripper holder
Risk of injury from sharp pins.
Cuts or other injuries to the skin from sharp pins on the insides of the gripper jaws.
CAUTION!
 Always grasp the gripper at the top and not inside at the gripper jaws.
Abb. 1:
Open (A) and close (B) gripper jaws
1
4
2
3
Fig. 1:
Open (A) and close (B) gripper jaws
1
Gripper jaws
2
Pin to locate gripper jaws
3
Holder
4
Pins
1. Place the holder on a level work surface. The lateral pin on the holder points towards the user.
2. Press together the levers of the gripper simultaneously.
The gripper jaws open. The gripper jaw with the warning label points towards the user.
3. Position the slightly-open gripper over the holder so that the hole on the gripper jaw could
take the lateral pin of the holder.
4. Allow the retaining pins to engage in the corresponding bores of the holder.
5. Check whether the lateral pin of the holder is located in the hole of the gripper jaw.
6. Place the holder and gripper in location T0.
39
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.2.2
Manually filling the vacuum unit (epMotion 5075 VAC)
Abb. 1:
Vacuum unit with supply variant
1
2
3
4
5
Fig. 1:
Vacuum unit with supply variant
1
Vac Lid
2
Filter plate
3
Vac Frame
4
Collection vessel
5
Vacuum unit
To supply the vacuum unit manually, perform the following steps.
1. Place the collection vessel on the vacuum unit. You can use a microplate (MTP), deepwell
plate (DWP), tube plate or a filter plate as the collection vessel. The 400 mL reservoir can be
used for tasks like binding or cleaning steps, for example.
2. Then place the Vac Frame on the collection vessel. If the Vac Frame is positioned incorrectly,
it is impossible for an adequate vacuum to build up.
3. The weight of the Vac Frame lowers the collection vessel into the vacuum unit.
4. Place the filter plate in the Vac Frame.
5. If appropriate, place a Vac Lid on the filter plate. The "Vac Lid" label points towards the user.
40
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.2.3
Position labware
Avoid placing very short labware next to very tall labware. Use a Height Adapter to compensate
for the difference in height.
Hint!
Use location B0 only for supplying with a 300 mL or a 400 mL reservoir. The dispensing tools
cannot reach other labware (e.g., plates) without restriction, so that aspiration or dispensing of
liquid is possible only to a certain extent and errors occur.
1. Position the dispensing tools on holders in any sequence in locations T1 to T4. The
dispensing tools are fitted to and removed from the holder on the carrier fully automatically on
the epMotion. The dispensing tools required for the method are detected by their coding.
2. For methods with Transport commands correctly position the gripper and holder in location
T0. The gripper is fitted to and removed from the holder on the carrier fully automatically
during a method run. The gripper is detected by its coding.
3. When using the vacuum unit with Vac Lid: place the Vac Lid on the holder for the gripper in
location T0.
The lid lies loosely on the tip rack.
NOTICE!
 Never grip the tip rack by its lid to lift it up, always by the side. Otherwise it will fall.
 Only take off the lid shortly before starting the method. The lid protects the tips from
contamination.
4. Position the Tip Rack in the location on the worktable in accordance with the method. In the
process, the Tip Rack is pressed against the stops on opposite sides by the spring plate at
the location.
5. Remove the lid from the Tip Rack.
6. When using Module Racks: place the filled Reservoir Rack on a B or C location (excluding
B0). "A" locations may not be used.
7. Position the other labware required for your method in any locations. In the process, ensure
that the labware is not tilted.
8. If desired, place a waste bag in the waste container and fix in position using the clamping
ring. Pull the edge of the bag tightly downwards so that the path of the dispensing tool and
access to the racks is not obstructed.
41
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.3
Starting and exiting epBlue
5.3.1
Start epBlue and log in with your user account.
Hint!
When the PC boots up, the epBlue server software starts automatically. If the server software is
stopped while the PC is running, you must start it manually before starting epBlue. To start the
server software, select Start - Programs - Eppendorf - epBlue Server from the Windows Start
menu.
To start epBlue, proceed as follows.
1. Double-click on the Eppendorf epBlue icon on the desktop, or
select Start - Programs - Eppendorf - epBlue in the Windows
Start menu.
epBlue starts, and the login screen appears.
Hint!
If you have forgotten your password, please contact your administrator. He can set a new
password for you (see Set up a new password on p. 124).
Once you are logged in as a user, you can change your own password at any time. To do so,
select Tools - Account - Change Password from the main menu.
2. Enter your account name and your password.
42
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
3. Click on Login.
epBlue starts and the program window displays the Home tab.
The number and type of tabs on the left hand edge of the epBlue window depends on your
user rights and your epBlue configuration level.
5.3.2
Logging out or exiting epBlue
Hint!
You cannot log out of your account or exit epBlue while any of your applications are still running.
If you need to log out or exit before your applications have finished, you must stop them manually
(see The Control tab on p. 96).
5.3.2.1 Logout from your user account
To log out of your account, proceed as follows.
1. Save any changes you have made to your applications (see Saving the current application on
p. 64) or to your labware (see The Labware tab on p. 99).
2. Select Tools - Account - Log out from the menu or click on the Logout button.
You are logged out of your account.
The login screen appears. A different user can now log in.
43
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.3.2.2 Exiting epBlue
To exit epBlue, proceed as follows.
1. Save any changes you have made to your applications (see Saving the current application on
p. 64) or to your labware (see The Labware tab on p. 99).
2. Select File - Exit from the menu.
epBlue is closed.
5.3.3
General information on working with ID tracking
Only for an epMotion with barcode reader.
Barcode
5.3.3.1 Method creation
• For the ID tracking you must set the ID label option both for the source and the destination
labware to entry list or manual scan.
• The ID label option must only be switched on for true source and destination labware (rack or
plate in which only aspiration or dispensing takes place during a method). Set the ID label for
intermediate labware (e.g., diluting plates) always to none. Sample IDs are automatically
transferred by intermediate labware.
• The ID tracking only takes place for the commands Sample Transfer and Dilute.
• For Reagent Transfer the IDs are not tracked, but they are documented in the logfile and in an
input list.
• If you use a Vacuum command (only 5075 with vacuum unit) to transfer samples from a filter
plate to a destination plate, you must set the ID label (see p. 66) for the filter plate to
manual scan or entry list and for the barcoded destination plate to none. When the method
starts you will be prompted to scan the barcode for the destination plate. In this case scan the
barcode of the destination plate instead.
• If you want to transfer samples from a filter plate via Sample Transfer with the Elution from
Filter (see p. 82) option to a destination plate, set the ID label (see p. 66) for the filter plate to
none and for the barcoded destination plate to manual scan or entry list.
• A labware with ID label cannot be a source for samples and reagents at the same time. You
can only execute either Sample Transfers or Reagent Transfers for this labware.
• For labware with ID label the source and destination of a transfer must be in different labware.
This does not apply to intermediate labware.
• For methods with ID tracking exactly one single ID per destination tube is permitted to ensure
the unambiguous trackability. You cannot combine two or several samples with IDs in a
destination, e.g., using a Pool command.
44
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.3.3.2 Method run
• Generally for every method run and every source and destination labware marked with ID
exactly one ID list is created in the database. ID lists for source and destination labware are
called Input list or Result list. You can display the lists via the list administration.
• Input list and Result list can be used with the ID label configuration entry list as Entry list in the
following method runs.
• Dependent on the labware used the following information is required or issued for the ID
tracking:
Labware
Plate
Rack
Manual scanning
Only one barcode per plate.
One barcode per tube. The
rack itself does not carry a
barcode.
ID lists
One barcode per plate and
one barcode per well used.
One barcode per tube. The
rack itself does not carry a
barcode.
Input list and Result list
Example: You use a plate as destination labware and have configured manual scan. You then
must scan the barcode of the plate at the start of the method. After the method is complete you
obtain a Result list containing both the ID of the plate and the IDs and locations of the transferred
samples.
• Before the method is executed the system checks the validity and integrity of the IDs entered.
45
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.4
The Home tab
5.4.1
Overview of the Home tab
epBlue always starts with the Home tab. This tab offers shortcuts to common tasks and allows
you to access your recently used applications quickly.
5.4.1.1 Recent applications and common tasks
In the Recent Applications section you will find a list of the applications you have used recently.
46
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
In the Tasks section you can select the most common tasks quickly and easily. Alternatively, all
tasks are also available in the main menu.
The entry View / import / export ID list is only available with an epMotion with epBlue ID and
barcode reader.
Barcode
5.4.1.2 Icons in the Home tab
In the Home tab the following icons are available in the toolbar under the main menu.
•
•
•
•
•
New... New Application: to create a new application
Open... Open Application / Open Labware: to open an existing application or labware
Save (not active): to save changes to applications or labware
Print (not active): to print applications and logfiles
Logout: to log out of your user account and exit the software
Alternatively, these functions are also available in the File menu.
5.4.2
Open recent application
Hint!
This section describes how to open those applications you have used recently. To open other
applications, please refer to the section describing general file operations in the File Window
(see The file window on p. 49).
The applications you have used recently are displayed in the Recent Applications list in the Home
tab.
To open an application you have used recently, proceed as follows.
1. Click on the application in the Recent Applications.list.
The application opens and the program window changes to the Work tab.
You can now start or edit the application (see The Work tab on p. 61).
47
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.4.3
Open and manage barcode ID lists
Only for a epMotion with epBlue ID and barcode reader.
Barcode
Depending on your user rights, you can open and manage barcode ID lists.
Data loss due to missing back-ups
The system saves ID lists in the system database.
NOTICE!
 To avoid loss of data, save the system database regularly using the Backup function.
1. Click on View/Import/export ID list in the Tasks list. The ID List Management window opens. All
the existing ID lists for your current user are displayed on the right-hand side of the window.
2. You can sort the existing lists according to date, user, type (input or result list) as well as
according to the type of setting (manual or imported).
For this, select the suitable setting from the respective fields under View Options.
With the Clear button you can rest all the filter functions to their initial position again.
A toolbar in the upper part allows you to view, export or delete existing lists, and to import new
lists.
Import and Export is not available to guests and users with User Level 1.
Hint!
• View: shows the barcode list as a table.
• Import: you can select a path to open the list to be imported and load it to barcode
management. The CSV and XML formats are supported.
5.4.3.1 Import
1. Press Import in the icon bar. This opens the Barcode Import window.
2. Select the file to be imported by selecting the path and click on the Open button. The ID List
Exchange window appears.
3. This window contains information on the imported path, the file type (CSV or XML) and the
barcode with which the list is encrypted.
Rename the list under Name.
All the individual positions with the respective barcode are listed in a table below.
4. Press Import.
The file is now displayed in the list of the barcode management window.
5.4.3.2 Export
1. Select an existing barcode list and press Export.
2. Select a storage location via the path, select CSV or XML as the file type and then press Save.
This opens a new window containing information on the exported list.
3. Press Export to complete the saving process.
48
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.4.3.3 Remove
 Select an existing barcode list and press Remove.
The selected list is marked as deleted (only possible as Admin Lab).
Hint!
When you delete an application, the ID lists which were created during the execution of this
application, are also deleted.
5.5
The file window
5.5.1
Access to the file window
The file window allows you to open, create and edit applications, to manage your application files
and folders, and to open some types of labware for editing.
The file window has two modes, depending on the way you access it: it can show either
applications or labware files.
The basic procedures carried out in the file window are described in detail in the following
sections.
Hint!
To avoid loss of data it is recommended to perform regular data backups of all applications and
labware files. To save data and to restore data from a previous backup, you must be logged in as
an administrator (see p. 117).
5.5.1.1 The file window for application files
To access the file window for opening and running application files, choose one of the
following ways. If you open an application this way, epBlue will go directly to the Run tab, where
you can start the application on a compatible device connected to your system.
• Click on Open / run applications in the Tasks section of the Home tab
• or click on the Open icon in the icon bar and select Open Application,
• or select File - Open / run applications from the main menu.
To access the file window for creating or editing application files, choose one of the following
ways. Any applications you create and open this way will be displayed in the Worktable, where
you can edit them for use in your system.
• Click on Create / edit applications in the Tasks section of the Home tab
• or click on the New icon in the icon bar and select New Application,
• or select File - Create / edit applications from the main menu.
Further information on labware is described separately (see Labware on p. 189).
Hint!
49
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.5.1.2 File window for labware files
The file window for labware files shows the labware available in your system.
To access the file window for opening and managing labware files, do one of the following:
• Click on Create / edit labware in the Tasks section of the Home tab
• or click on the Open icon in the toolbar and select Open Labware,
• or select File - Create / edit labware from the main menu.
5.5.2
Opening an application
To open an application that you want to run on a device, proceed as follows.
1. Open the file window (see Access to the file window on p. 49).
2. Select a user name in the user list on the left-hand side to gain access to this user's directory
(usually your own).
The folders in the selected user directory are now displayed in the Folder list.
3. In the Folder list select the folder containing the required application.
The applications in the selected folder are now displayed in the Applications list.
4. In the Applications list select the application you want to open.
The properties of the selected application are displayed on the right-hand side.
50
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5. To open the selected application, click on Open Application.
The application opens and epBlue goes to the Work (see The Work tab on p. 61) tab.
If you opened the application via the Open / run applications command, epBlue goes directly
to the Run tab, where you can start the application on a device connected to your system.
If you opened the application via the Create / edit applications command, epBlue switches to
the Worktable, where you can edit and run the application.
Applications from other user folders are automatically opened in read-only mode and cannot
be started. You first have to copy the applications to your own user folder to be able to edit
and run them (see p. 54).
In the Applications list open applications are displayed with a lock.
Hint!
5.5.3
Creating a new folder in your user directory
Your user directory contains the applications that you can edit and run on the available devices.
To organize your applications, you can store them in folders which you create in your user
directory.
To create a new folder in your user directory, proceed as follows.
1. Open the file window (see Access to the file window on p. 49).
2. Select your user name in the User list on the left-hand side to gain access to your user
directory.
All folders in your user directory are now displayed in the Folder list.
The properties of the selected user directory are displayed on the right-hand side.
3. To create a new folder click on New Folder or click on the Create new folder icon above the
Folder list.
51
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
A dialog window opens.
4. Enter a name for the new folder. If required, enter a short description of the folder in the
Comment field.
5. Click on Create.
The new folder has been created and is displayed in the Folder list.
5.5.4
Creating a new application
Hint!
This section describes how to create a new empty application. Alternatively, you can duplicate an
existing application (see Duplicating an open application on p. 63) and edit the duplicate. This
allows you to create several similar applications quickly and efficiently.
This function is only available if you have the necessary user rights.
To create a new application, proceed as follows.
1. Open the file window (see Access to the file window on p. 49).
2. Select a user name in the user list on the left-hand side to gain access to this user's directory
(usually your own).
The folders in the selected user directory are now displayed in the Folder list.
The properties of the selected user directory are displayed on the right-hand side.
You can create a new application either in the top level of the user directory, or in a folder
within the user directory.
52
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
3. To create a new application at the top level of the user directory, check that the user has been
selected in the User list, then right click in the Applications list and select New Application in the
context menu or click on the Create new application icon above the Applications list.
4. To create a new application in a folder within the user directory, select the folder in which
you want to create the new application.
The applications in the selected folder are now displayed in the Applications list.
The properties of the selected folder are displayed on the right-hand side.
5. To create a new application in the selected folder, click on New Application in the properties
section, or right-click in the Applications list and select New Application from the context menu,
or click on the Create new application icon above the Applications list.
A dialog window opens.
6. Enter a name for the new application. If required, enter a short description of the application
in the Comment field.
7. Click on Create.
The new application has been created and is displayed in the Applications list.
If you have created the application at the top level of the user directory, the user directory is
now also included in the Folder list. Its name displayed in brackets.
53
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
You can now open the new application (see Opening an application on p. 50) and edit it in the
Work tab (see The Work tab on p. 61).
5.5.5
Copying applications and folders from other user directories to one's own
The ep directory contains standard Eppendorf applications. These applications and all
applications in other user directories are read-only and cannot be edited or started directly.
However, you can copy them to your own directory in order to edit them or to run them on a
device. In the same way, you can copy existing applications from other user's directories and
adapt them to your own requirements.
To copy an application or folder from another user's directory to your own, proceed as follows.
1. Open the file window (see Access to the file window on p. 49).
2. In the User list select on the left-hand side the user directory containing the application or
folder you want to copy.
The folders in the selected user directory are displayed in the Folder list.
3. To copy a folder, select the folder in the Folder list, click on the Edit Folder icon above the
Folder list and select Copy or right click on the folder and select Copy in the context menu.
The folder is copied into the computer clipboard.
4. To copy an application, select the folder which contains the required application.
The applications in the selected folder are now displayed in the Applications list.
5. In the Applications list select the application you want to copy.
The properties of the selected application are displayed on the right-hand side.
6. Click on the Edit Folder icon above the Applications list and select Copy.
7. In the User list select on the left-hand side your own user directory.
8. To insert a copied folder into your user directory, click on the Edit Folder icon above the
Folder list and select Paste.
The copied folder is inserted into your user directory.
9. To insert a copied application, select the folder into which you want to insert the
application.
The applications in the selected folder are now displayed in the Applications list.
10. Click on the Edit Folder icon above the Applications list and select Paste.
54
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
The copied application is inserted into the selected folder in your own user directory.
You can now run or edit the application or applications in the copied folder (see The Work tab
on p. 61).
Hint!
5.5.6
If the worktable of the copied application does not match that of the connected epMotion, you will
not be able to execute the application. In this case, save the application with Save as... under a
new name with the suitable worktable.
Editing folder and application properties
To edit the properties of a folder or application, proceed as follows
1. Open the file window (see Access to the file window on p. 49).
2. To edit the properties of a folder select the folder in the Folder list.
3. To edit the properties of an application select it in the Applications list.
The properties of the selected folder or application are displayed on the right-hand side.
4. Click on Properties.
A dialog window opens. You can now edit the following properties.
• Name: The name of the folder or application.
• Comment: A short description of the folder or application.
• Read only (for applications): If this option is active, the application can be opened and
started, but it cannot be edited, to protect it against accidental changes.
You can also call the properties via the Cut+Copy+Paste button.
5. To save the changes, click on Save.
6. To exit the properties without changes, click on Cancel.
5.5.7
Deleting applications and folders
If you delete an application with ID tracking activated, all the ID lists which were created when
the application was executed will also be deleted.
Barcode
You can delete applications and folders from your own user directory. The applications and
folders in the ep directory cannot be edited or deleted.
To delete applications or folders, proceed as follows.
1. Open the file window (see Access to the file window on p. 49).
55
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
2. To delete a folder select the folder in the Folder list and click on the Delete icon above the
Folder list.
3. To delete an application select it in the Applications list and click on the Delete icon above the
Applications list.
A warning message appears.
4. To confirm, click on Yes.
The selected folder or application is deleted.
5.5.8
Import applications
You can import applications from your hard disk or from a USB storage device into epBlue.
The following file formats can be imported:
• method files for epMotion (file extension *.dws)
• older method files (file extensions *.ws or *.lhs)
• Files exported with epBlue (file ending *.export)
To import applications, proceed as follows:
1. Open the file window (see Access to the file window on p. 49).
2. Select the target directory and click on the Import Applications icon above the Folder list.
56
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
3. Alternatively click on the Import Applications icon above the Applications list.
The import window opens.
4. Click on Add and select the files you want to import from your hard disk or USB storage
device.
The selected applications are listed in the import window.
5. Click on Remove to remove individual files from the selection list. Click on Clear to clear the
selection list.
6. Click on Import.
Another import window opens. The target folder and the corresponding user are specified
again at the top of the page. All the files to be imported are listed and automatically selected.
7. Deselect the files which should not be imported.
57
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
8. Click on Import.
The applications are imported into eBlue. An import summary appears in a window.
9. Click on Finish to complete the process.
Hint!
5.5.9
If you import applications from older software versions, it may happen that the way the worktable
is displayed in epBlue does not corresponds to your device configuration. Save the application
with Save as under a new name to resolve this problem.
Exporting applications
You can export application files to your hard disk or to a USB storage device.
To export applications, proceed as follows.
1. Open the file window (see Access to the file window on p. 49).
2. To export all applications to a folder select the folder in the Folder list and click on the Export
Selected Applications icon above the Folder list.
3. To export an individual application select the application in the Applications list and click on
the Export Selected Application icon above the Applications list.
4. Select a target folder for the application files, click on OK and confirm the message in the new
window with export. In this window you can deselect the files again and re-enter the target
folder in the upper part.
The files are exported to the specified folder. An export summary appears in a window.
5. Click on Finish to complete the process.
The required labware for applications is also imported.
Hint!
Exported epBlue applications cannot be used for the control panel.
Hint!
58
Methods and labware exported from this epBlue version cannot be imported into older epBlue
versions (10.x).
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.5.10
Open labware for editing
This section describes how to open a labware file in the file window. For a more detailed
description of the editing steps and labware types that can be edited see the description of the
Labware tab (see The Labware tab on p. 99).
The import and export of labware files is described elsewhere (see Importing and exporting
labware combinations on p. 247).
This function is only available if you have the necessary user rights.
Hint!
To open labware for editing, proceed as follows.
1. Open the labware file window (see Access to the file window on p. 49).
2. In the Folder list on the left-hand side select the labware folder containing the labware you
want to edit.
If there are subfolders, these are displayed in the Subfolder list.
3. If required, select the subfolder.
The labware in this folder is displayed in the Labware list.
4. In the Labware list select the labware you want to open.
The properties of the selected labware are displayed on the right-hand side.
5. To open the selected labware, click on Open Labware.
The labware opens and the program window changes to the Labware tab.
You can edit the labware, or create new labware or labware combinations for use in your
applications. You can equip racks or modules with tubes (see p. 104), and you can equip
reservoir racks with various reservoirs and equipped modules (see p. 107).
59
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.5.11
Deleting a labware combination
Hint!
Depending on your user rights, you can delete labware combinations created by yourself or by
other users in your system. Labware identified in the Labware Properties section as Eppendorf
Standard Labware cannot be deleted.
To delete a labware combination you have created, proceed as follows.
1. Open the labware file window (see Access to the file window on p. 49).
2. In the Folder and Subfolder lists select the labware folder containing the labware you want to
delete.
The labware in this folder is displayed in the Labware list. Eppendorf Standard Labware is
displayed in blue, it cannot be deleted.
3. Select the labware you want to delete and click on the Delete icon above the Labware list.
A warning message appears.
4. To confirm, click on Yes.
The labware is deleted.
60
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.6
The Work tab
5.6.1
Overview of the Work tab
Hint!
If the Work tab is empty when opened, you first have to open an application via the Home tab
(see The Home tab on p. 46) or the file window (see Opening an application on p. 50).
epBlue automatically changes to the Work tab if you have opened an application via the Home
tab or the file window. You can also access the empty Work tab by clicking with the mouse. In the
Work tab you can edit your own applications and start them on the available devices.
5.6.1.1 List of open applications
On the left-hand side of the Work tab a list with all open applications is displayed. Several
applications can be open at the same time and can be edited or run in parallel. The current
application is highlighted. To switch between the applications, click on the application names in
the list.
61
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.6.1.2 Tabs for editing and running epMotion-applications (methods)
If you have opened a method (i.e. an application for epMotion), the Work tab displays several
tabs:
• Worktable: In the Worktable tab you equip your worktable with the labware required for the
method (see Worktable tab - equip the worktable on p. 66).
• Procedure: In the Procedure tab you define the sequence of the commands to be executed
when the method is run (see Procedure tab - defining a procedure on p. 72).
• Run: With the Run tab you can start your method on one or several devices available in your
system (see The Run tab on p. 89).
• Control: In the Control tab you can monitor and control the devices on which your method is
currently running (see The Control tab on p. 96).
• Logs: In the Logs tab you can view and print the logfiles of the respective method.
5.6.1.3 Icons in the Work tab for epMotion applications (methods)
When you have opened a method (i.e. an application for epMotion), the Work tab displays the
following icons in the toolbar below the main menu.
•
•
•
•
•
•
New... New Application: to create a new application for editing
Open... Open Application/Labware: to open an existing application/labware
Save: to save changes to your methods
Print: to print a report
Logout: to log out of your user account and exit the software
Copy (only active in the Procedure tab): to copy objects (commands) to the clipboard of the
computer.
• Paste (only active in the Procedure tab): to insert objects (commands) from the clipboard of
the computer.
• Delete (only active in the Procedure tab): to delete a selected object (command).
• CSV Import (only active in the Procedure tab): to import commands from a CSV file to the
Procedure.
• Check Method (only active in the Procedure tab): to check method parameters.
• Start Method: to start a method on a device.
Alternatively, these functions are also available in the File menu.
Additional information on the selection of tasks, e.g., opening or creating methods or managing
method files and folders, can be found in the detailed description of the Home (see The Home tab
on p. 46) tab and in the file window (see The file window on p. 49).
62
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.6.1.4 Duplicating an open application
If an application is read-only or is running on a device, it is protected and cannot be edited.
However, you can create a duplicate which you can edit.
To create a duplicate of an open application, proceed as follows.
1. Select the application in the list of open applications on the left-hand side.
2. Right-click on the application name and select Duplicate from the context menu.
The duplicate application is created and displayed in list of open applications. The file name
of the duplicate application is a copy of the name of the original application file plus a number
in brackets. If you create more than one duplicate of the same original application, the
duplicates are numbered consecutively.
You can now open the duplicate application or edit its properties (see The file window on
p. 49).
63
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.6.1.5 Saving the current application
To save the current application, proceed as follows.
1. Select the application in the list of open applications on the left-hand side of the Work tab.
The current application is highlighted in darker blue.
2. To save the application under the same name, click on the Save icon, or select File - Save from
the main menu, or right-click on the application name and select Save from the context menu.
3. To save the application under a new name, select File - Save As from the main menu, or
right-click on the application name and select Save As from the context menu.
A dialog window opens.
4. Enter a file name and click on Save.
The application is saved in your user directory.
5.6.1.6 Printing applications and logfiles
You can print a description of the current application, e.g., the worktable assignment and
procedure of commands defined in a method.
When the application has been executed on a device connected to your system, you can also
print the logfiles of every individual run. The logfiles record every program step carried out by the
device (see Reading logfiles on p. 98).
To print an application or its logfiles, proceed as follows.
1. Select the application in the list of open applications on the left-hand side of the Work tab.
The current application is highlighted. To print the method, select the worktable. To print a
logfile of the method, select the Logs tab.
2. Click on the Print icon, or select File - Print from the main menu.
64
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
3. The Preview window opens.
In the Preview window, the following icons are available (from left to right):
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Search: to search the document text.
Print: to select a printer and print the document.
Quick Print: to print the document on the standard printer configured in your system.
Page Setup: to change the page setup before printing.
Scale: adjust the size of your printout here.
Hand Tool: to navigate by dragging the document up or down with the mouse.
Magnifier: to toggle the zoom factor between 100% and full-page view.
Zoom / Zoom Out / Zoom In: to adjust the zoom factor.
First / Previous / Next / Last Page: to navigate through the document pages.
Multiple Pages: to specify the number of pages displayed in the Preview window.
PDF: to save the printout as a PDF in a folder you have selected.
4. Print or save the document as required, using the icons in the Preview window, as described
above.
5. To exit the preview, close the Preview window.
65
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.6.2
Worktable tab - equip the worktable
In the Worktable tab you equip worktable of the epMotion with the labware required for the
method.
To go to the Worktable tab select the Work tab on the left-hand side of the program window and
select the Worktable tab.
The Worktable tab is divided into 3 sections.
The Worktable (section 1) is displayed in the top right section of the Worktable tab. It shows the
worktable assignment for the active method. You can edit the worktable with the mouse, add and
remove labware or move labware to a different location on the worktable.
The Labware list (section 2) is displayed in the bottom section of the Worktable tab. It contains the
available labware that you can place on the worktable.
The Placement list (section 3) is displayed in the top left section of the Worktable tab. It shows a
list of all occupied worktable locations and the labware placed at each location.
66
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.6.2.1 Positioning labware on the worktable
To position labware on the worktable, proceed as follows.
1. In the Labware Type list select the type of labware you want to use (e.g., "Plates").
If there are subgroups they are displayed in the Sub-Type list.
2. In the Sub-Type list select the subgroup you want to use (e.g., "mtp96").
The available labware of this type is displayed in the Labware list.
3. In the Labware list select the labware you want to position on the worktable (e.g.,
"CO_MTP_360_1").
Some information on the selected labware is displayed on the right-hand side.
4. To position the labware on the worktable, press the left mouse button and keep it pressed,
dragging the labware upwards from the list.
Hint!
While you are dragging the labware, it is attached to the mouse pointer by its upper left-hand
corner. To position the labware on the worktable, direct the mouse pointer (not the center of the
labware icon) to the intended location. The mouse pointer carries a small "+" (plus) symbol if the
labware can be positioned at the current location.
5. Drag the labware to its intended location on the worktable and drop it there by releasing the
mouse button.
67
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
A dialog window opens which allows you to change the settings for this labware.
6. If required, edit the name of the labware in the Name field.
7. If the optical sensor is to perform liquid detection at this location during the method, then set
the desired option.
The following options are available:
• Off: Liquid detection is switched off at this location. If you use this option, click in the
Volume field and specify a volume for the labware.
• Random Access: The optical sensor performs liquid detection at a few randomly-selected
positions of this labware.
• All Positions: The optical sensor performs liquid detection at all positions of this labware. It
is not recommended to select this option for racks and plates with 96 positions, as this is
time-consuming.
If required, you can always edit these settings again later (see Editing labware properties on
the worktable on p. 71).
8. Only for an epMotion with epBlue ID and barcode reader: You can select whether a barcode
ID should be assigned to the labware. This option must only be switched on for true source
and destination labware. Set the IDs for intermediate labware (e.g., diluting plates) always to
none. There are 3 ways of doing this:
• Manual scan: In the Run section you will be requested to manually read the used positions
with the barcode reader.
• Entry list: In the Run section you will be requested to select an already existing barcode list
for the allocation. For control purposes, you will be requested at the start of the method to
read the barcode of the first position in the list.
• None: No barcode ID is assigned to the labware.
9. Click on OK to confirm the settings.
The labware is positioned in the location.
68
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
10. Proceed in the same way to supply the other locations on the worktable.
The labware on the worktable is also displayed in the Placement list on the left-hand side of the
Worktable tab.
When positioning labware, please note the following restrictions:
Hint!
•
•
•
•
all A locations: no reservoir rack.
Location B0: not all labware items are suitable.
all C locations: no tips.
Vac Lid can only be placed in gripper position.
To check whether a particular labware item can be positioned in a location, try dragging the
labware over that location and observe the shape of the mouse pointer: the labware can be
positioned only if the mouse pointer carries a "+" (plus) symbol.
Equip vacuum unit
Only for a epMotion with epBlue ID and barcode reader.
Barcode
If you use a Vacuum command to transfer samples from a filter plate to a destination plate, you
must configure the ID label (see p. 66) for the filter plate.
 Set the ID label to manual scan or entry list and the barcoded destination plate to none.
When the method starts you will be prompted to scan the barcode for the filter plate.
 Instead scan the barcode of the destination plate.
5.6.2.2 Stacking labware at a location
You can stack certain labware components at a location one above the other, e.g., selected
plates or a height adapter and a plate.
In a location you can stack a maximum of five predefined plates from Eppendorf, in the vacuum
unit you can stack four labware components. The maximum stacking height is 126 mm. The
following plates can be stacked in a location:
Hint!
No mixed plate stacks are allowed for barcode IDs. Either all plates have an ID or none are
allowed to have an ID.
•
•
•
•
•
EP_pDNA_96_MTP
EP_TT_PCR_150
EP_TT_PCR_40
EP_DWP_1200
EP_pDNA_96_DWP
69
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
To stack labware at a location, the specifications (geometry, name, bottom tolerance etc.) of the
plates must be the same.
Hint!
Additional labware suitable for stacking is available for download in the VIP section at
www.epMotion.com. To download and import this labware, carry out a labware update.
Dispensing operations are not possible from a plate stack.
Stacks may not be transported by the gripper. Individual plates are removed from the stack for
transport.
The optical sensor can perform location detection. Liquid detection is not possible.
Hint!
When stacking plates, ensure that the filling level is adapted. The working volume should not be
exceeded.
When stacking labware, always proceed in just the same way as when normally positioning
individual labware components (see Positioning labware on the worktable on p. 67).
To stack labware at a location, proceed as follows.
1. Select and position the labware which is to be located in the bottom location (e.g., a height
adapter.
2. Select and position the labware which is to be located at the same top location (e.g., a plate).
Proceed in just the same way as when positioning the bottom labware component.
The two labware components are displayed in the location. The number of stacked items is
displayed in brackets next to the location name.
The stacked labware components are also displayed in the Placement list on the left-hand
side of the Worktable tab.
70
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.6.2.3 Editing labware properties on the worktable
You can edit the labware properties also for labware already placed onto the worktable.
Hint!
To display and edit the properties of labware on the worktable, proceed as follows.
1. Double click on the labware on the worktable or right click on the labware in the Placement list
and select Properties from the context menu.
2. To edit the properties of stacked labware further down in the stack (e.g., a height adapter),
right click on the labware in the Placement list and select Properties from the context menu.
This labware can only be accessed via the Placement list.
A dialog window opens which allows you to change the settings for this labware.
5.6.2.4 Remove labware from the Worktable
To remove labware from the worktable, proceed as follows.
1. Right-click on the labware on the worktable or right-click on the labware in the Placement list
and select Properties from the context menu.
2. Or drag the labware from its location on the worktable to the waste position with the
mouse,and drop it there.
The labware is removed from the worktable and also from the Placement list.
71
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.6.3
Procedure tab - defining a procedure
In the Procedure tab you can define the sequence of the commands to be executed when the
method is run. It is recommended to first equip the worktable with the required labware before
changing to the Procedure tab (see Worktable tab - equip the worktable on p. 66).
To go to the Procedure tab select the Work tab on the left-hand side of the program window and
select the Procedure tab.
The Procedure tab is divided into 4 sections.
The Worktable (section 1) is displayed in the top right section of the Procedure tab. It shows the
current worktable assignment for the active method. To edit the worktable you have to change to
the Worktable tab (see Worktable tab - equip the worktable on p. 66).
The Procedure list (section 2) is displayed on the left-hand side of the Procedure tab. It shows the
procedure as a list of commands, in the order in which they will be executed.
The Parameter section (section 3) is displayed in the bottom right section of the Procedure tab. It
shows the parameters for the command which is currently selected in section 2. You can edit
these parameters.
The Commands section (section 4) is displayed on the left-hand side under the Procedure list. It
contains icons for all the commands you can use to define a procedure.
72
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.6.3.1 Overview of the available commands
All available commands are displayed as icons in the Commands section under the Procedure
list.
Hint!
Hint!
This section gives you only a brief overview of the commands. Details on all commands and their
parameters are included in the reference list (see Reference list of commands and parameters on
p. 82).
Tracking a sample using a barcode ID is only possible with the Sample Transfer and Dilute
commands. Sample IDs with other commands are only recorded in the log. Basic information on
barcode IDs can be found in the chapter "General information on working with ID tracking"
(see p. 44).
The following commands are available for defining a procedure.
Number of Samples: Use the Number of Samples command to specify how
many samples are to be processed in the subsequent steps of the procedure. The
command can be used several times in a method to change the number of
samples during the sequence of the procedure.
Sample Transfer: Use the Sample Transfer command to transfer samples from
different locations of the source tube labware to different locations of the
destination tube labware.
Reagent Transfer: Use the Reagent Transfer command to transfer a reagent
from one or different locations of the source tube labware to different locations of
the destination tube labware.
Dilute: The Dilute command is a modified Sample Transfer command making it
easier to carry out diluting series. A defined volume is transported from one well to
the next several times by means of pipetting.
Pool: The Pool command is used to transfer liquids from several source tube
locations to a single destination tube location. For example, the contents of several
source tube labware wells can be pooled in a new destination tube labware well.
Pool One Destination: With the Pool One Destination command you can
transfer liquids from several source tube locations to a single destination tube
location. This command is a simplified Pool command.
Mix: Use the Mix command to mix liquids at one location.
Vacuum: Only on epMotion 5075 VAC. Use the Vacuum command to set the
vacuum in the vacuum unit.
Transport: The Transport command uses the gripper to transport labware to
another destination location or to the vacuum unit (epMotion 5075 VAC). Tips,
racks, thermoadapters and height adapters cannot be transported. Semi-skirted
and unskirted PCR plates can only be transported in combination with the
thermoblock.
Temperature: Only for epMotion 5075 with thermal module. The Temperature
command is used to specify the temperature of a thermal module.
73
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Thermomixer: Only for epMotion 5075 with thermomixer. With the Thermomixer
command you can configure the temperature and speed of the thermomixer.
Wait: The Wait command is used to define a definite pause before the next step.
The procedure continues automatically after the specified time has elapsed.
Comment: Use the Comment command to enter a comment line to be displayed
at a specific location in the Procedure.
User Intervention: Use the User Intervention command to insert steps into your
method which the user has to execute manually. The procedure only continues
after the operator has confirmed the display message.
5.6.3.2 Adding a command to the program
To add a command to the program, proceed as follows.
1. To insert a command anywhere in the program (either in the procedure or at the end) click on
the Command icon in the Command section in the Procedure tab, e.g., on the Sample Transfer
icon, drag the command to the top and drop it in the desired procedure location.
2. To append a command to the end of the procedure, double-click on the command icon in the
Command section in the Procedure tab, e.g., on the Sample Transfer icon.
The command is added to the procedure.
The command parameters are displayed in the Parameter section of the Procedure tab.
3. Click on the Parameters, Options, Mix and Liquid Type tabs in the Parameter section to edit the
command parameters as required by your method (see Editing the parameters and options of
a command on p. 76).
The example shows the Sample Transfer command. Other commands can have different
options in the Parameter section in the Procedure tab. Details on all commands and their
parameters are included in the reference list (see Reference list of commands and
parameters on p. 82).
4. Complete the procedure by adding other commands in the same way.
In addition to adding commands in the ways described above, you can also move a command
up or down within the procedure (see p. 74), copy a command including its parameters and
options (see p. 75), or delete a command from the procedure (see p. 75).
5.6.3.3 Moving a command up or down in the procedure
To move a command to a different position in the procedure, proceed as follows.
1. In the Procedure list of the Procedure tab click on the command you want to move, drag it up
or down with the mouse and drop it at the new location.
The command is moved to the new location.
74
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.6.3.4 Duplicating a command
To duplicate a command, including its parameters and options, and insert the duplicate into the
procedure, proceed as follows.
1. In the Procedure list of the Procedure tab select the original command and make sure that the
parameters and options have been defined as necessary.
2. Click on the Copy icon, or right-click on the command and select Copy from the context menu.
3. Select the command below the position in which you want to insert the duplicate, right-click
and select Paste before from the context menu.
The command is duplicated and the duplicate is inserted at the chosen position.
You can now edit the parameters of the original command and the duplicate independently of
each other.
5.6.3.5 Removing commands from the procedure
To remove one or several commands from the procedure, proceed as follows.
1. In the Procedure list of the Procedure tab select the command you want to remove.
2. To select a sequence of commands, click on the first command in the sequence, then press
the Shift key on the keyboard and click on the last command in the sequence.
75
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
3. Press the Del key on the keyboard, or right-click on the command or sequence of commands
and select Delete from the context menu.
A warning message appears.
4. To delete, click on OK.
The command or sequence of commands is removed from the procedure.
5.6.3.6 Editing the parameters and options of a command
Each command has its own set of parameters, which you can edit at any time while you are
creating or editing a procedure.
To edit the parameters and options for a command, proceed as follows.
1. In the Procedure list of the Procedure tab select the command you want to edit, e.g., a Sample
Transfer command.
The command parameters are displayed in the Parameter section.
2. Select a dispensing tool from the Pipet. Tool list. If you are using filter tips, activate the Filter
Tips option.
3. First set the volume to be dispensed (Volume) and select the Transfer Type (Pipette or
Multidispense).
76
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
4. Select the source tube (Source) and the destination tube (Destination) for the command
(see Define the source tube (Source) and destination tube (Destination) for a transfer on
p. 77).
5. Specify the Pattern for the command (see Editing the pattern for a Transfer command on
p. 78)
6. To specify further options for the command (e.g., Liquid Type, settings for mixing and changing
tips), click on the Options, Mix and Liquid Type tabs in the Parameter section to edit the
parameters according to the requirements of your method.
7. To discard the changes, click immediately on Discard Changes under the Parameter section
before selecting a different command in the Procedure list.
8. To accept the changes, click on Apply Changes under the Parameter section or select a
different command in the Procedure list.
The example shows the Sample Transfer command. Other commands may have different
options in the Parameter section in the Procedure tab. For a detailed description of the available
parameters and options for each command, see the reference list of commands (see Reference
list of commands and parameters on p. 82).
5.6.3.7 Define the source tube (Source) and destination tube (Destination) for a transfer
You can define up to 4 source tube and destination tube locations for each Transfer command.
To use labware as source or destination for a Transfer command the labware must first have
been positioned on the worktable (see Positioning labware on the worktable on p. 67).
Within one Transfer command you can define up to 4 labware locations for source tubes and up
to 4 locations for destination tubes. The second and all further labware locations must be
compatible with the first labware selected.
There are 2 options for defining source and destination tubes for a Transfer command:
• You can select source and destination tube labware from a list with labware objects
positioned on the worktable (see p. 77).
• Immediately after adding a command to the procedure you can define a source and
destination tube via mouse click (see p. 78).
Selecting source tube and destination tube from a list
You can select up to 4 source tube and destination tube locations by selecting labware from a list
of labware items positioned on the worktable. To do so, proceed as follows.
1. In the Procedure list of the Procedure tab select the command you want to edit, e.g., a Sample
Transfer command.
2. In the Parameter section select the first source tube labware from the list.
The list for the next location becomes active automatically. The second list shows only
labware on the worktable which is compatible with the first selected labware location.
3. Specify further source tube locations in the same way, if required.
4. Select the destination tube labware in the same manner.
The source tube and destination tube locations for this command are active immediately.
77
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Clicking on source and destination with the mouse
You can define up to 4 source tube and destination tube locations by clicking with the mouse
(only possible immediately after you have added the command to the procedure). To do so,
proceed as follows.
1. Add a command to the procedure, e.g., a Sample Transfer command (see Adding a
command to the program on p. 74).
2. Immediately after adding the command, move the mouse over the worktable.
The mouse pointer changes into a dispensing tool symbol.
3. Click on the first source tube labware on the worktable.
The selected source tube labware is highlighted in blue and the Source list in the Parameter
section displays the name of the labware at the top.
4. If required, select further source tube locations by clicking with the mouse (up to 4 locations).
They are also highlighted in blue and displayed as source tube locations in the Parameter
section.
5. To define the destination tube labware, press the Ctrl key on the keyboard and keep it
pressed while clicking on the first destination tube labware on the worktable.
The selected destination tube labware is highlighted in red and the Destination list in the
Parameter section displays the name of the labware at the top.
6. If required, select further destination locations by holding the Ctrl key and clicking with the
mouse (up to 4 locations).
They are also highlighted in red and displayed as destination tube locations in the Parameter
section.
The source and destination locations for this command are active immediately. You can edit
them later by selecting different locations from the lists in the Parameter section
(see Selecting source tube and destination tube from a list on p. 77).
5.6.3.8 Editing the pattern for a Transfer command
The following pattern types are available for Transfer commands:
• Standard pattern (only for Sample Transfer commands): A simple standard pattern which
can be based on rows or columns.
• Regular pattern with automatic pattern detection (for all commands except when using
module racks): a standard pattern which is not strictly based on rows or columns, e.g., for
pipetting a sample from the first column of a source tube plate 1:1 to the second column of a
destination tube plate. To define this pattern, you need to specify only the first few positions.
The pattern is then recognized and completed automatically.
• Irregular pattern (for some commands (see Reference list of commands and parameters on
p. 82)): irregular pattern for a plate or module rack in which the source tube and destination
tube locations can be defined freely. Automatic pattern detection is not possible, all locations
must be specified manually (see Creating an irregular pattern for a plate or a rack on p. 81).
78
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
To edit the pattern for a Transfer command proceed as follows.
1. In the Procedure list of the Procedure tab select the command you want to edit (e.g., a Sample
Transfer command) and define the source and destination tube labware (see Define the
source tube (Source) and destination tube (Destination) for a transfer on p. 77).
2. If the Sample Transfer command requires a standard pattern either by rows or columns,
place a tick in the Standard checkbox and select the row-wise or column-wise option.
3. To define a regular pattern that is not row-wise or column-wise, click on the Pattern button.
The Pattern window opens.
The source and destination tube labware is displayed. The source tube labware is displayed
on the left-hand side with a blue frame. The destination tube labware is displayed on the
right-hand side with a red frame.
4. If there is a previous pattern that you do not want to use, click on the New Pattern button to
remove it.
5. In the source tube labware click on the first location from which liquid is to be aspirated (e.g.,
location 1A).
79
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
6. In the destination tube labware click on the location (or locations) to which the first liquid
volume is to be transferred (e.g., location 2A).
7. In the source tube labware click on the second location from which liquid is to be aspirated
(e.g., location 1B).
8. In the destination tube labware click on the location (or locations) to which the second liquid
volume is to be transferred (e.g., location 2B).
epBlue will attempt to recognize the intended pattern and will highlight the next position in
gray.
9. If the recognized pattern matches your requirements, click on OK to confirm and close the
Pattern window. The pattern will be completed automatically up to the defined number of
samples.
10. If you wish to discard the recognized pattern, click on New Pattern and start again.
11. To check a defined pattern, click on Show Process in the pattern window.
The pattern sequence is displayed and the corresponding source and destination locations
are displayed in the same color.
For a description of all available commands and their parameters, see the reference list of
commands (see Reference list of commands and parameters on p. 82).
Alternatively, you can create an irregular pattern for a plate or module rack (see Creating an
irregular pattern for a plate or a rack on p. 81).
80
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.6.3.9 Creating an irregular pattern for a plate or a rack
An irregular pattern for a plate or module rack is a pattern in which the source and destination
tube locations can be defined freely. Automatic pattern detection is not possible, all positions
must be specified manually. Alternatively, you can define a standard pattern (row-wise or
column-wise) or a regular pattern with automatic pattern detection (see Editing the pattern for
a Transfer command on p. 78).
To create an irregular pattern for a plate, rack or module rack, proceed as follows.
1. In the Procedure list of the Procedure tab select the command you want to edit (e.g., a Sample
Transfer command) and define the source and destination tube labware (see Define the
source tube (Source) and destination tube (Destination) for a transfer on p. 77).
2. In the Parameter section in the Irregular Pattern checkbox under the list with the source and/or
destination tube labware place a tick as required.
3. Click on the Pattern button.
The Pattern window opens.
The source and destination tube labware is displayed. The source tube labware is displayed
on the left-hand side highlighted in blue. The destination tube labware is displayed on the
left-hand side highlighted in red.
4. In the source tube labware click on the first location from which liquid is to be aspirated.
81
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5. In the destination tube labware click on the location to which the first liquid volume is to be
transferred.
6. Select all locations of the intended pattern in the same way, alternating between source tube
and destination tube labware.
7. To confirm the pattern and close the Pattern window, click on OK.
8. If you wish to discard the pattern, click on New Pattern and start again.
9. To check a defined pattern, click on Show Process in the pattern window.
The pattern sequence is displayed and the corresponding source and destination tube
locations are displayed in the same color.
For a description of all available commands and their parameters, see the reference list of
commands (see Reference list of commands and parameters on p. 82).
5.6.3.10 Checking the method or individual commands (parameter test)
The parameter test allows you to check whether all required parameters are set, either for the
entire method or for individual commands or a sequence of commands.
1. To check the parameter settings of the current method, click on the Check Application icon in
the toolbar of the Work (see p. 62) tab or select Edit - Check Application from the main menu
or right-click on a created command and select Check Application from the context menu.
2. To check an individual command or a sequence of commands, right-click on the command
and select Check from the context menu or select Edit - Check Commands from the main
menu.
A message window opens to inform you if a parameter error was found. Correct the error and
repeat the check until all errors have been corrected.
5.6.3.11 Importing commands from a CSV file
When working with biological material (e.g., protein solutions, nucleic acid solutions), it may be
necessary to transfer defined quantities of different samples from various parent solutions to a
target container in order to adjust the concentration (thus creating standards). The quantities of
sample material that must be transferred can be determined by physical measurements (e.g., by
using spectroscopic methods, enzymatic analysis, or chemical methods), and the resulting
quantities can then be listed in a table.
 To import a table in CSV file format, select Edit - Import from CSV from the menu.
For details, please refer to the appendix (see Importing commands from a CSV file on
p. 242).
5.6.4
Reference list of commands and parameters
This reference list contains all available commands and their parameters and options. Further
details and specialized information can be found in the appendix.
You can use these commands to define a procedure (see Procedure tab - defining a procedure
on p. 72).
82
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.6.4.1 General configurations for Transfer commands
The following general parameters and options are used for Transfer commands. Click on the
Parameters, Options, Mix and Liquid Type tabs in the Parameters section to edit the command
parameters as required by your method.
Hint!
Some parameters may differ or may not be available for individual commands. In this case please
find additional details in the section about the corresponding Transfer command: Sample
Transfer (see p. 84), Reagent Transfer (see p. 85), Dilute (see p. 85), Pool (see p. 86) and
Pool One Destination (see p. 86).
Parameter
• Pipet. Tool / Filter Tips: select the dispensing tool you want to use from the list. If you are
using filter tips, activate the Filter Tips option.
• Volume: enter the volume to be transferred in each step. The volume is aspirated or
dispensed according to the transfer types specified below.
• Transfer type
– Pipette: the volume set above is aspirated or dispensed in each step.
– Multidispense: the volume set above is dispensed in each multidispense step.
– Multiaspirate: the volume set above is aspirated in each multiaspirate step.
• Source/Destination: select the source tube labware and destination tube labware from the
worktable allocation (see Define the source tube (Source) and destination tube (Destination)
for a transfer on p. 77).
• Pattern: the pattern is used to specify aspiration and dispensing locations within this
command.
– Standard pattern: if the command requires a standard pattern that is either row-wise or
column-wise, check the Standard checkbox and select the row-wise or column-wise
option.
– Regular pattern with automatic pattern detection: to define a regular pattern that is not
row-wise or column-wise, click on the Pattern button and define the intended pattern
(see Editing the pattern for a Transfer command on p. 78).
– Irregular pattern: to create an irregular pattern for a plate or a module rack, check the
Irregular Pattern checkbox below the list of source and/or destination tube labware as
required. Then click on the Pattern button and define the intended pattern (see Creating
an irregular pattern for a plate or a rack on p. 81).
Options
•
•
•
•
Aspirate from bottom: select if the liquid is to be aspirated from the bottom of the well.
Elution from filter: select if the liquid is to be aspirated from a PCR Cleanup filter plate.
Dispense from top: select if the liquid is to be dispensed from the top edge of the well.
Change tips: select one of the available options to specify when the tips are to be changed.
Mix
• Mix before aspirating / Mix after dispensing: activate the relevant option if the liquid is to be
mixed before aspiration or after dispensing. To mix the liquid, it will be aspirated into the tip
and dispensed back into the same well.
• No. of cycles: set the required number of mixing cycles.
• Speed: set the mixing speed.
• Volume: set the volume that is to be aspirated and dispensed during the mixing process.
83
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
• Fixed height: activate this option if you wish to use fixed height positions for mixing, and set the
height values for aspiration and dispensing. The height is measured between the tip and the
bottom of the well.
This option should only be used with filling levels below the volume of the well. With greater
filling volumes, liquid can be forced out of the tube or well!
Liquid Type
• Standard Liquid Type: select the liquid type which most closely resembles the physical
properties of the liquid you want to transfer.
• Change Parameters: to change the settings for the selected liquid type for this command,
activate this option and set the values according to your requirements.
To restore the default settings for the selected liquid type, click the Set Default button.
5.6.4.2 Number of Samples
Use the Number of Samples command to specify how many samples are to be processed in the
subsequent steps of the procedure. It applies to all commands until the next Number of
Samples command in the procedure. The command can be used several times in a method to
change the number of samples during the sequence of the procedure.
Dependent on the type and purpose of the following commands, the Number of Samples
command has different effects:
• Sample Transfer: number of samples picked up by the source tube plate.
• Reagent Transfer: number of wells of the destination tube plate into which the reagent is
dispenses.
• Dilute: number of samples to be diluted.
• Pool and Pool One Destination: Number of wells in the source tube plate from which liquid is
aspirated.
• Mix: number of wells in the plate in which the liquid is mixed.
Parameter
• Fix Number of Samples / (Max) Number of Samples: to define a fixed number of samples for all
runs of this method, activate the Fix Number of Samples option and enter the required number.
The specified number of samples will then be used for all method runs.
To use a variable number of samples, deactivate the Fix Number of Samples option and enter
the maximum number of samples. The exact number of samples for each individual method
run must then be entered by the operator when the method starts.
• Comment: enter a comment, if required. The comment will be displayed at the start of the
method.
5.6.4.3 Sample Transfer
Use the Sample Transfer command to transfer samples from different locations of the source
tube labware to different locations of the destination tube labware. During the Sample Transfer
each sample is transferred in accordance with a defined pattern from its original well in the
source tube plate to a defined well in the destination tube plate.
This command requires the general parameters for Transfer commands (see General
configurations for Transfer commands on p. 83). The following details are specific for this
command.
Parameter
• Transfer type
– Pipette: the volume set above is aspirated or dispensed in each step.
– Multidispense: the volume set above is dispensed in each multidispense step.
– Multiaspirate: not available.
84
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.6.4.4 Reagent Transfer
Use the Reagent Transfer command to transfer samples from a location in the source tube
labware to different locations in the destination tube labware. During the reagent transfer, the
reagent is taken from its tube or well in the source tube labware and dispensed into various
specified wells in the destination tube plate, according to the defined pattern.
This command requires the general parameters for Transfer commands (see General
configurations for Transfer commands on p. 83). The following details are specific for this
command.
Parameter
• Transfer type
– Pipette: the volume set above is aspirated or dispensed in each step.
– Multidispense: the volume set above is dispensed in each multidispense step.
– Multiaspirate: not available.
• Pattern: the pattern is used to specify aspiration and dispensing positions within this
command.
– Standard pattern: not available.
– Regular pattern with automatic pattern detection: to define a regular pattern that is not
row-wise or column-wise, click on the Pattern button and define the intended pattern
(see Editing the pattern for a Transfer command on p. 78).
– Irregular pattern: to create an irregular pattern for a plate or a module rack, check the
Irregular Pattern checkbox below the list of source and/or destination tube labware as
required. Then click on the Pattern button and define the intended pattern (see Creating
an irregular pattern for a plate or a rack on p. 81).
5.6.4.5 Dilute
The Dilute command is a modified Sample Transfer command making it easier to carry out
diluting series. A defined volume is transported from one well to the next several times by means
of pipetting.
This command requires the general parameters for Transfer commands (see General
configurations for Transfer commands on p. 83). The following details are specific for this
command.
Parameter
• Transfer type
– Pipette: the volume set above is aspirated or dispensed in each step.
– Multidispense: not available.
– Multiaspirate: not available.
• Pattern: the pattern is used to specify aspiration and dispensing locations within this
command.
– Standard pattern: not available.
– Regular pattern with automatic pattern detection: to define a regular pattern that is not
row-wise or column-wise, click on the Pattern button and define the intended pattern
(see Editing the pattern for a Transfer command on p. 78).
– Irregular pattern: Only available for the source tube location. To create an irregular pattern
for a source tube plate or a module rack, check the Irregular Pattern checkbox below the
list of source and/or destination tube labware. Then click on the Pattern button and define
the intended pattern (see Creating an irregular pattern for a plate or a rack on p. 81).
Options
•
•
•
•
Aspirate from bottom: select if the liquid is to be aspirated from the bottom of the well.
Elution from filter: not applicable.
Dispense from top: select if the liquid is to be dispensed from the top edge of the well.
Change tips: select one of the available options to specify when the tips are to be changed.
85
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.6.4.6 Pool
The Pool command is used to transfer liquids from several source tube locations to a single
destination tube location. For example, the contents of several source tube labware wells can be
pooled in a new destination tube labware well.
This command requires the general parameters for Transfer commands (see General
configurations for Transfer commands on p. 83). The following details are specific for this
command.
Parameter
• Transfer type
– Pipette: the volume set above is aspirated or dispensed in each step.
– Multidispense: not available.
– Multiaspirate: the volume set above is aspirated in each multiaspirate step.
• Pattern: the pattern is used to specify aspiration and dispensing locations within this
command.
– Standard pattern: not available.
– Regular pattern with automatic pattern detection: to define a regular pattern that is not
row-wise or column-wise, click on the Pattern button and define the intended pattern
(see Editing the pattern for a Transfer command on p. 78).
– Irregular pattern: not available.
Options
•
•
•
•
Aspirate from bottom: select if the liquid is to be aspirated from the bottom of the well.
Elution from filter: not applicable.
Dispense from top: select if the liquid is to be dispensed from the top edge of the well.
Change tips: select one of the available options to specify when the tips are to be changed.
5.6.4.7 Pool One destination
With the Pool One Destination command you can transfer liquid from several source tube
locations into a single destination tube location. This command is a simplified Pool
command.(see Pool on p. 86)
This command requires the general parameters for Transfer commands (see General
configurations for Transfer commands on p. 83). The following details are specific for this
command.
Parameter
• Transfer type
– Pipette: the volume set above is aspirated or dispensed in each step.
– Multidispense: not available.
– Multiaspirate: the volume set above is aspirated in each multiaspirate step.
• Pattern: the pattern is used to specify aspiration and dispensing locations within this
command.
– Standard pattern: not available.
– Regular pattern with automatic pattern detection: to define a regular pattern that is not
row-wise or column-wise, click on the Pattern button and define the intended pattern
(see Editing the pattern for a Transfer command on p. 78).
– Irregular pattern: Only available for the source tube location. To create an irregular pattern
for a source tube plate or a module rack, check the Irregular Pattern checkbox below the
list of source and/or destination tube labware. Then click on the Pattern button and define
the intended pattern (see Creating an irregular pattern for a plate or a rack on p. 81).
86
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Options
•
•
•
•
Aspirate from bottom: select if the liquid is to be aspirated from the bottom of the well.
Elution from filter: not applicable.
Dispense from top: select if the liquid is to be dispensed from the top edge of the well.
Change tips: select one of the available options to specify when the tips are to be changed.
5.6.4.8 Mix
Use the Mix command to mix liquids at one location. To mix the liquid, it will be aspirated into the
tip and dispensed back into the same well.
Parameter
• No. of cycles: set the required number of mixing cycles.
• Speed: set the mixing speed.
• Tool / Filter Tips: select from the list the dispensing tool you want to use. If you are using filter
tips, activate the Filter Tips option.
• Mixing Volume: set the volume that is to be aspirated and dispensed during the mixing
process.
• Fixed height: activate this option if you wish to use fixed height positions for mixing, and set the
height values for aspiration and dispensing. The height is measured between the tip and the
bottom of the well.
This option should only be used with filling levels below the volume of the well. With greater
filling volumes, liquid can be forced out of the tube or well!
• Racks: select the labware from the worktable assignment.
• Pattern: the pattern is used to specify mixing positions within this command.
– Regular pattern with automatic pattern detection: click on the Pattern button and define the
intended pattern.
– Irregular pattern: To create an irregular pattern place a tick in the Irregular Pattern
checkbox under the Racks list. Then click on the Pattern button and define the intended
pattern.
Options
• Liquid Type: select the Liquid Type which most closely resembles the physical properties of the
liquid you want to mix.
• Change tips: select one of the available options to specify when the tips are to be changed.
5.6.4.9 Vacuum (epMotion 5075 VAC)
Only on epMotion 5075 VAC. Use the Vacuum command to set the vacuum in the vacuum unit.
Parameter
•
•
•
•
Frame: select the Vac Frame.
Vacuum Pressure: set the vacuum pressure in kPa or mbar.
Vacuum time: set the time for extraction.
Use Vacuum Lid: activate this option if you want to use the Vac Lid. At the start of the
command, the gripper transports the Vac Lid from location T0 to the filter plate in the vacuum
unit.
• Check levels: activate this option if all wells of the filter plate are to be scanned by the Optical
Sensor following application of the vacuum. Check Levels must not be preceded by a
dispensing command.
87
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.6.4.10 Transport (epMotion 5075)
The Transport command uses the gripper to transport labware to another destination location or
to the vacuum unit (epMotion 5075 VAC). Tips, racks, thermoadapters and height adapters
cannot be transported. Semi-skirted and unskirted PCR plates can only be transported in
combination with the thermoblock.
Parameter
• Labware: select the labware to be transported.
• To Location: select the destination location for the transport.
5.6.4.11 Temperature (epMotion 5075 with temperature control unit)
The Temperature command is used to specify the temperature of a thermal module.
Parameter
• Location: select a thermal module.
• Temperature on: switch on temperature-control.
• Hold Temperature: activate this option if the selected thermal module should hold the target
temperature after the method has been performed.
• Temperature: set a temperature between 0°C and 110°C.
If you want to switch of the temperature control before the end of the method, insert a different
Temperature command at the appropriate position in the procedure and deactivate the
parameter Temperature On in this second Temperature command.
5.6.4.12 Thermomixer (epMotion 5075 with Thermomixer)
With the Thermomixer command you can define the temperature and mixing configurations for
the thermomixer.
Parameter
• Template: optionally you can choose precast templates for different mix functions.
• Save: you can save your own templates.
• Speed on: activate the checkbox if you want to mix.
– Speed: set a speed between 300 – 2000 rpm.
– Time: set a time between 30 s and 120 min.
• Temperature on: activate the checkbox if you want to set a temperature.
– keep temperature after method run: activate this checkbox, if you want to hold the
temperature after the method run.
– Temperature: set a temperature between 4°C and 95°C.
If you want to switch of the temperature control before the end of the method, insert a different
Thermomixer command at the appropriate position in the procedure and deactivate the
parameter Temperature On in this second Thermomixer command.
The Thermomixer can reach a minimal temperature of 15°C below the actual room temperature.
Hint!
88
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.6.4.13 Wait
The Wait command defined a definite pause before the next step. The procedure continues
automatically after the specified time has elapsed.
Parameter
• Wait Time: set the duration of the pause.
• Wait for Temperature / Location: activate this option if the epMotion 5075 should wait until the
target temperature at a location has been reached, and select the location from the list.
5.6.4.14 Comment
Use the Comment command to enter a comment line to be displayed at a specific location in the
Procedure.
• Comment: enter the text for the comment.
5.6.4.15 User Intervention
Use the User Intervention command to insert steps into your method which the user has to
execute manually. The procedure only continues after the operator has confirmed the display
message.
• Comment: enter an informative comment to tell the operator what task he or she needs to
carry out.
• Alarm: activate this option for an alerting signal when this step in the procedure is reached.
5.6.5
The Run tab
With the Run tab you can start a method on one or several devices available in your system.
To go to the Run tab select the Work tab on the left-hand side of the program window and select
the Run tab.
89
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
The Run tab is divided into 2 sections.
The Options section (section 1) is displayed in the top part of the Run tab. It guides you through
the starting process step by step and allows you to enter additional parameters and select the
required options for the method run.
The Worktable (section 2) is displayed in the bottom part of the Run tab. It shows the worktable
assignment for the active method and allows you to check the labware for the method. You
cannot edit the worktable here; To do so you need to change to the Worktable tab (see Worktable
tab - equip the worktable on p. 66).
To start a method, proceed as follows.
1. Open the method (see Opening an application on p. 50).
2. Change to the Run tab or, while the Worktable or Procedure tabs are active, click on the Start
Method icon.
The Options section in the Run tab displays a list of devices in your system. To display only
devices which are currently available and suitable for the selected method, activate the Filter
Devicelist option.
3. Select the device you want to use and click on Run.
If the number of samples is defined as variable for any step in the procedure, a window opens
in which the actual number of samples for the current run of the method must be entered
manually. The number of samples request does not appear in methods with a fixed number of
samples.
4. Enter the number of samples and click on OK. If required, enter the number of samples for
further commands in the same way.
90
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5. Check the supply of the worktable of the device and make sure that it matches the worktable
assignment defined for the method (as displayed in the Worktable section of the Run tab).
Hint!
If barcode tracking is activated, in the labware settings window you can select between the
settings manual scan and entry list.
6. To edit labware-specific settings for level sensor and volumes, double-click on the labware in
the Worktable section.
The Labware Settings window opens.
7. Change the settings as required, and click on OK. Edit the settings for other labware in the
same way, if required.
Hint!
The Barcode Reader Settings checkbox is only active if ID tracking has been switched on in the
method to be started (see p. 66).
8. If you want to deactivate barcode tracking for this method run, deactivate the Barcode Reader
Settings checkbox.
9. Under Level Sensor Settings in the Options section define the level sensor settings for this
method run.
91
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
The following options are available:
• Levels: check the liquid levels according to the settings defined for the individual labware
items.
• Tips: check the type and quantity of tips in the tip rack.
• Locations: check that the labware is positioned correctly on the worktable, as specified in
the method.
The options you select here only apply to this particular method run. To define the general
level sensor settings use the function Optical Sensor in Functions tab (see Optical sensor on
p. 112).
10. Only for an epMotion with epBlue ID and barcode reader: click on Run or Next.
If ID tracking has been activated in the method, you are prompted to enter the barcodes or
IDs starting with the destination labware. The corresponding labware is highlighted in the
worktable view by a red border.
• Scan barcodes (manual scan): For racks the individual location to which the barcode is
to be allocated is marked in red.
a
Name the list that is created during the method run for this labware as required under
List name.
b
Scan the appropriate barcode with the barcode reader or enter the ID manually into
the input field after activating the checkbox next to Manual Enter.
c
When entering the barcode manually, confirm your input with OK. The barcode is
entered on the right in the Read Barcodes list.
d
Click on the Next button to enter the barcodes for the next labware.
e
If 2 barcode IDs are to be issued for a reagent, 2 input fields appear for one ID each
(see p. 117). If you do not require the second ID use Use only one ID.
f
The method starts when all barcode IDs have been assigned and no further entries
are requested.
• Entry lists: For labware with activated Entry list proceed as follows:
a
The Select entry list window opens with all entry lists. At this point you also have the
option of importing further entry lists.
b
Select the suitable list and press Accept. The name of the list appears in a text field
under the displayed labware.
c
Scan the barcode for the marked position to enable the program to compare it with the
entry list.
If no other entries are required, the method will start if there is a match.
If the scanned barcode ID does not match the entry list, an error message will appear
and the Select entry list windows is displayed again. Check whether the scanned code
or the entry list is correct.
92
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
11. If liquid detection is switched off for the method or for individual labware components, the next
steps display the labware information for each component, where the volume settings must
be entered manually.
12. Enter the current volume and click on Run. If required, enter the volumes for other labware in
the same way.
The method starts and the display changes to the Control tab(see The Control tab on p. 96).
93
ep
Motion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.6.5.1 Simulation
Before you start your method, you have the ability to simulate the process.
To simulate a method, proceed as follows.
1. Open the method (see Opening an application on p. 50).
2. Change to the Run tab or click with the tabs Worktable or Procedure active on the Start Method
icon.
The Options section in the Run tab displays a list of devices in your system. To display only
devices which are currently available and suitable for the selected method, activate the Filter
Devicelist option.
3. Select the device you want to use, click on Simulation and click on Run.
If the number of samples is defined as variable for any step in the procedure, a window opens
in which the actual number of samples for the current simulation of the method must be
entered manually. The number of samples request does not appear in methods with a fixed
number of samples.
4. Enter the number of samples and click on OK. If required, enter the number of samples for
further commands in the same way.
5. Specify the level sensor settings for the simulation. Click on Apply when you change the
settings or click on Close when you don´t change the settings.
The simulation starts in the Simulation tab.
Hint!
Only one simulation can start per client. To start a new simulation you have to close the last
simulation first. To exit epBlue the simulation must be close.
Controlling the simulation
If you start a simulation, the Simulation tab opens.
94
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
The Control icons allow you to control the simulation. The following options are available.
You can vary the speed of the simulation from real time (Value 1) to ten fold faster
by moving the speed needle with the mouse.
Start: to continue the simulation. The simulation will resume until the end, or until
you stop it again
Steps: to carry out the simulation step by step. The simulation will perform the
next step or action, and will then stop again.
Stop: to interrupt the simulation. The simulation will stop at the current step or
action and wait for further instructions. The other Control icons become active.
Abort: to abort the simulation.
Exit: to exit the simulation. The Simulation tab is closed. Now you can start another
simulation or exit epBlue.
95
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.6.5.2 Debug log
Hint!
The debug log can only be recorded by the administrator and is required only if the Eppendorf
Service team needs more information in the event of any faults occurring.
As administrator, you also have the option at the start of a method of recording a debug log for
this method run. The debug log records detailed information about the method run in question.
1. Before starting the method, click on the Debug Log checkbox.
The checkbox then contains a tick.
2. Then start the method as usual.
Recording the debug log can cause the method run to proceed more slowly.
3. The debug log can be viewed and printed out from the Logs tab (see The Logs tab on p. 98).
5.6.6
The Control tab
In the Control tab you can monitor and control the devices on which your methods are currently
running.
epBlue automatically changes to the Control tab if you have started a method via the Run tab
(see The Run tab on p. 89).
96
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
The Control tab is divided into 3 sections.
1
4
2
3
The Worktable section (section 1) is displayed in the top part of the Control tab. While the method
is running, it shows the status of the worktable at the current step in the procedure.
The runtime section (section 2) displays the predicted remaining runtime until the end of the
application.
The Logfile section (section 3) displays the logfile which records every step in the procedure and
provides detailed information on the current status of the run.
The Procedure Progress section (section 4) is displayed in the center of the Control tab. It
highlights the current step in the procedure and displays some information on the command that
is being carried out. The Control icons on the left-hand side allow you to pause, to carry out the
method step by step, or to abort the run.
5.6.6.1 Controlling the method run
Whilst the method is running the current command is highlighted in the Procedure Progress
section.
The Control icons allow you to control the method run. The following options are available.
Stop: to stop the method run. The device will stop at the current step or action and
wait for further instructions. The other Control icons become active.
Steps: to carry out the method step by step. The device will perform the next step
or action in the method, and will then stop again.
Start: to continue the method run. The device will resume the method run until the
end, or until you stop it again.
Abort: to abort the method run. The device will abort the method run and return to
its initial state.
97
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.6.6.2 Reading logfiles
A logfile is generated automatically when a method is started. The logfile precisely records every
step of the process.
You can view and print the logfiles and the method description (see Printing applications and
logfiles on p. 64).
5.6.7
The Logs tab
The Logs tab provides an overview of all logfiles that have run for this application.
Data loss due to missing back-ups
The system does not automatically back up the logfiles.
NOTICE!
 Save the logfiles using the Backup function.
 Select the entry of a method run in the list.
The corresponding logfile is displayed in the Selected Log File section.
 To print the log, click on Print in the toolbar or on File-Print in the menu.
98
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.7
The Labware tab
5.7.1
Overview of the Labware tab
Hint!
This tab is only displayed if you are logged in as a member of a user group with the necessary
user rights.
If the Labware tab is empty when opened, you first have to open the labware via the Home tab
(see The Home tab on p. 46) or the file window (see The file window on p. 49).
epBlue automatically changes to the Labware tab if you have opened labware via the Home tab or
the file window. You can access the empty Labware tab also through a mouse click. With the
Labware tab you can compile labware for use in yours system and, provided you have the
necessary access rights, can create and edit your own labware combinations.
Generally the Labware tab contains the following two editing modes.
If you edit a Rack and tube combination or a Module rack and tube combination the Labware
tab displays lists with the available racks, module racks and tubes from which you can select the
labware components.
If you fill a Reservoir rack the Labware tab displays the reservoir rack and you can move different
reservoirs and filled module racks into the rack via Drag-and-Drop.
99
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
100
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.7.1.1 List of open labware
On the left-hand side of the Labware tab a list with all open labware is displayed. Several labware
items can be open at the same time and can be edited in parallel. The current labware is
highlighted in darker blue. To switch between the items, click on the labware names in the list.
5.7.1.2 Icons in the Labware tab
In the Labware tab the following icons are available in the toolbar under the main menu.
•
•
•
•
•
New... New Application: to create a new application for editing
Open... Open Application / Open Labware: to open an existing application or labware
Save: to save changes to applications or labware
Print: to print a report
Logout: to log out of your user account and exit the software
Alternatively, these functions are also available in the File menu.
5.7.2
Activate or deactivate labware
You can activate or deactivate labware for use in your system. If you edit applications, only the
active labware is displayed in the Worktable tab (see Worktable tab - equip the worktable on
p. 66). Deactivated labware will not be displayed and cannot be used in applications. You can
reactivate deactivated labware at any time.
Hint!
Before you deactivate labware, make sure that it is not used in any applications. Applications
using labware which is not active will not run in your system.
To activate or deactivate labware for use in your system, proceed as follows.
101
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
1. Open the labware file window (see Access to the file window on p. 49).
2. Select a labware folder on the left-hand side of the Folder list.
If there are subfolders, these are displayed in the Subfolder list.
3. If required, select a subfolder.
The labware in this folder is displayed in the Labware list.
A checked checkbox next to the labware indicates that this labware is active and can be used
in applications.
4. To view additional information on a labware item, select the required labware and click on Info
in the Labware Properties section.
5. Activate or deactivate the labware items as required by clicking the checkboxes.
6. Close the Labware file window.
The labware you marked as active will be available for use in applications.
You can change these settings again at any time.
5.7.3
Adjusting the labware bottom tolerance
Hint!
Bottom tolerance can be adjusted only for some labware types, such as plates, tubes and tubs.
You can identify editable labware in the file window easily by clicking on it: if the Edit Labware icon
is active, you can edit the bottom tolerance for this labware.
Bottom tolerance describes the distance between the calculated bottom of the tube and the
calculated lowest part of the pipette tip. The default setting for bottom tolerance for the majority of
tubes is 1 mm. For some reservoirs, it is 2.5 mm.
A reduction in bottom tolerance leads to a lower remaining volume and should only be used with
expensive reagents. Reduced bottom tolerance should be examined again when changing batch
of pipette tips, plates or tubes or if there is doubt about dispensing being correct.
In the case of special tasks, for example removing liquids from above a pellet, it is recommended
that the factory-set bottom tolerance should be increased. The user has sole responsibility for the
correctness of dispensing and for straightforward aspiration in the case of tubes with altered
bottom tolerance.
Adjusting the bottom tolerance for labware is at your own risk.
Hint!
To adjust bottom tolerance for labware, proceed as follows.
102
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
1. Open the labware file window (see Access to the file window on p. 49).
2. Select a labware folder on the left-hand side of the Folder list.
If there are subfolders, these are displayed in the Subfolder list.
3. If required, select a subfolder.
The labware in this folder is displayed in the Labware list.
4. In the Labware list select the labware for which you want to modify the bottom tolerance.
The properties of the selected labware are displayed on the right-hand side.
5. To edit the selected labware, click on Properties.
A dialog window appears.
6. Enter the required value in the Bottom Tol. field.
The remaining volume is displayed below. The minimum bottom tolerance is 200 μm.
7. Click on Save to save the new setting.
The new settings are saved. If the original labware file is read-only (Eppendorf Standard
Labware), a copy of the original labware file is created automatically and is saved with the
new settings. Copies are numbered consecutively.
A reduced bottom tolerance should be approved for use only following the appropriate test
runs. With the 30 mL and 100 mL reservoirs in particular, the reservoir must not be lifted by
the pipette tips during aspiration as a result of a reduction in bottom tolerance.
103
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
When calculating the Remaining Volume, the minimum immersion depth of 0.7 mm for the
pipette tip in the liquid is included in addition to bottom tolerance. With the 30 mL and 100 mL
reservoirs, volume information is not absolutely accurate in the case of reduced bottom
tolerance (because of the serrated bottom).
In the case of less stable plates it should be noted that the plate could be slightly bent. It is
therefore not recommended to reduce bottom tolerance with such plates.
5.7.4
Filling racks and module racks with tubes
You can create your own labware combinations from existing components, e.g., new
rack-and-tube or module-rack-and-tube combinations. The module racks you equip here can
then be combined with various reservoirs to create your own customized reservoir racks (see Fill
reservoir rack with reservoirs and filled module racks on p. 107).
To equip a rack or module rack with tubes, proceed as follows.
1. Open the labware file window (see Access to the file window on p. 49).
2. In the left-hand side of the Folder list and in the Subfolder list select the folder Equip Racks +
Modules with Tubes.
The existing labware combinations in this folder are displayed in the Labware list.
The properties of the selected folder are displayed on the right-hand side.
3. To create a new labware combination, e.g., to equip a module rack with tubes, click on New
Labware.
A dialog window opens.
4. Enter a name for the new labware. If required, enter a short description of the combination in
the Comment field.<Emphasis/>
5. Click on Create.
104
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
The new labware combination has been created and is displayed in the Labware list.
The new labware is opened and displayed in the Labware tab.
The Racks list on the left-hand side displays the available racks and module racks. The Tubes
list in the center displays the available tubes with which you can equip the racks and module
racks.
6. In the Racks list select a rack or module rack. In the Tubes list select the appropriate tubes.
If you make a selection in the Racks or Tubes lists, the lists are filtered so that only the
components are displayed which can be used in combination with the selected object.
The selected items are displayed as graphics below the list. The Product Info field on the
right shows additional information on the selected labware.
105
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
7. To reset both lists and make a new selection, click on Clear on the right-hand side.
For existing labware which you want to change, set the labware back to its basic state with
Reset. When you create new racks or tubes via Create Labware, Reset and Clear have the
same function.
8. When you have selected a rack or module rack and the suitable micro test tubes, right-click
on the labware in the list on the left-hand side of the Labware tab and click on Save as in the
context menu or click on Save as on the right-hand side of the Labware tab.
The labware combination is saved.
9. To save the combination under a different name, right-click on the labware in the list on the
left-hand side of the Labware tab and select Save As from the context menu.
A dialog opens.
10. Enter a new name for the labware combination and click on Save.
The labware is saved under a new name and displayed in the Labware tab for subsequent
editing.
11. Create and edit other required labware combinations in the same way.
The module racks you have equipped here can now be used to create your own customized
reservoir racks (see p. 107).
106
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.7.5
Fill reservoir rack with reservoirs and filled module racks
You can create your own customized reservoir racks by equipping a rack or holder with various
reservoirs or equipped module racks. If you have previously defined your own
module-rack-and-tube combinations (see Filling racks and module racks with tubes on p. 104),
you can now use those equipped module racks in a reservoir rack.
To equip a reservoir rack with reservoirs or equipped module racks, proceed as follows.
1. Open the labware file window (see Access to the file window on p. 49).
2. In the left-hand side of the Folder list and in the Subfolder list select the folder Equip Holder with
Tubes + Modules.
The existing labware combinations in this folder are displayed in the Labware list.
The properties of the selected folder are displayed on the right-hand side.
3. To create a new labware combination, e.g., a new holder or reservoir rack, click on New
Labware.
A dialog window opens.
4. Enter a name for the new labware. If required, enter a short description of the combination in
the Comment field.<Emphasis/>
5. Click on Create.
The new labware combination has been created and is displayed in the Labware list.
107
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
The new labware is opened and displayed in the Labware tab.
The list on the left shows the available reservoirs and the equipped module racks which you
can use to equip the reservoir rack.
Hint!
108
While you are dragging the reservoir or equipped module rack, it is attached to the mouse pointer
by its upper left-hand corner. To position it in the reservoir rack, direct the mouse pointer (not the
center of the reservoir or module rack icon) to the intended location.
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
6. Select a reservoir or equipped module rack from the list, drag it with the mouse to its intended
location in the reservoir rack and drop it there by releasing the mouse button.
The reservoir or equipped module rack is displayed in the reservoir rack.
The fields in the lower part of the Labware tab show additional information on the labware
selected above.
7. To replace an item in the reservoir rack with a different reservoir or equipped module rack,
simply drag the new item to the intended location. The old item is removed automatically.
8. When you have equipped the reservoir rack, click on Save.
The combination is saved.
9. To save the combination under a new name right click on the labware in the list on the
left-hand side of the Labware tab and select Save As in the context menu or click on Save as
on the right-hand side of the Labware tab.
10. Enter a new name for the labware combination and click on Save.
The labware is saved under a new name and displayed in the Labware tab for subsequent
editing.
11. Create and edit other required reservoir racks and module racks in the same way.
109
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.8
The Functions tab
5.8.1
Overview of the Functions tab
Hint!
This tab is only displayed if you are logged in as a member of a user group with the necessary
user rights.
The Functions tab contains some general functions for configuring the system.
Only for a epMotion with epBlue ID and barcode reader.
Barcode
5.8.1.1 Barcode reader
The top entry on the left-hand side of the Functions tab allows you to change the settings for the
Barcode reader.
5.8.1.2 List of available devices
On the left-hand side of the Functions tab a list with all available devices is displayed. The current
device is highlighted in darker blue. To switch between the devices, click on the device names in
the list.
5.8.1.3 Two tabs for configuring devices
There are two further tabs within the Functions tab:
Properties: The Properties tab displays a component list and specifies its respective firmware,
proxy and server versions.
110
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Settings: The Settings tab displays general information and you can execute service functions
through it as described in the following sections.
5.8.2
Barcode reader
Only for a epMotion with epBlue ID and barcode reader.
Barcode
Use this function to change the settings of the barcode reader.
 Trigger mode:
• Activate Manual/Serial to read barcodes by pressing the key on the barcode reader.
• Activate Presentation Mode if the barcode reader should automatically and continually
scan for barcodes.
Use Check to verify the current setting of the reader. After completing the changes, press
Update. Use Default to reset the reader to manual/serial.
111
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.8.3
Optical sensor
Use this function to set the general level sensor settings.
To do so, proceed as follows.
1. Select the function Optical Sensor in the Settings list.
The current settings are displayed on the right.
The following options are available:
• Levels: check the liquid levels according to the settings defined for the individual labware
items.
• Tips: check the type and quantity of tips in the tip rack.
• Locations: check that the labware is positioned correctly on the worktable, as specified in
the method.
2. Activate or deactivate the options as required, and click on Apply.
The new level sensor settings are active.
5.8.4
Tool interlock
To unlock the tool in case of a system error. This function allows you to control the locking
mechanism of the carrier which locks the dispensing tool in position when it is taken up by the
carrier.
To control the tool interlock, proceed as follows.
1. In the Settings list select the function Tool interlock.
The current settings are displayed on the right.
The State section displays the current lock status.
• Zero value sensor: shows the status of the sensor which checks that the tool is in zero
position.
• Tool detection sensor: shows the status of the sensor which identifies the tool in the
carrier.
• Interlock: shows the current status of the tool interlock.
• Current Tool: if there is a tool in the carrier, it is identified and displayed here.
Hint!
While you operate the locking mechanism, hold the tool firmly in position with one hand.
Otherwise it will drop out of the locking mechanism and be damaged.
2. Click on Lock or Unlock to lock or unlock the tool.
112
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.8.5
Gripper
Use this function to check and adjust the distance of the gripper jaws.
To do so, proceed as follows.
1. In the Settings list select the function Gripper.
The current settings are displayed on the right.
The Properties section displays the current distance of the gripper jaws.
The Distance section allows you to adjust the distance.
2. Enter the required distance in the Gripper distance field, and click on Set.
3. To export the settings to a file, click on Export.
5.8.6
Thermal module x
Use this function to check the thermal modules in your system.
To do so, proceed as follows.
1. In the Settings list select the function Thermal module x for the thermal module you want to
check.
The settings are displayed on the right.
The State section displays the current status.
• Desired Temperature (°C): shows the target temperature.
• Actual Temperature (°C): shows the current, measured temperature of the thermal
module.
• Actual current (A): shows the current flowing through the thermal module.
2. In the New Temperature field, enter a target temperature for the test (between -5°C and
110°C).
3. In the New time field, enter the duration of the test (between 0 and 99 minutes).
113
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
4. Click on Start.
The thermal module starts heating or cooling, depending on the target setting and its actual
temperature, until either the target temperature is reached or until the target time is up.
In the Set Temperature section, the following information is displayed:
• Time (min): shows the time (in minutes) you specified as duration for the test.
• Remain time (min): shows the remaining time (in minutes) until the end of the test.
• Temp reached after (min:sec): shows the actual time needed to reach the target
temperature.
If the target temperature is reached before the target time is up, the thermal module holds the
temperature for the remaining time until the end of the test.
5. To refresh the display during the test, click on Refresh.
6. To switch on the fan, click on Fan On.
5.8.7
Thermomixer
Use this function to check the Thermomixer in your system. To do so, proceed as follows.
Danger of injury from ejected labware when using the Thermomixer command
WARNING!
When employing too heavy labware and using too high speeds labware can come loose from the
holder and be hurled around.
 Ensure that the front cover is closed and undamaged.
 Select low speeds with heavy labware.
 Only use compatible labware.
Contusion through moving thermomixer
The thermomixer can cause light contusion during operation if touched.
CAUTION!
 Ensure that the front cover is undamaged and is closed during operation.
 Do not reach into the epMotion during operation.
Physical damage due to cross contamination and splashing liquid when using the
Thermomixer command
NOTICE!
With too high liquid level in the tubes and too high speeds liquids can splash out from the tubes
which damage the device and can lead to cross contamination.
 Do not mix at high rotational speed with high liquid levels.
Hint!
The use of the thermomixer via the Service command is your own responsibility. No warranty is
accepted for damage caused by incorrect settings.
Tab. 1:
114
Maximum revolutions per minute [rpm] when using the Thermomixer command
Labware Type
Maximum revolutions per minute [rpm]
Reservoir rack
-
Tubs
1000
Thermorack / Thermoblock
1000
DWP 384
1200
DWP 96
1200
MTP 384
2000
MTP 96
2000
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Labware Type
Maximum revolutions per minute [rpm]
PCR 384
2000
PCR 96
2000
MTP 6
1000
Thermoadapter 96
1000
Thermoadapter 384
1000
1. In the Settings list select the function Thermomixer.
The settings are displayed on the right.
2. In the Parameter section of Mixer control enter a target speed (rpm) and the duration time of
the mixing procedure.
3. Click on Start.
4. The State section of the Mixer control displays the remaining time of the mixing procedure.
5. Click on Stop to determine the mixing procedure.
The Thermomixer mix until the duration time is up or until determine with Stop.
6. The State section of the Temperature control displays the current status.
• Desired Temperature (°C): shows the target temperature.
• Actual Temperature (°C): shows the actual, measured temperature of the thermomixer.
• Actual current (A): shows the current flowing through the thermal module.
7. In the New Temperature field, enter a target temperature for the test (between 4°C and 95°C).
8. In the New time field, enter the duration of the test (between 0 and 99 minutes).
115
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
9. Click on Start.
The Thermomixer starts heating or cooling, depending on the target setting an its actual
temperature, until either the target temperature is reached or until the target time is up. In the
Set Temperature section, the following information is displayed:
• Time (min): shows the time (in minutes) you specified as duration for the test.
• Remain time (min): shows the remaining time (in minutes) until the end of the test.
• Temp reached after (min:sec): shows the actual time needed to reach the target
temperature.
If the target temperature is reached before the target time is up, the thermal module holds the
temperature for the remaining time until the end of the test.
10. Click on Fan on to switch on the fan.
5.8.8
Firmware Update
With this function you can execute a Firmware Update.
1. In the Settings list select the function Firmware Update.
2. Under Flashfile, specify the location of the new firmware file.
3. Click on Flash.
The firmware update is carried out. The progress is shown under State.
4. When the firmware update is complete, exit the client and the server software. Then restart
first the server, then the client software.
5.8.9
Dosing device
Use this function to check the strokes of the dosing device for maintenance and calibration
purposes.
Insert a tool and lock it with the Tool interlock function.
• Tool used: Name of the tool.
• Tool path: File path of the tool specification file.
• Strokes: Strokes of this dosing device.
Don't forget to remove the tool:
Hint!
1. Hold the tool with one hand.
2. Unlock the tool carrier with the Tool interlock function.
116
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.9
The Admin tab
5.9.1
Logging in as administrator
Loss of data due to misuse or loss of the administrator password.
NOTICE!
The administrator password protects the system against unauthorized access to the configuration
and the stored data of all users.
 Make a note of the administrator password and keep it in a safe place. If you lose the
administrator password, contact Eppendorf Service.
 Provide the administrator password only to persons who are permitted to edit the
configuration of the system and who have the necessary skills to do this.
Hint!
In order to prevent unauthorized access to the system, it is strongly recommended that you
change the default administrator password as soon as possible (see The Admin tab on p. 117).
It is recommended that you create individual user accounts for every operator who will use the
epMotion 5075 (see Creating the first user account on p. 35).
To log in as administrator, proceed as follows.
1. To start epBlue, double-click on the Eppendorf epBlue icon on the desktop, or select Start Programs - Eppendorf - epBlue in the Windows Start menu.
The login screen appears.
2. Enter the account name "administrator" and the administrator password (the default is
"admin"), and click on Login.
epBlue starts and the program window displays the Home (see Overview of the Home tab on
p. 46) tab. You are logged in as administrator.
3. Select the Admin tab on the left-hand side of the program window.
5.9.2
Overview of the Admin tab
The Admin tab is only displayed if you are logged in as administrator. It allows you, as
administrator, to manage user accounts and groups.
In the left-hand column of the Admin tab you can change between Account, Group, Extra,
Device List and Backup/Restore. If you are logged in as Admin Lab, in the Admin tab, you will
be able to change between Barcode Settings and Print headers. The current selection is
highlighted.
5.9.2.1 Account
When Account is selected in the left-hand column of the Admin tab, there are two tabs for editing
user accounts:
• Account Overview: shows a list of all user accounts and gives you some information about
every user (see p. 120).
• Edit Account: allows you to create new user accounts or edit existing accounts (see p. 121).
117
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.9.2.2 Group
If Group is selected in the left-hand column of the Admin tab, the Group Overview tab displays a list
containing all the user groups and the user rights defined for each group (see p. 125).
5.9.2.3 Extra
Malfunctions when connecting additional clients.
NOTICE!
 Use only software approved and tested by Eppendorf AG.
 If you connect an additional client (e.g., PC or laptop) yourself and reconfigure the system,
you take sole responsibility for this.
 Only install and configure an extra client if you have adequate experience of the relevant
network and system configuration tasks.
 Integrate and configure an additional client into a cooperation network, only let an IT
specialist do it who can also take over Support.
 Before installation, you should perform a data backup on the prospective client.
 Eppendorf AG expressly accepts no warranty for epBlue software functioning on the client
together with other programs selected by the licensee.
 Eppendorf AG likewise accepts no liability for any damages or consequential damages (such
as loss of profit, interrupted operations, loss of information or data) which may occur. This
does not apply where compulsory liability is prescribed by law, in accordance with product
liability law for example, in cases of intent, gross negligence, where there is loss of life, injury
or impairment to health or if substantial contractual obligations are breached.
 Eppendorf AG does not give any support for any additional clients configured on the industry
PC.
When Extra is selected in the left-hand column of the Admin tab, the Network and SMTP tabs are
available:
Network - setting up a new client
If you have selected Extra in the left-hand column of the Admin tab you can establish a
point-to-point Ethernet connection to a second client. To this end, the client software (epBlue) is
installed on a second computer without server (see "Remote Client and Network Setup Guide").
The client must be connected to the server computer (integrated industrial PC) by an Ethernet
crossover cable. To enable the second client to have access to the server, the second network
connection of the server PC must have an IP address assigned to it:
The network interface card of the second client needs the IP address of the server to get access:
1. Select the Network tab in the Extra tab of the Admin section of the server PC.
2. Select the field on the left, Local Area Connection 2.
118
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
3. Enter an IP address on the right.
The IP address should be 192.168.XXX.YYY. Do not use "20" or "020" for the numbers
"XXX". This must not be the same as the IP address for the Local Area Connection or another
IP address, which is already assigned to a device. The Local Area Connection is the
connection to the device. By default, the server's IP address is 192.168.20.1, the device's IP
address 192.168.20.2.
4. Adopt the IP address by clicking on Apply.
When the second client starts up, select the IP address quoted for the second network
connection at Server in the login window. The second client now has access to the data of the
server on the other computer.
Device list
Here you can see information on all the connected devices. By default the name of the device is
its serial number. You can change the name if necessary.
• Confirm your changes with Apply.
Backup/Restore
Data loss due to lack of data backup or incorrect storage of data carriers.
NOTICE!
epBlue saves all information on user accounts, applications, labware and logfiles in a database
on the epMotion PC. Damage to this database (e.g., due to a hardware fault) causes this
information to be lost.
 Carry out regular database backups via the function Backup in Admin tab.
 Save the backup file on a secure data carrier and store it in accordance with the manufacturer
instructions.
Eppendorf is not liable for data loss and its consequences.
When Backup/Restore is selected in the left-hand column of the Admin tab, there are two tabs for
editing user groups:
• Backup: In the upper part you can make entries for automatic backups.
Hint!
a
Activate the Create full Backup every checkbox to automatically create a full backup. The
interval for the backups can be entered in days to the right.
b
Specify a path under which the backup should be stored.
c
End your input with Apply when your changes should be adopted.
d
Press Reset to delete all the entries again.
The epBlue client must not be connected to the epBlue server when an automatic backup is
performed. epBlue checks whether the epBlue client is closed. If the epBlue client is not closed,
the automatic backup is not performed and an error message is generated.
• In the bottom part you can define the settings for a manual backup.
a
The Backup type is set to full backup. A name for the backup is automatically generated.
You can change this name manually.
b
On the right-hand side, enter a path under which the backup should be saved.
c
Enter further information in the detail window.
d
Press Run to create the backup.
A status display and a progress bar show the progress of the backup.
• Restore: You can define settings for your restore here.
a
The Restore type is set to full restore.
b
Below specify the path under which the backup file is stored.
c
Enter further information in the detail window.
119
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
d
Press Run to restore the backup.
A status display and a progress bar show the progress of the restore.
The ID List Settings and Print headers options are only shown if you are logged in as Admin Lab.
Hint!
ID List Settings
Only for a epMotion with epBlue ID and barcode reader.
Barcode
This area is only visible to Admin Lab.
1. Configure whether 1 or 2 IDs are to be used for reagents to be processed using a reagent
transfer, e.g., to document the reagent type and batch number of expiry date in the method
logfile.
2. Define the default file type (CSV or XML) for import and export.
3. Define a file path for import and export.
4. Confirm changes with Apply.
Print headers
This area is only visible to Admin Lab.
You can make changes to the header area of your printouts here.
1. Activate the Edit print header template checkbox.
2. Make changes in the right-hand text window if necessary.
3. Select a different header or image file 2 lines below the checkbox above the right-hand button
and save it by clicking on the Save Header button.
4. Define a default header area with Set as default header.
5. Delete an imported file with Delete Header.
6. Click on the Show preview button to show the new header area.
5.9.3
Account Overview
The Account Overview tab in the Admin tab provides an overview of all user accounts registered in
your system.
The overview contains the following information.
• Personal Info: the user's full name and contact information.
• Profile Info: the user's home directory, the date of registration of the user account and, if
applicable, its expiry date.
• Groups: the user groups to which the user belongs. The user inherits the user rights defined
for the selected group or groups.
To create or edit user accounts, go to the Edit Account tab.
120
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5.9.4
Edit accounts
The Edit Account tab in the Admin tab provides functions for creating new or editing existing
accounts. The Account List on the left-hand side displays the user accounts in your system.
You can create new user accounts (see p. 121), edit existing accounts (see p. 122), delete
accounts (see p. 123), and change the password for an account (see p. 124).
5.9.4.1 Create new user account
To create a new user account, proceed as follows.
1. Select Account in the left-hand area of the Admin tab to highlight it in dark blue and then
select the Edit Account tab.
2. Click on New Account.
The following form is displayed.
3. In the Account field, enter an account name for the new user.
4. In the Password and Confirm password fields, enter the password for the new user account. If
the entries in the two fields do not match exactly, a message will be displayed. In this case,
delete the contents of both fields and enter the password again.
5. In the Member of section, activate the user group to which you want the new user to belong.
The user will have the user rights defined for the selected group.
6. If you want to enable the account for a certain period of time, activate the Account valid until
option and enter the expiry date there.
You also have the option to lock the account until a certain day. To do this, activate the
Disabled until option and enter the expiry date there. A disabled account can be enabled again
by the administrator at a later time (see Editing a user account on p. 122).
121
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Each user name can only be used once, even if it has already been deleted once.
Hint!
7. If you wish, you can enter further information about the new user, e.g., the user's name and
contact information. This information is optional. If you enter the name of the user he or she
will be addressed by this name in the Home tab after login. Otherwise the account name will
appear.
8. Click on Submit.
The new user account is created. The user name appears in the Account List in the
Edit Account tab.
9. If required, create further user accounts in the same way.
10. When you have finished, log out as administrator to prevent unauthorized access to the
system.
5.9.4.2 Editing a user account
To edit an existing user account, proceed as follows.
1. Select the Edit Account tab in the Admin tab.
2. In the Account List on the left-hand side, select the user you want to edit.
3. Click on Edit Account.
The user account settings are displayed.
4. In the Member of section, activate the user group to which you want the user to belong. The
user will have the user rights defined for the selected group.
122
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5. If you want to enable the account for a certain period of time, activate the Account valid until
option and enter the expiry date there.
You also have the option to lock the account until a certain day. To do this, activate the
Disabled until option and enter the expiry date there. A disabled account can be enabled again
by the administrator at a later time (see Editing a user account on p. 122).
Each user name can only be used once, even if it has already been deleted once.
Hint!
6. If you wish, you can enter further information about the new user, e.g., the user's name and
contact information. This information is optional. If you enter the name of the user he or she
will be addressed by this name in the Home tab after login. Otherwise the account name will
appear.
7. Click on Submit.
The changed settings for this user account are now active.
8. If required, edit other user accounts in the same way.
9. When you have finished, log out as administrator to prevent unauthorized access to the
system.
5.9.4.3 Deleting a user account
To delete a user account, proceed as follows.
1. Select the Edit Account tab in the Admin tab.
2. In the Account List on the left-hand side, select the user you want to delete.
3. Click on Remove Account.
The user account settings are displayed.
123
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
4. Click on Remove.
A message appears.
5. To keep the account, click on No.
6. To delete the account, click on Yes.
The account is deleted.
7. When you have finished, log out as administrator to prevent unauthorized access to the
system.
5.9.4.4 Change password
Hint!
Every user can change his or her own password at any time by selecting Tools - Account Change Password from the main menu.
If a user has lost his or her password, the administrator can change the user's password, e.g.,
reset it to a standard password. In this case, the user should then change the standard password
to a personal password as soon as possible to prevent unauthorized access to the system.
To change the password for a user account, proceed as follows.
1. Select the Edit Account tab in the Admin tab.
2. In the Account List on the left-hand side, select the user whose password you want to
change.
3. Click on Change Password.
The following form is displayed.
4. In the Password field, enter the current password.
5. In the New Password and Confirm password fields, enter the new password. If the entries
in the two fields do not match exactly, a message will be displayed. In this case, delete the
contents of both fields and enter the new password again.
6. Click on Submit.
The new password for this user account is now active.
7. When you have finished, log out as administrator to prevent unauthorized access to the
system.
5.9.5
Set up a new password
If a user has lost the password, the administrator can change the user's password.
To set a new password for a user account, proceed as follows
1. In the Admin tab select the Account item and go to the Edit tab.
124
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
2. In the Account List select the user whose password has been forgotten on the left-hand side.
3. Click on Set a new password.
The following form is displayed.
4. Enter the new password in the New Password and Confirm Password fields.
If the entries in the fields do not match exactly, a message is displayed. In this case, delete
the contents of both fields and enter the new password again.
5. Click on Submit.
The new password for the selected user account is active.
6. Log out as administrator to prevent unauthorized access to the system.
5.9.6
Group overview
The Group Overview tab in the Admin tab displays a list of all user groups and the access rights
defined for each group.
The overview contains the following information.
125
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
• Group: each group is displayed in a separate table column.
• Fixed: this checkbox is set for all groups because the user groups cannot be modified.
• System, Application, Labware etc.: the available user rights are listed. The rights that are
active for a user group are marked with an X in the respective table cell.
The following user groups are available. For exact details of user groups and access rights in
your system, please check the group overview for your system.
• Administrator: members of the Administrator group can manage user accounts and user
groups and have access to some service functions. They are authorized to configure the
system, set up hardware and software, backup and restore data and also to import, export
and print data.
• Admin Lab: members of the Admin Lab group have access to application-related service
functions. They are authorized to create, edit and run applications, edit and manage labware
and also to import, export and print data.
• User Level 2: members of the User Level 2 group can create, edit and run applications, edit
and manage labware and also import, export and print data.
• User Level 1: members of the User Level 1 group can create, edit and run applications and
also print data.
• Guest: members of the Guest group can run applications.
126
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
6
6
6.1
Quick start
Quick start
Short instructions
Hint!
6.1.1
Only trained staff already familiar with the operating manual and the epMotion may work to the
short instructions. Observe the safety precautions.
Select and start the epMotion method
1. Double-click on the Eppendorf epBlue icon on the desktop, or select Start - Programs Eppendorf - epBlue in the Windows Start menu.
epBlue starts, and the login screen appears.
2. Enter your account name and your password.
3. Click on Login.
epBlue starts and the program window displays the Home tab.
4. Click on Open / run applications in the Tasks area of the Home tab or click on the icon Open
and select Open Application or select File - Open / run applications in the main menu.
The file window opens.
5. Open the user directory and the folder containing the epMotion method you want to start.
Select the method and click on Open Application.
If the method is suitable for more than one device in your system, a list of devices is
displayed.
6. Select the device you want to use and click on OK.
The method opens and the program window changes to the Work tab.
7. In the Work tab select the Worktable tab and check the equipment of the worktable. Check
whether the labware shown in the display is available at the corresponding locations in the
worktable and whether all locations identified as empty in the display are actually empty.
8. Check whether the tip racks are sufficiently filled with tips, whether all tubes are open and
whether the waste basket is empty.
9. Close the front hood.
10. Change to the Run tab and activate the option Filter Device List to display only devices that are
online and suitable for the method.
11. Select the device you want to use and click on Run.
The method is loaded on the selected device.
If the number of samples for each step in the procedure has been defined as variable, a
window opens.
12. Enter the number of samples and click on OK. If required, enter the number of samples for
further commands in the same way.
13. To edit labware-specific configurations for the level sensor and the volumes, double click on
the labware in the Worktable area of the Run tab or right click on the labware and select
Properties in the context menu.
14. To define the level sensor configurations for this method run, activate or deactivate the
corresponding options.
The level sensor can execute the following scans.
• Levels: check the liquid levels according to the settings defined for the individual labware
items.
• Tips: check the type and quantity of tips in the tip rack.
• Locations: check that the labware is positioned correctly on the worktable, as specified in
the method.
127
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
15. Click on Run.
16. If necessary enter the liquid levels for the labware objects for which the Liquid Detection has
been deactivated and click on Run.
The method starts and the display changes to the Control tab. The progress and current
status of the method is displayed. A message appears when the method run is complete.
17. To cancel the method before it is complete click on the icon Stop in the Control tab. The
method stops. Then click on the Abort icon to abort the method.
6.2
Example method for epMotion
6.2.1
Method objective
A suitable volume of a PCR Mastermix is to be dispensed into a PCR 96-well plate from a
thermorack supplied with 1.5 mL Eppendorf micro test tubes. The DNA samples from an MTP
96-well plate are then pipetted into the relevant wells of the PCR 96 plate and the PCR mixture
carefully mixed. In this example, the volume of the mixture is 20 μL.
6.2.2
Sample preparation
1. Prepare the Mastermix in a 1.5 mL Eppendorf micro test tube and position in the thermorack.
In doing so, observe the calculations for aspiration volumes.
2. Transfer eight DNA samples with a volume of at least 50 μL to the MTP 96 plate in any
sequence.
You can also perform a test run using distilled water.
Hint!
6.2.3
Create an example method
Hint!
The following sections describe the steps for creating the example method specified above. To
follow these instructions, you must be familiar with the operating manual and the epMotion.
Follow the safety notes at all times. If you are unsure please refer to the extensive description in
the Work tab (see The Work tab on p. 61).
6.2.3.1 Logging in and creating a new method
1. Log in to your user account.
2. Click on Create / edit applications in the Tasks section of the Home tab or click on the New icon
and select New Application or select File - Create / edit applications in the main menu.
The file window opens.
128
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
3. Select your user name in the User list on the left-hand side to gain access to your user
directory.
4. In the Folder list select the folder in which you want to create the new method.
5. Click on New Application or right click in the Applications list and select New Application in the
context menu or click on the Create new application icon above the Applications list.
6. Enter a name for the new method. If required, enter a short description of the method in the
Comment field.
7. In the Device type list select the item Workstation.
8. Click on Create.
The new method has been created and is displayed in the Applications list.
The method opens and the program window changes to the Work tab.
129
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
6.2.3.2 Supplying the worktable
1. In the Work tab select the Worktable tab to equip the worktable with the labware required for
your method.
2. In the Labware Type and Sub-Type lists select the Equipped Racks + Modules item. In the
Labware list select the thermorack Rack_1_5ml.
3. Right-click and drag the Rack upwards with the mouse, then drop it in location C2 (TEMP2).
A dialog window opens, displaying information about the rack which has been positioned.
130
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
4. Check that for Liquiddetection by the optical sensor All Positions has been selected and click
on OK.
5. In the Labware list under Tips, select 50 μL tips (tip50) and position them in location A2.
6. Click on OK to close the dialog window.
7. Under Plates and then under mtp96, select the MTP 96 plate (EP_pDNA_MTP_96).
131
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
8. Position the plate in location B3.
9. In the dialog window, check whether liquid detection is set to Off, and click on OK. Liquid
detection is very time-consuming for plates with 96 wells.
10. Under Plates and PCR 96, select PCR plate EP_TT_PCR_150.
132
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
11. Position the plate in location B2.
12. In the dialog window, check whether liquid detection is set to Off, and click on OK.
The worktable is now equipped with the necessary labware for this method.
13. To save the method with this worktable assignment, click on the Save icon, or select File Save from the main menu, or right-click on the method name and select Save from the context
menu.
For more detailed information on supplying the worktable, please refer to the detailed description
(see Worktable tab - equip the worktable on p. 66).
6.2.3.3 Defining the procedure
1. In the Work tab select the Procedure tab to define the sequence of commands to be executed
during the method.
2. In the Commands area in the Procedure tab double-click on the Number of Samples icon to
add the Number of Samples command to the procedure.
3. In the Parameter section deactivate the Fix Number of Samples checkbox and enter 8 as the
maximum sample number.
133
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
4. In the Commands in the Procedure tab double click on the Reagent Transfer icon to add it to
the program or click on the icon, move the command upwards and drop it into the next
program location.
5. In the Parameter section enter the following settings for the Reagent Transfer command:
• Pipet. Tool: Select TS_50.
• Volume: enter 15 μL.
• Select Multidispense.
6. In the Source list select Thermorack (Tube_1) as source tube. In the Destination list select the
PCR plate (pcr96_1) as destination tube.
7. To define the pattern for the Reagent Transfer, click on the Pattern button.
The Pattern window opens. The source tube labware is displayed on the left-hand side
highlighted in blue. The destination tube labware is displayed on the left-hand side highlighted
in red.
8. In the source tube labware click on the location with the prepared mastermix. In the
destination tube labware click consecutively on the wells of the first column.
134
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
9. Click on OK to confirm the pattern and close the pattern window.
10. For the command Reagent Transfer click on the Options tab in the Parameter section. Under
Change Tips, select the when command is finished option.
11. In the Commands in the Procedure tab double click on the Sample Transfer icon to add it to
the program or click on the icon, move the command upwards and drop it into the next
program location.
12. In the Parameter section enter the following settings for the Sample Transfer command:
• Pipet. Tool: Select TS_50.
• Volume: enter 5 μL.
• Select Pipette.
13. In the Source list select the MTP 96 well plate (mtp96_1) as source tube and activate the
Irregular Pattern option. By selecting this option, you can define an irregular pattern for the
samples provided. In the Destination list select the PCR plate (pcr96_1) as destination tube.
135
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
14. To define the pattern for the Sample Transfer, click on the Pattern button.
15. In the source tube labware click on the location containing the first sample. In the destination
tube labware click on the first well (A1).
16. Change between Source and Destination to select the remaining (empty) source tube
locations and the (default) destination tube locations. Because the Irregular Pattern option is
only active for the source tube, individual wells of the destination tube can only be selected in
the default pattern.
17. Click on OK to confirm the pattern and close the pattern window.
18. On the Options tab click in the Parameter section. Under Change Tips, select the before
aspiration for next destination option.
19. On the Mix tab click in the Parameter section. Activate the Mix after dispensing option and
enter 10 μL as the mixing volume and 5 as the number of mixing cycles. Leave all other
settings unchanged.
20. To save the method with this procedure, click on the Save icon, or select File - Save from the
main menu, or right-click on the method name and select Save from the context menu.
For more detailed information on defining a procedure, please refer to the detailed description
(see Procedure tab - defining a procedure on p. 72).
6.2.3.4 Checking and saving the method
1. To check the parameter settings of the current method, click on the Check Application icon in
the toolbar.
A message window opens to inform you if a parameter error was found. Correct the error and
repeat the check until all errors have been corrected.
2. To save the method, click on the Save icon, or select File - Save from the main menu, or
right-click on the method name and select Save from the context menu.
136
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
6.2.4
Starting the method
1. Change to the Run tab and activate the Filter Devicelist option to display only devices that are
online and suitable for the method.
2. Select the device you want to use and click on Run.
The method is loaded on the selected device.
Because the command Number of Samples in the procedure defines a variable number of
samples, you must enter the number of samples for this run manually.
3. Enter the number of samples and click on OK.
4. Check the supply of the worktable. To edit labware-specific settings for level sensor and
volumes, double-click on the labware in the Worktable section of the Run tab.
5. Specify level sensor settings for this method run.
• Levels: check the liquid levels according to the settings defined for the individual labware
items.
• Tips: check the type and quantity of tips in the tip rack.
• Locations: check that the labware is positioned correctly on the worktable, as specified in
the method.
6. Click on Run.
A volume query appears for the MTP 96 plate, as Off was previously set for liquid detection.
137
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
7. Enter 50 μL as the volume, and click on Run.
The method starts and the display changes to the Control tab. The progress and current
status of the method is displayed. A message appears when the method run is complete.
8. To cancel the method before it is complete click on the Stop icon in the Control tab. The
method stops. Then click on the Abort icon to abort the method.
138
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
7
7
7.1
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Error search
If a method does not start running after Start, check the following points. Note that the Labware
on the worktable must match the method.
• Is plate or rack correctly inserted and not the wrong way round?
• Is a height adapter with the correct height being used?
• Are all the plates, racks, tips, tubs etc.shown in the display present on the worktable of the
instrument?
• Are the necessary dispensing tools correctly suspended in the holders in locations T1 to T4?
• For methods with Transport commands: Has the gripper in location T0 been correctly
positioned by hand?
• For epMotion VAC and methods using the vacuum unit: are all components of the vacuum
unit correctly positioned?
• For epMotion MC: is the mat for the CycleLock level in the frame? Is the texturing of the mat
facing upwards and is the mat not in contact with the base of the location?
•
•
•
•
Are all tubes and tubs open?
Are the tip racks filled with enough tips and have the lids been taken off the tip racks?
Is the lid of Safe-Lock tubes correctly positioned?
Are all the locations on the worktable of the instrument indicated as empty in the display really
empty?
• Is the correct dispensing tool inserted and is it undamaged?
• Are the necessary filling quantities for the source present?
• Are racks or plates subsequently required for the parking positions ready and has their
volume been entered?
For an epMotion with barcode reader:
Barcode
• Is the barcode reader correctly connected?
• Was the correct barcode ID scanned?
• If barcode ID tracking ensured by the commands of the method?
139
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
7.2
General errors
7.2.1
Read error of the optical sensor
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
Read error of the optical
sensor in detecting
labware
Plates such as MTP, DWP, PCR etc. are not
level on the worktable surface or have been
inserted inverted.
 Check that the labware has been correctly
Read error of the optical
sensor in detecting
labware
The plastic plate is not detected.
 Wipe a moist cloth several times over the
The cause might be a minor unevenness in
the the plastic surface. Such unevenness is
usually not visible.
inserted into the location.
detection range of the optical sensor on
the labware.
 Repeat the Location detection with a still
lightly moist surface.
Read error of the optical
sensor in detecting the
pipette tips
Problem when detecting pipette tips.
 Turn the tip rack by 180°.
Read error of the optical
sensor in detecting the
fluid level
Fluid surface not level (strong meniscus
formation).
Carefully tap the rack or plate on the table
until the surface is level.
Read error of the optical
sensor in detecting the
fluid level
Blisters or foam at the surface.
Remove the blisters/foam.
The detection of the location in plates takes place at the right margin.
Hint!
7.2.2
In case of a "Location" read error of the optical sensor a dialog with the appropriate correction
option is shown.
Dispensing error
In case of doubts about the correctness of the dispensing note the information in the appendix
and all information on the selected liquid type.
7.3
Error messages
Hint!
Hint!
All software error messages are issued in English. This also applies if "German" is selected in the
language setting for the software.
Should you require service, contact your official dealer for Eppendorf products or our sales office.
You can find the addresses of our dealers on our website www.eppendorf.com. The addresses of
our sales offices are listed on the penultimate page of these Instructions for Use.
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
Message without code
Make sure there is
nothing in the gripper: If
any labware is held by
the gripper arms remove
this item manually; then
press OK.
Method run was aborted; gripper
is still fixed in the tool holder;
before tool holder moves further
(e.g., to its home position) the
message appears.
If the gripper is still holding any
items:
1. Remove the item manually by
opening the two gripper arms
manually and removing the
labware manually.
2. Press the OK button.
The gripper expects that the
labware has been removed and
now moves to the home position.
140
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
Message without code
Because all tool holder
positions are occupied
the tool has to be
removed manually:
Method run was aborted;
 To remove the dispensing tool,
follow the instructions.
dispensing tool is still fixed in the
tool holder.
Press OK, open the
hood and be prepared to
grasp the tool manually
as the tool holder will
open and drop the tool.
0x0600
Tool did not find home
• Home position for the tool is
not found.
•
•
•
•
•
0x0601
Hardware error
Dosing device: final
position always found
0x0607
Hardware error
No tool inserted.
Tool damaged.




PCB damaged.
Insert tool.
Check tool.
Reboot and try again.
If error occurs again: Call local
Eppendorf Service.
Switch damaged.
Tool file does not correspond
with tool.
Dosing motor: home switch
always on.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
Dosing motor: steps lost.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
Dosing motor: steps lost.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
Tool home position is not found.





Dosing device: steps
lost
0x060D
Hardware error
Dosing device: steps
lost
0x060E
0x060F
Tool did not find home
Hardware error
Dosing device: final
position not found
Dosing motor: home switch not
reached again.
No tool deployed.
Tool defective.
PCB defective.
Switch defective.
Tool file and tool do not
correspond.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x0709
The named file is invalid The file contains incorrect control  New file is essential. Call local
for updating the device. information. File may be damaged
Eppendorf Service.
while copying.
0x070A
The cyclic redundancy The file contains incorrect control  New file is essential. Call local
check for the named file information. File may be damaged
Eppendorf Service.
failed.
while copying.
0x070B
Error Flash Loader
The file contains incorrect control  New file is essential. Call local
information. File may be damaged
Eppendorf Service.
while copying.
0x0863
Thermomixer missing
Hardware error
Shut down and switch off the
The thermomixer is not configured instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
or is damaged.
Service
141
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
0x0864
Thermomixer is not
configured
Hardware error
0x0980
Thermomixer does not
react
Hardware error
Shut down and switch off the
The thermomixer is not configured instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
or is damaged.
Service
The thermomixer does not
respond to the system.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
The control time on a temperature  Call local Eppendorf Service.
was exceeded.
0x0954; 0x0964;
0x0974
0x0B04
Remedy
Not enough space on
medium
Not enough space on medium to  Make sure that there is
allocate buffer for file or directory.
enough space on medium.
 Make sure that there is
enough space on medium.
Either delete some files or
replace the medium.
0x0B05
Error reading file path
• Internal file path conversion
error.
0x0B08
Invalid path or filename Filename or path is invalid.
 Make sure that the file name
and path is valid.
 Make sure that the file name
and path is valid.
0x0B09
Too many files/
directories open
The number of allowed open files  Close other open files.
and directories has reached its
maximum.
0x0B0A
File or directory does
not exist
File or directory does not exist.
 Make sure that the file name
0x0B0B
No name or directory
found
File path is empty.
 Reboot and try again.
0x0B0C
Could not open file
Filename pointer/ID invalid
0x0B0D
Error opening file or
directory.
File may be in use.
 Reboot and try again.
 Make sure that the file is not in
0x0B0E
Error closing file or
directory.
File may be in use.
 Make sure that the file is not in
0x0B0F
Error opening/closing
file or directory.
File may be in use.
 Make sure that the file is not in
0x0B10
Error opening file or
directory.
0x0B11
Error closing file or
directory.
0x0B14
File is in use and cannot
be accessed
and path is valid.
use and try to open it again.
use and try to close it again.
use and try to open/close it
again.
• File may be in use, or
• file is damaged.
File may be in use.
 Make sure that the file is not in
use and try to open it again. If
error occurs again:
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
 Make sure that the file is not in
use and try to close it again.
• Logfile is opened for viewing
while the instrument tries to
write into the file.
 Close file; or:
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
• System errors.
0x0B15
142
Error opening file or
directory.
File may be in use.
 Make sure that the file is not in
0x0B16
Error closing file or
directory.
File may be in use.
 Make sure that the file is not in
0x0B17
Error opening file or
directory.
File may be in use.
 Make sure that the file is not in
use and try to open it again.
use and try to close it again.
use and try to open it again.
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x0B18
Error opening file or
directory.
File may be in use.
 Make sure that the file is not in
0x0B40
Error opening file or
directory.
File may be in use. Error opening  Make sure that the file is not in
file. Does it exist?
use or does the file exist and
try to open it again.
0x0B41
Error closing file or
directory.
File may be in use.
 Make sure that the file is not in
0x0B42
Error reading file
File may be corrupted.
0x0B43
Error writing file
File may be corrupted.
0x0B44
Illegal file length. Trying File may be corrupted.
to read or write beyond
file.
 Use Checkdisk
 Use Checkdisk.
 Use Checkdisk.
0x0B45
Error deleting file
File may be corrupted.
0x0B46
Error renaming a file
File may be corrupted.
0x0B48
Error creating file. File
exists
File name has been edited that
already exists.
0x0B80
Error creating directory. See error message.
Directory exists!
 Use another name for the new
Error creating directory. See error message.
Directory exists!
 Use another name for the new
0x0B82
Error getting file entries Some files may be deleted, or
directory is corrupt.
 Use Checkdisk.
0x0B84
Error getting directory
entries
Some files may be deleted, or
directory is corrupt.
 Use Checkdisk.
0x0B85
Error listing files.
Some files may be deleted, or
Number of files in
directory is corrupt.
directory is not the same
anymore.
 Use Checkdisk.
0x0B88
Error deleting directory. Some files may be deleted, or
directory is corrupt.
 Use Checkdisk.
0x0BC0
Format aborted by user See error message.
 Error message was an
0x0B81
use and try to open it again.
use and try to close it again.
 Use Checkdisk.
 Use Checkdisk.
 Use another name for the new
file.
file.
file.
information for the user that he
had aborted.
0x0C01
Volume too large for this Volume to be dispensed is too
tool
large for the selected tool.
Possible causes:
 Call local Eppendorf
Application Support.
• Errors in tool files.
• Errors in liquid type files.
0x0C02
Volume too small for this Volume to be dispensed is too
tool
small for the selected tool.
 Call local Eppendorf
Application.
Possible causes:
• Errors in tool files.
• Errors in liquid type files.
0x0C08
Tool dimension
unknown
Tool dimension values unknown.
Labware outdated or corrupt.
 Make sure all labware is of the
0x1206 to 0x1210
No message text
Internal error.
0x120A
Program aborted by
user
User pressed the Abort button
during program run.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
 Error message was an
latest version.
information for the user that he
had aborted.
143
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
144
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x1221
The hood was opened
while the program was
stopped
See error message.
 Close hood.
0x1222
Transfer allowance was See error message.
prematurely deactivated
during program
initialization
 Start program again.
0x1223
Internal critical error
Hardware error. Restart of
program impossible.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x1243
Lid temperature in
program is too high
Illegal value has been detected in  Check lid temperature in
program.
program editor and start
program again.
0x1244
Lid temperature in
program is too low
Illegal value has been detected in  Check lid temperature in
program.
program editor and start
program again.
0x1245
Block temperature in
program is too high
Illegal value has been detected in  Check temperature in program
program.
editor and start program
again.
0x1246
Block temperature in
program is too low
Illegal value has been detected in  Check temperature in program
program.
and start program again.
0x1247
Block temperature
Illegal value has been detected in  Check temperature in program
increment in program is program.
and start program again.
too high
0x1248
Block temperature
Illegal value has been detected in  Check temperature in program
and start program again.
increment in program is program.
too low
0x1249
Step time in program is
too high.
Illegal value has been detected in  Check step time in program
program.
and start program again.
0x124A
Step time in program is
too low.
Illegal value has been detected in  Check step time in program
program.
and start program again.
0x124B
Time increment in
program is too high.
Illegal value has been detected in  Check time increment in
program and start program
program.
again.
0x124C
Time increment in
program is too low.
Illegal value has been detected in  Check time increment in
program.
program and start program
again.
0x124D
Too many cycles in
Cycle command
Illegal value has been detected in  Check value in program and
program.
start program again.
0x124E
Not enough cycles in
Cycle command
Illegal value has been detected in  Check value in program and
program.
start program again.
0x124F
Too many steps within a Illegal value has been detected in  Check value in program and
Cycle
program.
start program again.
0x1250
Not enough steps within Illegal value has been detected in  Check value in program and
a cycle
program.
start program again.
0x1251
Tempering ramp is too
high
Illegal value has been detected in  Check value in program and
program.
start program again.
0x1252
Tempering ramp is too
low
Illegal value has been detected in  Check value in program and
program.
start program again.
0x1253
Gradient is too high. (out Illegal value has been detected in  Check value in program and
of limits)
program.
start program again.
0x1259
Error while choosing
Neither rack or tube were
rack or tube at program selected.
start
 Restart program and be sure
to select either rack or tube.
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x1281
Vacuum not reached
The vacuum chamber or rack is
leaky or no rack is inserted.
 Insert another rack.
 In other cases call local
0x1282
Vacuum not ended
The vacuum was not generated
within the defined time.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x1283
Vacuum not ready
No vacuum chamber available or  Integrate or connect vacuum
vacuum chamber not ready.
chamber, or:
0x1284
Temperature unit 1 not
ready
Temperature unit 1 is not ready to  Call local Eppendorf Service.
start or not available.
0x1285
Temperature unit 2 not
ready
Temperature unit 2 is not ready to  Call local Eppendorf Service.
start or not available.
0x1286
Temperature unit 3 not
ready
Temperature unit 3 is not ready to  Call local Eppendorf Service.
start or not available.
0x1289
Carrier: final position in
x not found
• Problems in carrier movement  Call local Eppendorf Service.
Eppendorf Service.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
in x-axis (sluggish movement
or no movement at all).
• Light barrier for carrier in
x-axis defective.
0x128A
Carrier: final position in
x always found
• Problems in carrier movement  Call local Eppendorf Service.
in x-axis (sluggish movement
or no movement at all).
• Light barrier for carrier in
x-axis defective.
0x128B
Carrier: steps lost in x
• Carrier was touched by the
user.
• Sluggishness in carrier
movement in x-axis.
0x128C
Carrier: final position in
y not found
 Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error reoccurs
after switching on and
restarting a method run:
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
• Problems in carrier movement  Call Eppendorf Service.
in y-axis (sluggish movement
or no movement at all).
• Light barrier for carrier in
y-axis defective.
0x128D
Carrier: final position in
y always found
• Problems in carrier movement  Call local Eppendorf Service.
in y-axis (sluggish movement
or no movement at all).
• Light barrier for carrier in
y-axis defective.
0x128E
Carrier: steps lost in y
• Carrier was touched by the
user
• Sluggishness in carrier
movement in y-axis
0x128F
Carrier: final position 1
in z not found
 Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error reoccurs
after switching on and
restarting a method run:
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
• Problems in carrier movement  Call local Eppendorf Service.
in z-axis (sluggish movement
or no movement at all).
• Light barrier for carrier in
x-axis defective.
145
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
0x1290
Carrier: final position 1
in z always found
Cause
Remedy
• Problems in carrier movement  Call local Eppendorf Service.
in z-axis (sluggish movement
or no movement at all).
• Light barrier for carrier in
z-axis defective.
0x1291
Carrier: final position 2
in z not found
• Problems in carrier movement  Call local Eppendorf Service.
in z-axis (sluggish movement
or no movement at all).
• Light barrier for carrier in
x-axis defective.
0x1292
Carrier: final position 2
in z always found
• Problems in carrier movement  Call local Eppendorf Service.
in z-axis (sluggish movement
or no movement at all).
• Light barrier for carrier in
z-axis defective.
0x1293
Carrier: final position in
z wrong
• Problems in carrier movement  Call local Eppendorf Service.
in z-axis (sluggish movement
or no movement at all).
• Light barrier for carrier in
z-axis defective.
0x1294
Carrier: steps lost in z
• Carrier was touched by the
user.
• Sluggishness in carrier
movement in z-axis.
0x1295
Carrier:
steps lost in z before
picking up tip
 Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error reoccurs
after switching on and
restarting a method run:
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
• Tip was still on pipette tool
 Remove tips from tools.
when tool started to pick up a  Place tip rack correctly and
new tip.
• Tip rack not placed correctly
on the worktable.
• Mechanical problems of
plane on the worktable.
In other cases:
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
carrier.
Maximum number of
tool cycles exceeded
See error message.
0x1297
Danger of collision
When running the programmed
 Program the labware on the
application, the tool carrier system
worktable in a way that high
will touch racks or other labware
and low labware are not
on the worktable; e.g., during
adjacent.
pipetting the optical sensor may
 Program the labware in a way
touch a long tube on the adjacent
that the 30 μL or 300 μL tip
position; possible reasons:
does not have to move deeply
• A low plate (microplate) is
into a long vessel.
located next to a high tube
 If possible: use higher
rack.
volumes in the long vessels.
• The 50 μL or 300 μL tip is
programmed to move almost
to the bottom of a very long
tube with another long tube in
the adjacent position.
146
 Use a new tool.
0x1296
 If possible: use longer tips for
the long vessels.
0x1298
Tool not calibrated
The actual tool is not calibrated.
Calibrate the actual tool.
0x1299
Invalid number of
samples
Value for Number of Samples not  Insert an admissible value for
Number of Samples.
permissible.
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x129A
Tip too small
Reagent Transfer: Used tip is too
small.
 Use a larger tip.
0x129B
Source vessel too small Reagent Transfer: Used source
vessel is too small.
0x12A0
Vacuum unit not ready
Vacuum unit cannot be addressed  Call local Eppendorf Service.
by the software.
0x12A1
Vacuum not released
Ventilation of the vacuum unit
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
after switching off the pump is too
slow.
0x12A2
Check levels in vacuum Wells of the filter plate plug while
command:
applying vacuum.
 Use a larger vessel.
 Follow the instructions on the
control panel display.
Wells in filter plate not
empty
0x12A4
Labware in vacuum
manifold is not
composed of three parts
(filter plate, frame,
collection labware)
When applying vacuum three
 See explanation in "Cause".
items must be in the vacuum unit
(filter plate above vac frame above
collection plate or tub).
0x12A5
Well pattern of upper
Vacuum unit: Well geometry of
and lower rack do not fit filter plate and collection plate
must correspond to each other
(e.g., 96 well filter plate and 96
well collection plate). Exception:
Collection plate may be replaced
by a tub.
 See explanation in "Cause".
0x12B1
Temperature unit in
location C1 not ready
Temperature unit 1 cannot be
addressed by the software.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x12B2
Temperature unit in
location C2 not ready
Temperature unit 2 cannot be
addressed by the software.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x12B3
Temperature unit in
location C3 not ready
Temperature unit 3 cannot be
addressed by the software.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x12B4
Temperature unit in
location C1 not active
In wait command the wait for
 Insert temperature command
temperature parameter was edited
before wait command or delete
for location C1 although no
the wait for temperature
temperature command for C1 had
parameter for this location.
been edited before.
0x12B5
Temperature unit in
location C2 not active
 Insert temperature command
In wait command the wait for
before wait command or delete
temperature parameter was edited
the wait for temperature
for location C2 although no
parameter for this location.
temperature command for C2 had
been edited before.
0x12B6
Temperature unit in
location C3 not active
 Insert temperature command
In wait command the wait for
before wait command or delete
temperature parameter was edited
the wait for temperature
for location C3 although no
parameter for this location.
temperature command for C3 had
been edited before.
0x12B7
Temperature unit in
location C1 too hot for
labware (temperature
command in this
method)
 Select a labware item that is
The temperature of location C1
more resistant to high
(according to a temperature
temperatures (e.g. made from
command in this application) is
polypropylene or
too high for the labware placed on
polycarbonate).
this location.
147
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
0x12B8
Temperature unit in
location C2 too hot for
labware (temperature
command in this
method)
The temperature of location C2
 Select a labware item that is
(according to a temperature
more resistant to high
command in this application) is
temperatures (e.g. made from
too high for the labware placed on
polypropylene or
this location.
polycarbonate).
0x12B9
Temperature unit in
location C3 too hot for
labware (temperature
command in this
method)
 Select a labware item that is
The temperature of location C3
more resistant to high
(according to a temperature
temperatures (e.g. made from
command in this application) is
polypropylene or
too high for the labware placed on
polycarbonate).
this location.
0x12BA
Temperature unit in
location C1 too hot for
labware (temperature
command in previous
method)
 Select a labware item that is
The temperature of location C1
more resistant to high
(according to a temperature
temperatures (e.g. made from
command in a previous
polypropylene or
application with parameter keep
polycarbonate).
temperature after method run set
active) is too high for the labware  Change previous application
placed on this location.
not to keep temperature after
application run.
0x12BB
Temperature unit in
location C2 too hot for
labware (temperature
command in previous
method)
The temperature of location C2
 Select a labware item that is
(according to a temperature
more resistant to high
command in a previous
temperatures (e.g. made from
application with parameter keep
polypropylene or
temperature after method run set
polycarbonate).
active) is too high for the labware  Change previous application
placed on this location.
not to keep temperature after
application run.
0x12BC
Temperature unit in
location C3 too hot for
labware (temperature
command in previous
method)
The temperature of location C3
 Select a labware item that is
(according to a temperature
more resistant to high
command in a previous
temperatures (e.g. made from
application with parameter keep
polypropylene or
temperature after method run set
polycarbonate).
active) is too high for the labware  Change previous application
placed on this location.
not to keep temperature after
application run.
0x12D0
Parameter conflict:
Sample transfer with elution from
Elution volume too large filter option:
for this tool
Volume to be aspirated is too
large for the tip used.
Remedy
 Select a tip large enough for
picking up the liquid as well as
the additional volume of air to
be aspirated when using this
option.
Option elution from filter: volume is  Select a tool large enough
when using this option.
Elution volume too large too large for the vessel used.
for destination tube or
well
0x12D1
Parameter conflict:
0x12E0
Error in system
configuration
Error in system configuration.
Correct system configuration.
0x12E1
Parameter conflict:
See error message.
 Change application.
See error message.
 Change application.
Prewetting not possible
when aspirate from
bottom is selected
0x12E2
Parameter conflict:
Prewetting not possible
when dispense from top
is selected
148
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x12E3
Parameter conflict:
A liquid type using a prewetting
Prewetting not possible step (e.g., ethanol 98%) cannot
when elution from filter be used in combination with the
elution from filter parameter in a
is selected
sample transfer command.
 Change application.
0x12E4
Transport of labware:
danger of collision
Danger of collision when
transporting a stack of several
racks. The upper rack would
collide with the carrier.
 Do not pile more than 5 racks
0x12E6
Level too high
The liquid level would be higher
than the vessel after dispensing.
 Adjust the liquid to be
0x12E7
Opening the hood is not See error message.
allowed when putting
down tool.
in a location.
dispensed to the vessel.
 See error message.
Switch off power, then
switch on again to
restart method.
0x12F1
No communication with Hardware error
thermomixer
The thermomixer may be
damaged.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x12F3
Thermomixer is too hot The temperature unit of the
for labware (temperature thermomixer is to hot for the
command in this
selected labware
method)
Choose a lower temperature
0x12F4
The thermomixer is too The temperature unit of the
hot for labware
thermomixer is to hot for the
(temperature command selected labware
in previous method)
Choose a lower temperature
0x12F7
Waiting for thermomixer The procedure is waiting for the
thermomixer.
Wait until thermomixer function
has ended
0x12F8
The selected mixing
speed is not possible
with this labware
The mixing speed is not allowed
for the selected labware
Select another labware or mixing
speed
0x1500
Too big vessel index in
location: ...
A tube is to be accessed for which  Error during creation of the
application.
the index is greater than the
number of tubes on the plate/rack/
holder.
0x1503
Tool not placed ...
Optical sensor:
A tool that is needed for the
application run was not found on
the worktable.
0x1504
<rack name> is not
accessible for tools in
location ...
Rack is a lower part of a labware
stack; therefore, the tool has no
access.
 Put the tool on the tool holder
of the worktable.
 Change application so that the
rack is accessible.
149
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x1509
Liquid volume too large Total volume supplied in a source  Provide less volume in the
for vessel in location:... vessel is larger than needed or
vessel.
larger than vessel.
 Change application.
 When verifying the total
volume needed for the source
or destination, take into
account additional aspirated
volume in case of
multidispense
mode(see Important volume
terms for tubes and wells on
p. 25).
0x150A
Liquid volume too low
Total volume supplied by the user  Calculate the total volume for
the source or destination
for vessel in location: ... in a source vessel is smaller than
vessel and select a suitable
needed for a sample transfer,
vessel. Regarding additional
reagent transfer or mix command
aspirated volume in case of
(total volume = volume to be
multidispense mode, refer to
aspirated + remaining volume for
manual (see Important volume
this vessel + (in case of
terms for tubes and wells on
multidispense mode:) additional
p. 25).
aspirated volume.
 Consider that the software
may calculate higher
remaining volumes in some
cases to avoid crashes.
 Set liquid detection to off for
racks that are on park
positions at the beginning of
the procedure.
0x150B
Optical sensor:
See above (error 0x150A).
 See above (error 0x150A).
Liquid volume too low in
location: ...
0x150D
Optical sensor: Plate
could not be found in
location: ...
Optical sensor: Rack
could not be found in
location: ...
The rack programmed for this
 Place the rack onto the
location could not be found by the
locations as edited in the
optical sensor; possible causes:
corresponding application; or:
• Rack not placed onto location  Make sure that the rack is
(wrong rack code or wrong
rack height).
placed plane on the worktable
surface; or:
• Rack in wrong orientation.
 Rotate rack 180° (front to
back) and place it back onto
• Problems related to the optical
sensor function.
the worktable location; or:
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x150E
Optical sensor:
The tip rack programmed for this  Place the tip rack onto the
locations as edited in the
Tips could not be found location could not be found by the
optical
sensor;
possible
causes:
corresponding application; or:
in location ...
• Tip rack not placed onto
location.
• Problems related to the optical
sensor function.
150
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
0x1510
Optical sensor: Nothing See error message.
could be found in
location:
Remedy
 Place the labware
programmed for this location
on the worktable.
If error occurs again:
0x1512
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
Tip type ... is not placed Tips that are needed according to  Place the tip tray programmed
on the worktable
the application are not available
on the worktable.
for this location on the
worktable.
If error occurs again:
0x1513
0x1514
Position is out of range
Optical sensor: Rack in
wrong orientation in
location ...
The position to be addressed by
the tool carrier is outside of its
available range.
The tub holder has been placed
onto the worktable in the wrong
direction.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
 Change application.
If error occurs again:
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
 Rotate tub holder 180° and
place it back onto the
worktable; restart the
application.
0x1515
Tool cannot be used for Distance between tip cones of the  Change application.
rack in location ...
liquid handling tool does not
match the distance between
vessels (e.g., 24 tubes - rack does
not fit the 8-channel tool).
0x1516
No vessel in location: ... Vessels that are needed
according to the application are
not available on the worktable
(vessel/rack combination).
The item cannot be picked up by
the gripper.
 Place the vessel/rack
combination programmed for
this location on the worktable.
If error occurs again:
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
 Change application.
0x1518
Rack is not tangible in
location: ...
0x1519
Tip is too thick for vessel Diameter of the destination vessel  Select other tips or vessels in
in location: ...
is too small for the tip when
the application.
dispensing the liquid.
 Select dispense from top in the
options of the liquid handling
command.
0x151A
Optical sensor:
The optical sensor has detected a  Remove the cap from the
vessel and start the run again.
There is a cap on vessel cap on a vessel when trying to
detect a liquid level.
in location: ...
0x151B
Optical sensor: There is Relates to vessels that are
a wrong vessel in
equipped with a readable code
location: ...
(e.g. Eppendorf tubs): The rack
programmed for this location
could not be found by the optical
sensor; possible causes:
 Place the vessel onto the
location as edited in the
corresponding application; or:
 Call local Eppendorf
Application Support.
• Wrong vessel.
• Problems related to the optical
sensor function.
0x151C
Optical sensor:
Level detection for very high
Vessel too high for level vessels is not possible.
detection in location: ...
 Switch off the level detection
for this vessel.
 Use level detection only for
vessel/rack equipment with a
total height below 103 mm.
151
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
0x151E
Detected volume is out
of detection range ...
Normally a system/hardware error  Do not fill vessels above the
(malfunction of the optical
specified maximum filling
sensor); but may also be caused
volume.
by filling a vessel up to the total
In other cases:
vessel height.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x151F
Labware stack too high
in location:
0x1522
A maximum of 5 racks can be
stacked in a location. Placing
Maximum pieces which more than 5 racks in a location.
may be piled:
Transport of the
selected labware to this
position or stack is not
allowed
Position xxx
0x1523
Labware stack too high
in location: xxx
Remedy
 Do not stack more than 5
racks in a location.
Different reasons to forbid this
 Change application.
transport; main reason: transport
of the selected labware to this
position or stack might result in
instability of the stack, or the
resulting stack might become too
high.
Total height of labware stacks (like  Edit application to avoid too
high labware stacks.
plates on adapters) is too high.
Maximum height: xxx
mm
0x1525
Filter plate wells are not Using the check levels option in
 Follow the instructions on the
empty
the vacuum command, the optical
display screen.
sensor detected residual liquid in
one of the filter wells.
0x1526
No free position for
deposition of tool
available
When trying to deposit the
dispensing tool after use the tool
holder did not find a free position
for the tool.
 Clear at least one position on
Method program may
not use more than four
dispensing tools
See error message.
 If more than 4 dispensing tools
Dispensing tool could
not be found.
See error message.
0x1528
0x1529
are needed, divide the
application into two
applications that use no more
than 4 dispensing tools.
0x152D
 Provide the gripper on the
Gripper could not be
found
See error message.
Tip too short
Tip does not reach the liquid level  Select other tips or vessels in
at the beginning or during the
the application.
course of the liquid handling
command.
Select other tips or
vessels in the method.
152
 Provide the dispensing tool
that is needed on the
worktable at its proper
position.
Dispensing tool required
for this method:...
0x152A
the worktable to accept a
dispensing tool.
worktable at its proper
position.
0x152F
Labware stack too high
in location: xxx
A maximum of 5 racks can be
piled in a location. After a
Maximum pieces which transport command the labware
stack would be too high.
may be piled: 5
 Change application.
0x1530
Dosing in pile not
allowed in location: xxx
 Change application.
0x1531
Transport of this pile not Do not transport a stack.
allowed in location: xxx
See error message.
 Change application.
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
0x1581
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
Optical sensor:
Error in level detection.
 Repeat measurement.
Maximum size of steps is
reached.
 Delete commands that are not
Liquid level could not be
detected in location: ...
0x1602
0x1604
Program too long
Load filename
necessary before insert new
commands.
• Parameters of a command are  Call local Eppendorf Service.
not loadable.
• File damaged.
0x1700
Liquid volume too low
Total volume supplied by the user  Calculate the total volume for
for vessel in location: ... in a source vessel is smaller than
the source or destination
needed for a sample transfer,
vessel and select a suitable
reagent transfer or mix command
vessel. Regarding additional
(total volume = volume to be
aspirated volume in case of
aspirated + remaining volume for
multidispense mode, refer to
this vessel + (in case of
manual (see Important volume
multidispense mode:) additional
terms for tubes and wells on
aspirated volume.
p. 25).
 Consider that the software
may calculate higher
remaining volumes in some
cases to avoid crashes.
 Set liquid detection to off for
racks that are on park
positions at the beginning of
the procedure.
0x1701
Liquid volume too large Total volume supplied in a source  Provide less volume in the
vessel.
for vessel in location:... vessel is larger than needed or
larger than vessel.
 Change application.
 When verifying the total
volume needed for the source
or destination, take into
account additional aspirated
volume in case of
multidispense
mode(see Important volume
terms for tubes and wells on
p. 25).
0x1900
Program error/system
error
Internal program error.
 Restart application run or
restart system.
If error occurs again:
0x1901
Loading error
File damaged.
0x1902
Loading error
File damaged.
0x1903
Loading error
File damaged.




Call local Eppendorf Service.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
153
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x1904
The following labware
has been deleted: ...
Edit mode:
 Change the source or
destination in the parameter of
the respective command in
accordance to match the
worktable. In this case the
pattern also has to be
re-edited;
The worktable was changed after
an application had been
programmed; thus, the labware
defined in a command is no
longer available.
 The labware has to be
reprogrammed in the
worktable.
0x1905
Loading error
File damaged.
0x1906
Loading error
File damaged.
0x1907
Loading error
File damaged.
0x1908
The method was written See Error message.
with a newer program
structure. You must
update your software if
you want to edit this
method
0x1909
Loading error
File damaged.
0x190A
Program error/system
error
Internal program error.





Call local Eppendorf Service.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Call local Eppendorf Service.
Update your software, or:
Call local Eppendorf Service.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
 Restart application run or
restart system.
If error occurs again:
0x190B
Program error/system
error
Internal program error.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
 Restart application run or
restart system.
If error occurs again:
0x190C
Program error/system
error
Internal program error.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
 Restart application run or
restart system.
If error occurs again:
0x190D
0x190E
154
The following labware is Edit mode/worktable:
not selected in the
The chosen labware is not
Labware File window: ... available in the labware collection
that had been selected for your
lab. Possible cause for this error
message: The labware has been
deselected in the Labware File
window.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
 Select the respective labware
in the Labware File window.
You need to have the
appropriate user rights. If you
do not have the necessary
user rights ask your
administrator.
 Select the respective labware
The following tool is not Edit mode/procedure:
in the Labware File window.
selected in the Labware The chosen tool is not available in
You need to have the
File Window: ...
the labware collection that had
appropriate user rights. If you
been selected for your lab.
do not have the necessary
Possible cause for this error
user rights ask your
message: The labware has been
administrator.
deselected in the Labware File
window.
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
0x190F
The following liquid is
Edit mode/procedure:
not selected in the
The chosen liquid option is not
Labware File Window: ... available in the labware collection
that had been selected for your
lab. Possible cause for this error
message: The labware has been
deselected in the Labware File
window.
0x1910
Cause
Remedy
This selection could only be
deactivate/activate by Eppendorf
Service.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
The method was written The position of required labware  Load the concerned
application on a compatible
for another workstation is not available on this device e.g.
device, or
configuration
you have a 5075 LH and the
application was written on a 5075  Modify the application until it
The position of the
matches the available device.
following labware is not VAC.
available on this
worktable
The position of the
following labware is not
allowed anymore
yyy
in location: xxx
Edit mode/worktable: The chosen  Place the respective labware
on another position.
labware may not be placed on the
selected position anymore.
Possible cause for this error
message: The application has
been written with a former version
of the software.
0x1911
The following labware
has been changed, so
that the pattern does not
fit anymore: xxx
 Either change the order or
As it is possible to change the
contents of the “Equipped
order or contents of an “Equipped
Holder” combination back to
Holder” combination, it can
the original. Or change the
happen that the recent pattern of
pattern in the command.
a command does not fit the new
positions of the tubes.
0x1980 to 0x1983
Program error/system
error
Internal program error.
 Restart application run or
restart system.
If error occurs again:
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x1984
No parameter for tool/
liquid.
Edit mode/parameter in command  Select another tool or another
Sample Transfer:
liquid type.
A special file for the selected
combination of tool and liquid type
is not available.
0x1985
Program error/system
error
Internal program error.
 Restart application run or
restart system.
If error occurs again:
0x1986
Program error/system
error
Internal program error.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
 Restart application run or
restart system.
If error occurs again:
0x1A02
The name is already
used for another
labware
Edit mode / labware:
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
 Enter a different name.
The same name has been defined
for a different rack or another
labware item.
155
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x1A03
This position is not
available for the
selected labware
Edit mode/worktable:
 Place the selected labware in
The selected labware
may not be stacked on
top of labware already
placed
Edit mode/worktable:
0x1A05
Maximum number of
labware stacked: 5
Edit mode/worktable:
0x1A06
Labware stack too high
in location: xxx
Edit mode/worktable:
0x1A04
Maximum height: xxx
mm
0x1A10
0x1A11
0x1A12
Certain worktable positions are
not allowed for certain labware
(e.g., tips can only be placed in
the rear of the worktable).
another location.
 See "Cause".
Building of labware stacks on the
worktable is restricted to certain
labware combinations (e.g.,
thermorack above thermorack
does not make sense).
Place the selected labware in
Certain labware build a pile which another location.
contains too many when placed
on certain labware.
 See "Cause".
Labware stacks on the worktable
may not exceed a maximum
height limit (e.g., plates on
adapters is allowed; reservoir
holder on adapters is not allowed
because the stack would become
too high).
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this source
rack
Edit mode/parameter in command  Choose another rack or
another tool.
Sample Transfer:
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this
destination rack.
Edit mode/parameter in command  Choose another rack or
Sample Transfer:
another tool.
Source rack does not fit to
8-channel-tool (e.g.: 24-well-plate
or tube rack with 24 positions).
Destination rack does not fit the
8-channel tool (e.g. 24-well plate
or tube rack with 24 positions).
No source or destination Edit mode/parameter in command  Select source or destination,
respectively.
selected
Sample Transfer:
Source or destination rack has not
been selected.
0x1A15
0x1A16
Invalid entry for
movement blow (0 ...
100)
Edit mode/parameter in transfer
command:
Invalid entry for delay
blow (0 ... 9999)
Edit mode/parameter in transfer
command:
 Enter a value between 0 and
100%.
A value beyond the allowed range
has been entered for the
parameter Movement Blow.
 Enter a value between 0 and
9999 msec.
A value beyond the allowed range
has been entered for the
parameter Delay Blow.
0x1A17
Invalid entry for speed
aspiration (0.2 ... 110)
Edit mode/parameter in transfer
command:
A value beyond the allowed range
has been entered for the
parameter speed aspiration.
156
 Enter a value between 0.2 and
110 mm/sec.
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x1A19
Invalid entry for speed
blow (0.2 ... 110)
Edit mode/parameter in transfer
command:
 Enter a value between 0.2 and
110 mm/sec.
A value beyond the allowed range
has been entered for the
parameter Speed Blow.
0x1A1A
0x1A20
0x1A21
0x1A22
Invalid entry for initial
stroke (0 ... 100)
Edit mode/parameter in transfer
command: a value beyond the
allowed range has been entered
for the parameter initial stroke.
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this source
rack
Edit mode/parameter in command  Choose another rack or
another tool.
Reagent Transfer:
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this
destination rack
Edit mode/parameter in command  Choose another rack or
Reagent Transfer:
another tool.
 Enter a value between 0 and
100%.
Source rack does not fit the
8-channel tool (e.g., 24-well plate
or tube rack with 24 positions).
Destination rack does not fit the
8-channel tool (e.g., 24-well plate
or tube rack with 24 positions).
No source or destination Edit mode/parameter in command  Select source or destination,
selected
Reagent Transfer:
respectively.
Source or destination rack has not
been selected.
0x1A30
0x1A31
0x1A32
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this source
rack
Edit mode/parameter in command  Choose another rack or
Pool:
another tool.
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this
destination rack
Edit mode/parameter in command  Choose another rack or
Pool:
another tool.
Source rack does not fit the
8-channel tool (e.g., 24-well plate
or tube rack with 24 positions).
Destination rack does not fit the
8-channel tool (e.g. 24-well plate
or tube rack with 24 positions).
No source or destination Edit mode/parameter in command  Select source or destination,
respectively.
selected
Pool:
Source or destination rack has not
been selected.
0x1A40
0x1A41
0x1A42
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this source
rack
Edit mode/parameter in command  Choose another rack or
PoolOneDest:
another tool.
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this
destination rack
Edit mode/parameter in command  Choose another rack or
PoolOneDest:
another tool.
Source rack does not fit the
8-channel tool (e.g., 24-well plate
or tube rack with 24 positions).
Destination rack does not fit the
8-channel tool (e.g. 24-well plate
or tube rack with 24 positions).
No source or destination Edit mode/parameter in command  Select source or destination,
selected
PoolOneDest:
respectively.
Source or destination rack has not
been selected.
157
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
0x1A50
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this source
rack
Edit mode/parameter in command  Choose another rack or
Dilute:
another tool.
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this
destination rack
Edit mode/parameter in command  Choose another rack or
Dilute:
another tool.
0x1A51
0x1A52
Remedy
Source rack does not fit the
8-channel tool (e.g., 24-well plate
or tube rack with 24 positions).
Destination rack does not fit the
8-channel tool (e.g. 24-well plate
or tube rack with 24 positions).
No source or destination Edit mode/parameter in command  Select source or destination,
selected
Dilute:
respectively.
Source or destination rack has not
been selected.
0x1A61
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this rack
Edit mode/parameter in command  Choose another rack or
Mix:
another tool.
Rack does not fit the 8-channel
tool (e.g., 24-well plate or tube
rack with 24 positions).
0x1A62
No rack selected
Edit mode/parameter in command  Select rack, respectively.
Mix:
Rack has not been selected.
0x1A65
Invalid entry for speed
(0.2 ... 110)
Edit mode/parameter in command Enter a value between 0.2 and
Mix:
110 mm/sec.
A value beyond the allowed range
has been entered for the
parameter Speed .
0x1A70
0x1A73
0x1A75
0x1A76
158
This position is already
occupied
Edit mode/pattern:
Delete function only
available for last entry
Edit mode/pattern:
A rack may only have
384 positions
Edit mode/pattern:
When editing the pattern you have
tried to select a certain position
that is already occupied.
Deleting a pattern position you
just entered is only possible as
long as you did not leave the
source (or the destination,
respectively).
Not enough software memory
available for editing the pattern.
Maximum possible positions are
384.
 Follow the direction of the
edited pattern and move to a
different position.
 If you have to delete this
position which is no more
available you must edit a new
pattern from the beginning
(softkey new pattern or cancel).
 Choose another rack,
because the chosen rack has
too many positions.
Edit mode/pattern:
8-channel tool cannot
 Choose another rack or
be used for this module Rack does not fit the 8-channel
another tool.
rack
tool (e.g., Tubs + Modules (equip) +
Holders-combination with
positions all less than 8 in
Modules).
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
0x1A77
No module rack or tubes Edit mode/pattern:
 Choose another rack.
found
Rack does not have any positions
(e.g., Tubs + Modules (equip) +
Holders-combination with
positions all less than 1 in
Modules).
0x1A78
Number of tubes not
supported
0x1A80
Cause
Edit mode/pattern:
Remedy
 Choose another rack.
One or more Modules have 3, 5,
6, 7 or more than 8 positions. This
is not supported.
Invalid entry for minutes Edit mode/parameter in command  Enter a value between 0 and
(0 ... 99)
Wait:
99 minutes.
A value beyond the allowed range
has been entered for the
parameter minutes.
0x1A81
Invalid entry for seconds Edit mode/parameter in command  Enter a value between 0 and
(0 ... 59)
Wait:
59 seconds.
A value beyond the allowed range
has been entered for the
parameter seconds.
0x1A90
Selecting more than one Edit mode/parameter in transfer
rack as Source or as
command:
Destination:
The selected labwares have a
All source racks (or all different amount of wells.
destination racks, resp.)
must have the same well
pattern
 Choose another rack.
0x1A91
Selecting more than one Edit mode/parameter in transfer
rack as Source or as
command:
Destination:
A labware may not be selected
Rack was already
more than once.
selected as source rack
(or as destination rack,
resp.)
 Enter a value between 0 and
0x1AB0
110 degrees.
Invalid entry for minutes Edit mode/parameter in command  Enter a value between 0 and
99 minutes.
(0 ... 99)
Vacuum:
A value beyond the allowed range
has been entered for the
parameter minutes.
0x1AB1
Invalid entry for seconds Edit mode/parameter in command  Enter a value between 0 and
(0 ... 59)
Vacuum:
59 seconds.
A value beyond the allowed range
has been entered for the seconds
parameter.
0x1AB2
Invalid entry for vacuum
pressure (1 ... 90) kPa
and (10 ... 900) mbar
resp.
Edit mode/parameter in command  Enter a value between 0 and
Vacuum:
59 seconds.
A value beyond the allowed range
has been entered for the seconds
parameter.
159
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
0x1AE0
Invalid entry for mixing
speed (0 ... 2000)
Edit mode / parameter in
Enter a value between 0 and 2000
command ”Thermomixer”: a value rpm
beyond the allowed range has
been entered for the parameter
”speed”
0x1AE1
Invalid entry for minutes Edit mode / parameter in
Enter a value between 0 and 120
(0 ... 120)
command ”Thermomixer”: a value minutes
beyond the allowed range has
been entered for the parameter
”minutes”
0x1AE2
Invalid entry for seconds Edit mode / parameter in
Enter a value between 0 and 59
(0 ... 59)
command ”Thermomixer”: a value seconds
beyond the allowed range has
been entered for the parameter
”seconds”
0x1AE3
Invalid entry for
temperature (4 ... 110)
Edit mode / parameter in
Enter a value between 4 and 110
command ”Thermomixer”: a value degrees
beyond the allowed range has
been entered for the parameter
”temperature”
0x1C00 to 0x1C09
File could not be read
File damaged.
0x1C0B
Sample number too
large
Run mode:
File could not be read
File damaged.
0x1C0D
You must clear old
pattern first
Edit mode/pattern:
0x1C0E
You must go forward
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
 Start the application again and
enter a lower number of
The number of samples you
samples; or:
entered will fill more than one rack
(source or destination,
 Enter the edit mode and
respectively) based on the
program a pattern that
programmed pattern.
together with the number of
samples you want to run will
not extend beyond one rack.
0x1C0C
Press "new pattern"
Remedy
You tried to change a stored
pattern before deleting the old
pattern.
Edit mode/pattern:
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
 Delete the old pattern by
pressing the button new
pattern.
 See explanation in "Cause".
When entering the pattern, the
order of edited locations in the
source (or destination,
respectively) must be from left to
right or from the top of the pattern
downwards (i.e., move only in
columns or in rows).
0x1C0F
 See explanation in "Cause".
You may only move
Edit mode/pattern:
horizontally or vertically When entering the pattern the
order of edited locations in the
source (or destination, resp.) must
be from the left to right or from top
of the pattern downwards (i.e.,
move only in columns or in rows).
Note: Error message may also
occur when working with an
8-channel tool and editing another
position than the upper ones (see
error code 0x1C1F).
160
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
0x1C10
Pattern for replicates of Edit mode/pattern:
first sample too complex The pattern algorithm cannot
handle this pattern.
Remedy
 Enter a simpler pattern if
possible.
In case this is not possible:
 Call local Eppendorf
Application Support.
0x1C11
Pattern too complex
Edit mode/pattern:
 Enter a simpler pattern if
possible.
The pattern algorithm cannot
handle this pattern.
In case this is not possible:
Note: See note in error 0x1C0F.
 Call local Eppendorf
Application Support.
0x1C12
Program error/system
error
Internal program error.
 Restart application run or
restart system.
If error occurs again:
0x1C13
Program error/system
error
Internal program error.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
 Restart application run or
restart system.
If error occurs again:
0x1C14
0x1C15
Edit mode/pattern:
Pattern too complex
Edit mode/pattern:
 Enter a simpler pattern if
The pattern algorithm cannot
handle this pattern.
In case this is not possible:
possible.
The basic unit of the pattern you
tried to enter extends beyond a
In case this is not possible:
row or a column. This cannot be  Call local Eppendorf
handled by the pattern algorithm.
Application Support.
Note: See note in error 0x1C0F.
0x1C16
0x1C17
0x1C18
0x1C19
0x1C1A
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
 Enter a simpler pattern if
Pattern must fit in rows
or columns
This position is already
occupied
Edit mode/pattern:
You must start with the
source
Edit mode/pattern:
Please enter a source
now
Edit mode/pattern:
Please enter a
destination now
Edit mode/pattern:
No more positions
available (limited by
Number of Samples
command)
Edit mode/pattern:
When editing the pattern you have
tried to select a certain rack
position that is already occupied.
possible.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
 Following the edited pattern
move to a different rack
position.
 See explanation in "Cause".
When editing a pattern you must
start with the source.
In the destination rack, you tried to
enter more replicates than you
had sources.
When having selected a source in
the “Sample Transfer” command
you first have to enter a
destination for this source before
moving to the next source position
Editing further positions is not
possible because the limit set in
the Number of Samples command
would be exceeded.
 Enter the same number of
replicates for all sources you
edit when programming a
pattern.
 Edit the destination position(s)
for the selected source
position.
 Select a pattern that fits the
programmed Number of
Samples command.
161
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x1C1B
Program error/system
error
Internal program error.
 Restart application run or
restart system.
If error occurs again:
0x1C1C
Program error/system
error
Internal program error.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
 Restart application run or
restart system.
If error occurs again:
0x1C1D
Program error/system
error
Internal program error.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
 Restart application run or
restart system.
If error occurs again:
0x1C1E
Pattern for reagent
transfer:
Edit mode/pattern for command
Reagent Transfer:
source can be chosen
only once
After having entered the source
and the destinations for the
reagent transfer you cannot select
an additional source.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
 Enter the source only once. In
case this does not meet your
requirements for this
application consider selecting
command Sample Transfer
instead of Reagent Transfer; or:
 Call local Eppendorf
Application Support.
0x1C1F
0x1C20
0x1C21
0x1C22
Pattern with 8-channel
tool:
Edit mode/pattern with 8-channel  See explanation in "Cause".
tool:
Please edit upper
position of this tool
Only the upper positions of the
8-channel tools can be selected.
Pattern for sample
transfer:
Edit mode/pattern for command
Sample Transfer:
only one position per
sample on source
Before selecting a second source
position, you have to edit the
destination for the first source
position.
In source rack further
positions cannot be
edited because
positions in destination
rack are already
occupied
Edit mode/pattern:
Selecting further source positions
would require a second
destination rack according to the
pattern you edited.
Pattern for pool one
Edit mode/pattern for command
dest: destination can be PoolOneDest:
chosen only once
After having entered the sources
and the destination, you cannot
select an additional destination.
 Enter destination for the
source you just selected;
afterwards, you can edit the
next source position.
 Edit a pattern that does not
require more than one
destination rack per
command. To use more
destination racks, create
additional commands.
 Enter the destination only
once. In case this does not
meet your requirements for
this application, consider
selecting command Pool
instead of PoolOneDest; or:
 Call local Eppendorf
Application Support.
0x1C23
Pattern for dilute:
only one position per
sample on source
162
Edit mode/pattern for command
Dilute:
Before selecting a second source
position, you have to edit the
destination for the first source
position.
 Enter destination for the
source you just selected;
afterwards, you can edit the
next source position.
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x1C25
Pattern for pool:
Edit mode/pattern for command
Pool:
 Enter sources for the next
only one position per
sample on destination
0x1C26
Pattern for Reagent
Transfer: not enough
source positions
Before selecting a second
destination position, you have to
edit the next source positions to
be pooled into this destination.
destination position;
afterwards, you can edit the
next destination position.
Run mode: To provide enough
 Start the application again and
reagent volume for the number of
enter a lower number of
samples you entered, the selected
samples; or:
reagent source positions must be  Enter the edit mode and
higher.
program more reagent source
positions in the pattern. Keep
in mind that the selected
reagent source positions may
not extend beyond one rack.
 Use a smaller value.
 Use a bigger value.
0x2025
Bottom tolerance too big Bottom tolerance too big.
0x2026
Bottom tolerance too
small
0x2027
(SVC_ILLEGAL_NODE Internal error.
_TYPE)
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x2100
Program error/system
error
 Restart application run or
Bottom tolerance too small.
Internal program error.
restart system.
If error occurs again:
0x2101
Tool not defined.
Parameter Pipet. Tool was not
edited in the application.
0x2102
Tool not selected in the
Labware File Window
The pipette tool you edited in the
application is not selected in the
Labware File Window and
therefore is not available for
programming.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
 See explanation in "Cause".
This selection could only be
deactivate/activated by Eppendorf
Service.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x2104
Tips not edited in
worktable/procedure
Tips were edited in the procedure  Edit the tips that you
programmed in the procedure
of the application, but they were
in the worktable.
not edited in the worktable (e.g.,
filter tips <-> tips without filter).
0x2105
Parameter conflict:
The Volume and Source
parameters of the source vessel
do not match (Volume is higher
than the maximum filling volume
of the source vessel).
Start volume greater
than filling volume of
source tube or well
 Edit Volume and Source in the
worktable so that Volume is
covered by the maximum
filling volume of the source
vessel.
0x2106
Parameter conflict: Start
volume greater than
filling volume of
destination tube or well
The Volume and Destination
 Edit Volume and Destination in
parameters of the destination
the worktable so that Volume
is covered by the maximum
vessel do not match (Volume is
filling volume of the
higher than the maximum filling
volume of the destination vessel).
destination vessel.
0x2107
Volume not defined
Parameter Volume was not edited  See explanation in "Cause".
in the application.
0x2108
Parameter conflict:
The Volume and Pipet. Tool
 Edit Volume and Pipet. Tool so
that Volume is covered by the
Volume too small for this parameters of the application do
not match (Volume is smaller than
volume range of the pipette
tool
the lower limit of the tool volume
tool.
range).
163
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
0x2109
Parameter conflict:
The Volume and Pipet. Tool
Volume too large for this parameters of the application do
not match (Volume is higher than
tool
the upper limit of the tool volume
range).
Remedy
 Edit Volume and Pipet. Tool so
that Volume is covered by the
volume range of the pipette
tool.
0x210A
Parameter conflict:
volume greater than
filling volume of source
tube or well
 Edit Volume and Source so
The Volume and Source
that Volume is covered by the
parameters of the application do
maximum filling volume of the
not match (Volume is higher than
the maximum filling volume of the
source vessel.
source vessel).
0x210B
Parameter conflict:
 Edit Volume and Destination so
The Volume and Destination
that Volume is covered by the
parameters of the application do
maximum filling volume of the
not match (Volume is higher than
destination vessel.
the maximum filling volume of the
destination vessel).
volume greater than
filling volume of
destination tube or well
164
Cause
0x210D
Source rack not defined Parameter Source was not edited  See explanation in "Cause".
in the application.
0x210E
Source rack not edited
in worktable
0x210F
Source rack not
The source rack you edited in the  Select the rack in the Labware
File Window or edit a different
selected in the Labware application is not selected or
rack in the application.
File Window
removed in the Labware File
Window and therefore is not
available for programming.
0x2110
Destination rack not
defined
Parameter Source was not edited  See explanation in "Cause".
in the application.
0x2111
Destination rack not
edited in worktable
Destination rack was edited in the  Edit the rack that you
procedure of the application, but it
programmed in the procedure
as Destination in the worktable
was not edited in the worktable.
or edit a different destination
rack in the application.
0x2112
Destination rack not
The destination rack you edited in  Select the rack in the Labware
File Window or edit a different
selected in the Labware the application is not selected or
rack in the application.
File Window
removed in the Labware File
Window and therefore is not
available for programming.
0x2113
Pattern not defined
Parameter Pattern was not edited  See explanation in "Cause".
in the application.
0x2114
Loading error (invalid
entry in pattern)
Normally a system error; but may  Edit a pattern with source and
also be caused by editing a
destination positions.
pattern without destination
In other cases:
positions; or:
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
File damaged.
0x211B
Liquid type not defined
Parameter Liquid Type was not
edited in the application.
0x211C
Liquid type not selected The Liquid Type you choose in the
in the Labware File
application is not selected or
Window
removed in the Labware File
Window and therefore is not
available for programming.
The source rack you edited in the  Edit the rack that you
procedure of the application has
programmed in the procedure
been removed from the worktable.
as Source in the worktable, or
edit a different source rack in
the application.
 Choose a "Liquid Type" for the
Liquid Handling Command.
This selection could only be
deactivate/activated by Eppendorf
Service.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x211D
Mixing cycles in source
not defined
Parameter No. of Cycles in a mix  See explanation in "Cause".
procedure was not edited for the
source in the application (mix
procedure as defined in a
command Mix or as part of a liquid
transfer command via parameter
Options).
0x211E
Invalid entry for mixing
cycles in source
(1 ... 99)
 Enter a number between 1
Entry for the No. of Cycles
and 99 for the No. of Cycles
parameter in a mix procedure for
parameter.
source vessels was higher than
the max. limit (1 up to 99 cycles)
(mix procedure as defined in a
command Mix or as part of a liquid
transfer command via parameter
Options).
0x211F
Invalid entry for mixing
speed in source
(1 ... 10)
Entry for the parameter Speed in a  Enter a number between 1
and 10 for the Speed
mix procedure for source vessels
parameter.
was higher than the max. limit
(1 up to 10) (mix procedure as
defined in a command Mix or as
part of a liquid transfer command
via parameter Options).
0x2120
 See explanation in "Cause".
Mixing volume in source Parameter Volume in a mix
not defined
procedure for source vessels was
not edited in the application (mix
procedure as defined in a
command Mix or as part of a liquid
transfer command via parameter
Options).
0x2121
Parameter conflict:
The Volume and Pipet. Tool
 Edit Volume and Pipet. Tool so
mixing volume in source parameters of a mix procedure for
that Volume is within pipette
too large for this tool
source vessels are not in
tool's volume range.
agreement (Volume is higher than
the upper limit of the tool's volume
range) (mix procedure as defined
in a command Mix or as part of a
liquid transfer command via
parameter Options).
0x2122
Parameter conflict:
The Volume and Pipet. Tool
 Edit Volume and Pipet. Tool so
mixing volume in source parameters of a mix procedure for
that Volume is within the
too small for this tool
source vessels do not match
pipette tool's volume range.
(Volume is less than the lower limit
of the tool's volume range) (mix
procedure as defined in a
command Mix or as part of a liquid
transfer command via parameter
Options).
0x2123
Parameter conflict:
The Volume and Source
 Edit Volume and Source so
parameters
of
a
mix
procedure
in
that Volume is within the
mixing volume in source
the
application
do
not
match
allowable filling volume of the
greater than filling
source vessel.
volume of source tube (Volume is higher than the
maximum filling volume of the
or well
source vessel) (mix procedure as
defined in a command Mix or as
part of a liquid transfer command
via parameter Options).
165
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
166
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x2124
Mixing cycles in
destination not defined
Parameter No. of Cycles in a mix  See explanation in "Cause".
procedure for destination vessels
was not edited in the application
(mix procedure as part of a liquid
transfer command via parameter
Options)
0x2125
Invalid entry for mixing
cycles in destination
(1 ... 99)
 Enter a number between 1
Entry for the parameter No. of
and 99 for the No. of Cycles
Cycles in a mix procedure for
parameter.
destination vessels was higher
than the max. limit (1 up to
99 cycles) (mix procedure as part
of a liquid transfer command via
parameter Options).
0x2126
Invalid entry for mixing
speed in destination
(1 ... 10)
Entry for the parameter Speed in a  Enter a number between 1
and 10 for the Speed
mix procedure for destination
parameter.
vessels was higher than the max.
limit (1 up to 10) (mix procedure
as part of a liquid transfer
command via parameter Options).
0x2127
Mixing volume in
destination not defined
 See explanation in "Cause".
Parameter Volume in a mix
procedure for destination vessels
was not edited in the application
(mix procedure as part of a liquid
transfer command via parameter
Options).
0x2128
Parameter conflict:
0x2129
Parameter conflict:
mixing volume in
destination too small for
this tool
 Edit Volume and Pipet. Tool so
The Volume and Pipet. Tool in a
that Volume is within the
mix procedure for destination
volume range of the pipet tool.
vessels do not match (Volume is
lower than the minimum allowed
volume) (mix procedure as part of
a liquid transfer command via
parameter Options).
0x212A
Parameter conflict:
mixing volume in
destination greater than
filling volume of
destination tube or well
 Edit Volume and Destination so
The Volume and Destination
that Volume is within the
parameters in a mix procedure for
maximum filling volume of the
destination vessels do not match
destination vessel.
(Volume is higher than the
maximum filling volume of the
destination vessel) (mix
procedure as part of a liquid
transfer command via parameter
Options).
 Edit Volume and Pipet. Tool so
The Volume and Pipet. Tool
that Volume is within the
parameters
in
a
mix
procedure
for
mixing volume in
pipette tool's volume range.
destination
vessels
do
not
match
destination too large for
(Volume is higher than the upper
this tool
limit of the tool volume range) (mix
procedure as part of a liquid
transfer command via parameter
Options).
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
0x212C
Parameter conflict:
0x212D
Parameter conflict:
Remedy
When the transfer type parameter  Change parameter transfer
is set to multidispense, the mix
type to pipette; or:
mix after dispense not
after
dispense
parameter
cannot
allowed in multidispense
 Omit the mixing step; in this
be edited for this command.
mode
case you could also edit
another mixing step as a new
command (Mix), which would
be performed after the
previous command of the
procedure has ended.
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this source
rack
0x212E
Cause
Edit mode / parameter in liquid
handling command:
 Choose another rack or
another tool.
Source rack does not fit the
8-channel tool (e.g., 24-well plate
or tube rack with 24 positions).
Parameter conflict:
8-channel tool cannot
be used for this
destination rack
Edit mode / parameter in liquid
handling command:
0x212F
Sample number too
large
The number of samples you have  Program a pattern that
entered will fill more than one rack
together with the number of
(source or destination,
samples you want to run will
respectively) based on the
not extend beyond one rack,
programmed pattern.
or choose a lower number of
samples in the corresponding
Number of Samples command.
0x2130
Parameter conflict: tip
cannot be used for this
source rack
The Source rack parameter in the  Choose another rack or
another tool.
liquid handling command does not
match the selected tool (e.g.,
384-well plate and TS_1000 or
TM1000_8).
0x2131
Parameter conflict: tip
cannot be used for this
destination rack
The Destination rack parameter in  Choose another rack or
another tool.
the liquid handling command does
not match the selected tool (e.g.,
384-well plate and TS_1000 or
TM1000_8).
0x2132
Invalid number of
samples (1 ... 384)
Number of samples you have
entered is too high.
Rack or plate not
defined
Edit mode/parameter in command  See explanation in "Cause".
Transport:
0x2133
 Choose another rack or
another tool.
Destination rack does not fit the
8-channel tool (e.g. 24-well plate
or tube rack with 24 positions).
 Enter a maximum number of
samples up to 384.
Labware to be transported was
not edited.
0x2134
0x2135
Rack not selected in the The rack you edited in a
Labware File Window
command Transport (parameter
labware) is not selected or
removed in the Labware File
Window and therefore is not
available for programming.
 Select the rack in the Labware
File Window or edit a different
rack in the application.
Location for destination Edit mode/parameter in command  See explanation in "Cause".
not defined
Transport:
The destination location for the
labware to be transported was not
edited.
167
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x2136
Invalid entry for seconds Edit mode/parameter in command  Enter a value between 0 and
(1 ... 59)
Wait:
59 seconds.
A value beyond the allowed range
has been entered for the seconds
parameter.
0x2137
Invalid entry for minutes Edit mode/parameter in command  Enter a value between 0 and
(1 ... 99)
Wait:
99 minutes.
A value above the allowable
maximum minutes has been
entered for the minutes parameter.
0x2138
Method without active
commands
application contains only passive  Insert at least one active
commands (like wait,
command.
comment, etc.).
0x2139
Parameter conflict:
Pool/POD:
 Do not mix.
mix before aspirating not Mix before aspirating not allowed
allowed in multiaspirate in multiaspirate mode.
mode
0x213A
Labware to be
Parameter in command Exchange:  Enter a new labware for one of
exchanged are identical Both values point to the same
the two positions.
labware.
0x2150
Editing vacuum
Vacuum unit is not listed in the
command not possible configuration file.
because vacuum unit is
not part of this
instrument
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x2152
Editing vac lid option in To use the Vac Lid option in the
vacuum command not vacuum command the worktable
possible because no
must be equipped with a vac lid.
vac lid on the worktable
 Editing the worktable please
0x2153
Editing vac lid option
vacuum command not
possible because no
gripper on the worktable
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
To use the Vac Lid option in the
vacuum command the worktable
must be equipped with a gripper.
Communication between
instrument and control panel may
be defective.
0x2154
Parameter conflict:
The check levels option can only
be performed when the lid has
been taken off the filter plate
before by the gripper.
Check levels time may
not be shorter than
remove lid time
 Select a check levels time
greater than the remove lid
time.
0x2160
No temperature unit in
the selected location
Editing a temperature command  See explanations in "Cause".
you must select a location
equipped with a temperature unit.
0x2161
Temperature unit 1 is
not installed
Temperature unit 1 is not listed in  Call local Eppendorf Service.
the configuration file.
0x2162
Temperature unit 2 is
not installed
Temperature unit 2 is not listed in  Call local Eppendorf Service.
the configuration file.
0x2163
Temperature unit 3 is
not installed
Temperature unit 3 is not listed in  Call local Eppendorf Service.
the configuration file.
0x2170
Parameter conflict:
To edit the elution from filter option  See explanations in "Cause".
a filter plate must have been
edited as source.
Parameter elution from
filter is only possible
when filter plates have
been selected as source
168
place a Vac Lid on position
"GRIPPER".
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x2171
Parameter conflict:
See explanation in the error
message.
 See explanation in the error
Multidispense mode is
not allowed when
selected elution from
filter
0x2172
Parameter conflict:
Transfer volume must
be set to zero when
Parameter elution from
filter has been selected
message.
Using the elution from filter option,  Set the volume to zero
the complete volume contained in
because the entry will not
the filter plate wells is always
have an effect in the
aspirated; therefore, editing a
application run.
volume to be transferred is not
possible.
0x2173
Elution from filter is only File damaged.
possible in a sample
transfer
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x2190
Transport command not The chosen application may not
possible because no
be run on the selected device.
workstation available
Possible cause for this error
message:
 Load the concerned
0x2191
0x2201
Exchange command not
possible because no
liquid handling station
available
Hardware error
Carrier: final position in
x always found
0x2207
Hardware error
application on an other device,
or
 delete Transport commands in
The application has been written
for another device.
the application.
The chosen application may not
be run on the selected device.
Possible cause for this error
message:
 Load the concerned
The application has been written
for another device.
in the application.
application on an other device,
or
 delete Exchange commands
X-axis motor: Home switch always  Call local Eppendorf Service.
on.
X-axis motor: Steps lost.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
Carrier: steps lost in x
0x220A
(SMOT_IOCTL_ERR)
X-axis motor: Unknown driver
error code.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x220B
(SMOT_BADPARAMS)
X-axis motor: error bad
parameters.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
0x220C
(SMOT_ALREADYONP X-axis motor: already in position.
OS)
0x2301
Hardware error
Carrier: final position in
y always found
0x2307
Hardware error
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
Y-axis motor: Home switch always  Call local Eppendorf Service.
on.
Y-axis motor: Steps lost.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
Y-axis motor: Steps lost.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
Y-axis motor: Home not found.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
Y-axis motor: Home not found.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
Carrier: steps lost in y
0x230D
Hardware error
Carrier: steps lost in y
0x230E
Hardware error
Carrier: final position in
y not found
0x230F
Hardware error
Carrier: final position in
y not found
169
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
0x2401
Symptom/message
Cause
Hardware error
Z-axis motor: Home switch always  Call local Eppendorf Service.
on.
Carrier: final position in
z always found
0x2402
Hardware error
Remedy
Z-axis motor: Home2 not found.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
Z-axis motor: Home2 switch
always on.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
Carrier: final position 2
in z not found
0x2403
Hardware error
Carrier: final position 2
in z always found
0x2404
Hardware error
Z-axis motor: Wrong home switch.  Call local Eppendorf Service.
Carrier: final position in
z wrong
0x2407
Hardware error
Z-axis motor: Steps lost.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
Z-axis motor: Steps lost.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
Z-axis motor: Home not found.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
Z-axis motor: Home not found.
 Call local Eppendorf Service.
Communication error
during transmission to
Trinamic module
Hardware error
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
Communication error
during reception from
Trinamic module
Hardware error
Carrier: steps lost in z
0x240D
Hardware error
Carrier: steps lost in z
0x240E
Hardware error
Carrier: final position in
z not found
0x240F
Hardware error
Carrier: final position in
z not found
0x2F00
0x2F01
170
The communication with the
Trinamic module is failing.
The communication with the
Trinamic module is failing.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x2F02
Checksum error during Hardware error
reception from Trinamic The checksum from the Trinamic
module
module is failing.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x2F03
Communication error
during reception from
Trinamic module
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
Hardware error
The communication with the
Trinamic module is failing.
0x2F06
Mixer motor cannot find Hardware error
its home position
Mixer motor cannot find its home
position
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x2F08
Clamping device cannot Hardware error
write to spi bus
Communication with clamping
device is failing.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x2F0A
Clamping device did not Hardware error
reach operating current The gear belt of the clamping
device may be failing.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Code
Symptom/message
Cause
Remedy
0x2F0C
Clamping device limit
switch has wrong
position
Hardware error
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x3000
Temperature unit 1 in
location C1 reports an
invalid temperature
The temperature unit "TEMP1" in Shut down and switch off the
position C1 is damaged and
instrument; if error re-occurs after
showed an invalid temperature.
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x3001
Temperature unit 2 in
location C2 reports an
invalid temperature
The temperature unit "TEMP2" in Shut down and switch off the
position C2 is damaged and
instrument; if error re-occurs after
showed an invalid temperature.
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x3002
Temperature unit 3 in
location C3 reports an
invalid temperature
The temperature unit "TEMP3" in Shut down and switch off the
position C3 is damaged and
instrument; if error re-occurs after
showed an invalid temperature.
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x3003
The thermomixer
reports an invalid
temperature
The temperature unit of the
thermomixer is damaged and
showed an invalid temperature.
0x3004
Temperature unit 1 in
The temperature unit "TEMP1" in Shut down and switch off the
location C1 cannot heat position C1 is damaged and do
instrument; if error re-occurs after
not heat.
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x3005
Temperature unit 2 in
The temperature unit "TEMP2" in Shut down and switch off the
location C2 cannot heat position C2 is damaged and do
instrument; if error re-occurs after
not heat.
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x3006
Temperature unit 3 in
The temperature unit "TEMP3" in Shut down and switch off the
location C3 cannot heat position C3 is damaged and do
instrument; if error re-occurs after
not heat.
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x3007
The thermomixer cannot The temperature unit of the
heat
thermomixer is damaged and do
not heat.
0x3008
Temperature unit 1 in
The temperature unit "TEMP1" in Shut down and switch off the
location C1 cannot cool position C1 is damaged and does instrument; if error re-occurs after
not cool.
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x3009
Temperature unit 2 in
The temperature unit "TEMP2" in Shut down and switch off the
location C2 cannot cool position C2 is damaged and does instrument; if error re-occurs after
not cool.
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x300A
Temperature unit 3 in
The temperature unit "TEMP3" in Shut down and switch off the
location C3 cannot cool position C3 is damaged and does instrument; if error re-occurs after
not cool.
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
0x300B
The thermomixer cannot The temperature unit of the
thermomixer is damaged and
cool
does not cool.
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
Shut down and switch off the
instrument; if error re-occurs after
switching on: Call Eppendorf
Service
171
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
8
8
Maintenance
Maintenance
8.1
Service
8.1.1
Replacing the sealing rings of the eight-channel dispensing tool
1
Sealing ring
2
Tip cone
Damage to the gold contacts from handling.
NOTICE!
The connection to the PCB of the dispensing tool is interfered with or interrupted if the gold
contacts on the dispensing tool are damaged or dirtied.
 Do not touch the gold contacts.
Replace the sealing rings annually or as required.
Hint!
Use the auxiliary tool and the mounting aid included with the delivery of the dispensing tool.
Carry out the following steps to replace the sealing rings:
1. Attach the edge of the auxiliary tool at the level of the sealing ring.
2. Cut the sealing ring at the dispensing tool with the help of the auxiliary tool.
3. Remove the sealing ring by hand.
4. Clean the tip cones with a lightly moist and lint-free cloth.
5. Repeat the process for all other sealing rings and tip cones.
6. Attach the new sealing rings with the help of the mounting tool (shortened pipette tip) and
position the sealing rings in the recessed grooves of the tip cones.
8.1.2
Replacing the seals of the vacuum unit
 Replace the seals if there is visible damage or every half a year (or after 300 method
executions).
8.1.3
Replace the sealing mat of the Vac Lid
1. Button the new silicone sealing mat onto the bolts on the underside of the Vac Lid.
2. Ensure that the bolt heads do not get stuck in the mat.
172
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
8.1.4
Maintaining the dispensing tools
A lack of servicing will impair reliable dispensing.
NOTICE!
Servicing of the dispensing tools is essential after 200,000 full strokes. This is the only way to
ensure reliable dispensing.
 Note the warning in the software reporting that 200,000 full strokes have been reached and
have the dispensing tools serviced.
 Send the dispensing tool for maintenance to your service partner of Eppendorf AG.
8.1.5
Maintaining the gripper
 You can have the pins in the gripper jawas replaced by your service partner of Eppendorf AG.
8.2
Cleaning
8.2.1
Cleaning the worktable
Damage from UV radiation.
NOTICE!
Hint!
UV radiation can cause color changes to the surface or, in the course of time, cause damage to
the moving parts and electronics of the epMotion.
 Avoid UV radiation.
If the worktable becomes contaminated during operation, remove such contamination as quickly
as possible.
1. Clean the worktable with a 70% ethanol solution or with hypochlorite-containing agents (3%)
and a lint-free cloth.
2. Clean the worktable in the area of the spring plate using a cotton bud if necessary.
8.2.2
Cleaning the work surface adapter
1. Clean the work surface adapter with alcohol-containing disinfectants and a lint-free cloth. Do
not use any cleaning agents which contain sodium hypochlorite.
2. Wipe off the disinfectants after they have had time to take effect.
8.2.3
Cleaning the dispensing tools
1. Remove the ejector of the single-channel tools.
2. Clean the tip cones and surfaces with water or a 70% ethanol solution or with
hypochlorite-containing (3%) agents and a lint-free cloth.
3. Wipe off the disinfectants after they have had time to take effect.
173
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
8.2.4
Cleaning the gripper
Risk of injury from sharp pins.
Cuts or other injuries to the skin from sharp pins on the insides of the gripper jaws.
CAUTION!
 Always grasp the gripper at the top and not inside at the gripper jaws.
1. Clean the gripper with water, alcohol or alcohol-containing disinfectants or with Na
hypochlorite-containing (3 to 4%) agents and a lint-free cloth.
2. Wipe off the disinfectants after they have had time to take effect.
8.2.5
Cleaning the vacuum unit
1. In the event of contamination, clean the vacuum unit immediately with alcohol-containing
disinfectants or with Na hypochlorite-containing (3 to 4%) agents and a lint-free cloth.
2. Wipe off the disinfectants after they have had time to take effect.
8.2.6
Cleaning the thermomixer
1. In the event of contamination, clean the vacuum unit immediately with alcohol-containing
disinfectants or with Na hypochlorite-containing (3 to 4%) agents and a lint-free cloth.
2. Wipe off the disinfectants after they have had time to take effect.
8.2.7
Cleaning the barcode reader
Damage to device from ingress of liquid or abrasive materials and wipes.
NOTICE!
 Do not immerse the barcode reader in water.
 Do not wipe the window with abrasive materials and wipes.
 Never use solvents (for example acetone, benzene, ether, or phenol-based agents).
 If contaminated, clean the barcode reader with a moist cloth and mild cleaning agents (e.g.,
washing-up liquid) or plastic cleaner fluid.
8.2.8
Cleaning the thermoadapter, thermoblock and thermorack
1. Wipe down thermoadapter, thermoblock and thermorack with alcohol-containing disinfectant
or with Na hypochlorite (3 to 4%) and a lint-free cloth.
2. Wipe off the disinfectants after they have had time to take effect.
8.2.9
Cleaning the Vac Lid / Vac Thermo Lid
1. Clean Vac Lid mats and Vac Lid with alcohol-containing disinfectants or with Na hypochlorite
solution (5%) and a lint-free cloth.
2. Leave the disinfectants to act in accordance with the time specified in the instructions.
3. Wipe off the disinfectants.
8.2.10
Autoclave hardware and labware
8.2.10.1 Gripper and dispenser tool
Damage from excessive temperatures or contact with the wall of the autoclave.
NOTICE!
Hint!
 Ensure that the temperature in the autoclaving range exceeds 121°C by no more than 5°C.
 Ensure that the dispensing tool/gripper is not in contact with the wall of the autoclave.
Autoclave the dispensing tools and gripper in their entirety even though they include an electronic
component.
 Autoclave the gripper/dispensing tools for 20 minutes at 121°C and 1 bar pressure.
174
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
8.2.10.2 Autoclaving the vacuum unit
 Autoclave all transportable parts of the vacuum unit for 20 minutes at 121°C and 1 bar
pressure.
8.2.10.3 Autoclaving Labware
You can autoclave the following labware.
•
•
•
•

Thermoadapter, thermoblock and thermorack
Vac Lid mats, Vac Lid and Vac Thermo Lid
Elastic rubber mats and CycleLock frame
Tip holder for epT.I.P.S. Motion Reloads.
Autoclave the labware for 20 minutes at 121°C and 1 bar pressure.
The CycleLock mats and frame can also each be irradiated with UV and decontaminated 20
times.
1. Irradiate the mats and the frame at 254 nm UV.
2. Decontaminate in Na hypochlorite solution (10%) for 10 minutes.
8.3
Decontamination before shipment
If you want to send the dispensing tool or gripper to be checked, repaired or calibrated by
Eppendorf AG or one of its service partners, please observe the following:
Health hazard from contaminated dispensing tools and gripper.
 Perform decontamination before returning or storing the dispensing tools and the gripper. The
dispensing tools and the gripper must be clean and free of hazardous substances.
WARNING!
Hazardous substances are:
•
•
•
•
•
•

solutions presenting a hazard to health
potentially infectious agents
organic solvents and reagents
radioactive substances
proteins presenting a hazard to health
DNA
Follow the instructions in the decontamination certificate. These can be found as a PDF file
on our homepage www.eppendorf.de.
 Decontaminate all the parts you want to dispatch.
 Include the completed and signed decontamination certificate for returned goods with your
shipment (incl. the serial number of the dispensing tool).
175
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
9
9
Technical data
Technical data
Hint!
9.1
The following technical data apply exclusively to the automatic pipetting system epMotion. For
technical data on the PC and the keyboard please refer to the appropriate operating instructions.
Power supply
Voltage
100 to 240 V ±10%
Fuses
T 10 AL / 250 V
Current consumption
< 10 A
Frequency
50 Hz to 60 Hz ±5%
Power consumption (excluding thermal module)
• epMotion 5075 LH
• epMotion 5075 VAC
• epMotion 5075 TMX
9.2
• 80 W
• 140 W
• 185 W
Power consumption for thermal module
60 W
Overvoltage category
II (IEC 610 10-1)
Degree of contamination:
2
Protection class
1
Ambient conditions
General operation
+15°C to +35°C
55% to 75% rel. humidity
up to 2000 m NN
Storage conditions
-20°C to +70°C
10% to 80% rel. humidity
9.3
Weight/dimensions
Device
Width
107 cm
Depth
61 cm
Height
67 cm
Weight
9.4
176
Automatic pipetting system epMotion LH
85 kg
Automatic pipetting system epMotion VAC
90 kg
Automatic pipetting system epMotion TMX
116 kg
Interface
Specification
USB
USB 2.0
Ethernet
Ethernet 100 MBit/s
Interfaces
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
9.5
Dispensing Tools
Data for free-jet pipetting using double-distilled water. Data analysis in accordance with
ISO 8655.
Temperature approx. 20 °C, standard air pressure.
9.5.1
Pipetting
Dispensing
tool
Volume range
TS 50
1.0 - 50 μL
TS 300
TS 1000
TM 50_8
TM 300_8
TM 1000_8
20 - 300 μL
40 - 1 000 μL
1.0 - 50 μL
20 - 300 μL
40 - 1 000 μL
Volume
Error
Limits for average values
systematic
(falsity)
random
(Imprecision)
Lower limit
Upper limit
1 μL
±20.0 %
±5.0 %
0.80 μL
1.20 μL
5 μL
±5.0 %
±3.0 %
4.75 μL
5.25 μL
25 μL
±1.5 %
±0.6 %
24.63 μL
25.38 μL
50 μL
±1.0 %
±0.4 %
49.50 μL
50.50 μL
20 μL
±4.0 %
±2.5 %
19.2 μL
20.8 μL
30 μL
±3.0 %
±1.5 %
29.1 μL
30.9 μL
150 μL
±1.0 %
±0.4 %
148.5 μL
151.5 μL
300 μL
±0.6 %
±0.3 %
298.2 μL
301.8 μL
40 μL
±5.0 %
±1.5 %
38.0 μL
42.0 μL
100 μL
±2.0 %
±1.0 %
98.0 μL
102.0 μL
500 μL
±1.0 %
±0.2 %
495.0 μL
505.0 μL
1 000 μL
±0.7 %
±0.15 %
993.0 μL
1007.0 μL
1 μL
±25.0 %
±10.0 %
0.75 μL
1.25 μL
5 μL
±5.0 %
±5.0 %
4.75 μL
5.25 μL
25 μL
±2.0 %
±1.2 %
24.50 μL
25.50 μL
50 μL
±1.2 %
±0.6 %
49.40 μL
50.60 μL
20 μL
±10.0 %
±4.0 %
18.0 μL
22.0 μL
30 μL
±10.0 %
±3.5 %
27.0 μL
33.0 μL
150 μL
±2.5 %
±0.8 %
146.3 μL
153.8 μL
300 μL
±1.5 %
±0.5 %
295.5 μL
304.5 μL
40 μL
±6.0 %
±2.5 %
37.6 μL
42.4 μL
100 μL
±3.0 %
±1.5 %
97.0 μL
103.0 μL
500 μL
±1.5 %
±0.3 %
492.5 μL
507.5 μL
1 000 μL
±0.8 %
±0.15 %
992.0 μL
1008.0 μL
177
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
9.5.2
Dispensing
Dispensing
tool
Volume range
TS 50
1.0 - 50 μL
Volume
1 μL
Error
Limits for average values
systematic
(falsity)
random
(Imprecision)
Lower limit
Upper limit
±5.0 %
±12.0 %
4.8 μL
5.3 μL
±3.0 %
±5.0 %
29.1 μL
30.9 μL
±2.0 %
±2.0 %
98.0 μL
102.0 μL
±7.5 %
±15.0 %
4.6 μL
5.4 μL
±5.5 %
±15.0 %
28.4 μL
31.7 μL
±1.0 %
±6.0 %
99.0 μL
101.0 μL
5 μL
25 μL
50 μL
TS 300
20 - 300 μL
20 μL
30 μL
150 μL
300 μL
TS 1000
40 - 1 000 μL
40 μL
100 μL
500 μL
1 000 μL
TM 50_8
1.0 - 50 μL
1 μL
5 μL
25 μL
50 μL
TM 300_8
20 - 300 μL
20 μL
30 μL
150 μL
300 μL
TM 1000_8
40 - 1 000 μL
40 μL
100 μL
500 μL
1 000 μL
When dispensing the defined errors for pipetting are exceeded.
Hint!
9.6
Further specifications
9.6.1
Barcode reader
Model
Manual barcode reader
Connection
USB
Weight
185 g
Barcodes supported
linear: Codabar, Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5,
Code 93, Code 128, UPC/EAN, EAN
addendum
2D: Data Matrix
178
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
9.6.2
9.6.3
Noise level
Noise level
typically 56 dB (A)
Optical confocal infrared sensor
Non-contact detection of liquid levels, tools
used, labware surfaces, types and quantities
of tips
Detection conditions
The liquid surface must be at 90 ± 3° in
relation to the optical beam axis.
Optical sensor
The liquid height must be at least 3 mm
9.6.4
Carrier
X-Y-Z axis positioning
9.6.5
9.6.6
9.6.7
Systematic error
±0.3 mm
Random error
±0.1 mm
Form-fit carrying capacity
1200 g
Force-fit carrying capacity
2000 g
Max. pumping quantity
35 NL/min
Vacuum range
0.1 to 85 kPa
Time which can be selected
1 sec to 35 min 59 sec
Power consumption
105 W
RPM
300 min-1 to 2 000 -1
Mixing period
1 min to 120 min
Load
max. 1 000 g
Incubation
4°C to 95°C
Gripper
Vacuum unit
Thermomixer
max. temperature difference: 15 °C below
ambient temperature
9.6.8
Thermal module
Setting range
0 to 110°C
Systematic measuring deviation at:
• 4°C
• 37°C
• 95°C
• ±2°C
• ±1°C
• ±2°C
Random measuring deviation
±1°C
Power consumption
60 W
179
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
9.6.9
180
Vac Thermo lid
Max. block temperature
110°C
Max. housing temperature
55°C
Weight
1.3 kg
Height
60 mm
Length/width
MTP format
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
10
10
Ordering Information
Ordering Information
10.1
Accessories
Hint!
10.1.1
Use only original Eppendorf accessories or accessories (labware) approved by Eppendorf AG on
the epMotion.
Automated pipetting system epMotion 5075
Order No.
(International)
Description
5075 000.750
Automated pipetting system epMotion 5075 LH with integrated PC
as 5075 000.008 plus integrated industrial PC, keyboard and mouse
5075 000.768
Automated pipetting system epMotion 5075 VAC with integrated PC
as 5075 000.016 plus integrated industrial PC, keyboard and mouse
5075 000.776
Automated pipetting system epMotion 5075 MC with integrated PC
as 5075 000.032 plus integrated industrial PC, keyboard and mouse
5075 000.784
Automated pipetting system epMotion 5075 TMX with integrated PC
as 5075 000.733 plus integrated industrial PC, keyboard and mouse
10.1.2
Dispensing Tools
Order No.
(International)
Description
5280 000.010
Single-channel dispensing tool TS 50
Volume range 1 - 50 μl
5280 000.037
Single-channel dispensing tool TS 300
Volume range 20 - 300 μl
5280 000.053
Single-channel dispensing tool TS 1 000
Volume range 40 - 1 000 μL
5280 000.215
Eight-channel-dispensing tool TM 50-8
Volume range 1 - 50 μL
5280 000.231
Eight-channel-dispensing tool TM 300-8
Volume range 20 - 300 μL
5280 000.258
Eight-channel-dispensing tool TM 1 000-8
Volume range 40 - 1 000 μL
5075 774.003
Holder for 6 dispensing tools
10.1.3
Gripper
Order No.
(International)
Description
5282 000.018
Gripper
5075 759.004
Gripper holder
10.1.4
Thermal module
Order No.
(International)
5075 757.001
Description
Tempering unit
for heating and cooling microplates and thermal racks
181
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
10.1.5
Accessories for nucleic acid purification
Order No.
(International)
Description
5075 778.009
Vac frame holder
5075 779.005
VAC lid
5075 784.009
VAC frame 1
5075 785.005
VAC frame 2
5075 793.008
Mat for vacuum lid
5075 785.030
Collection plate adapter
for handling collection microtubes in microtube racks
5075 794.004
Channeling Plate
for vacuum processing foaming solutions through multiwell plates, set of 10
5075 796.007
Vac Thermo Lid
10.1.6
epT.I.P.S. Motion pipette tips.
Order No.
(International)
182
Description
0030 014.405
0030 014.448
0030 014.480
epT.I.P.S. Motion
Eppendorf Quality, 10 racks of 96 tips
50 μL
300 μL
1 000 μL
0030 014.413
0030 014.456
0030 014.499
epT.I.P.S. Motion Filter
PCR clean, 10 racks of 96 tips
50 μL
300 μL
1 000 μL
0030 015.207
0030 015.223
0030 015.240
epT.I.P.S. Motion
Sterile, 10 racks of 96 tips
50 μL
300 μL
1 000 μL
0030 015.215
0030 015.231
0030 015.258
epT.I.P.S. Motion Filter
PCR clean and sterile, 10 racks of 96 tips
50 μL
300 μL
1 000 μL
0030 014.421
0030 014.464
0030 014.502
epT.I.P.S. Motion Reloads
Eppendorf Quality, 12 x 2 trays of 96 tips
50 μL
300 μL
1 000 μL
0030 014.430
0030 014.472
0030 014.510
epT.I.P.S. Motion Filter Reloads
PCR clean, 12 x 2 trays of 96 tips
50 μL
300 μL
1 000 μL
5075 751.399
Tip Holder
For epT.I.P.S. Motion Reloads
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
10.1.7
Reagent reservoirs
Order No.
(International)
Description
5075 754.002
Reservoir Rack
For use with 30 mL and 100 mL reagent reservoirs
0030 126.505
0030 126.513
epMotion Reservoir
PCR clean, 10 x 5 pieces in bags
30 mL
100 mL
5075 751.364
Reservoir 400 mL
10 pieces
10.1.8
Racks for individual tubes
Order No.
(International)
Description
5075 761.009
5075 775.000
5075 760.002
5075 776.006
5075 792.028
5075 792.044
5075 792.001
5075 792.060
5075 762.005
5075 792.087
5075 763.001
5075 792.109
Rack
for 24 Eppendorf Tubes, glass or plastic tubes, no temperature control
Ø 17 mm x 100 mm max. length
Ø 17 mm x 60 mm max. length
Ø 16 mm x 100 mm max. length
Ø 16 mm x 60 mm max. length
Ø 15 mm x 100 mm max. length
Ø 15 mm x 60 mm max. length
Ø 14 mm x 100 mm max. length
Ø 14 mm x 60 mm max. length
Ø 13 mm x 100 mm max. length
Ø 13 mm x 60 mm max. length
Ø 12 mm x 100 mm max. length
Ø 12 mm x 60 mm max. length
5075 792.125
Rack
for 24 HPLC tubes
Ø 12 mm x 40 mm max. length
5075 791.005
Rack
for 96x 1.5/2.0 mL screw cap tubes
5075 751.160
Thermorack TMX 24xSafeLock 0.5 mL tubes
5075 751.186
Thermorack TMX 24xSafeLock 1.5/2.0 mL tubes
10.1.9
Modular rack components
Order No.
(International)
5075 799.049
5075 799.065
5075 799.081
5075 799.103
5075 799.120
5075 799.162
5075 799.189
5075 799.146
5075 799.260
Description
RR Module TC
PCR 0.2 mL
PCR 0.5 mL
Safe Lock
Ø 12 mm
Ø 16 mm
Ø 17 mm
Ø 29 mm
Reservoir 30 mL
Reservoir 100 mL
183
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
10.1.10 Height Adapter
Order No.
(International)
Description
5075 751.003
5075 752.000
Height adapter
85 mm
55 mm
5075 755.009
Height adapter
for pipette tips
40 mm
10.1.11 Additional Accessories
Order No.
(International)
184
Description
5075 001.250
Monitor
19" TFT monitor to be used with epMotion versions with integrated PC
5075 016.001
epBlue-epMotion PC Software
Software for epMotion Version with integrated PC, preinstalled
5075 002.000
epBlue ID upgrade kit for epMotion with integrated PC
With epBlue ID installation CD-ROM, recovery DVD, barcode reader, USB hardware Key
("eLicenser") and hardware key code card for upgrading an epBlue or epBlue GxP system
5075 753.006
Waste container
5070 752.001
Worktable base adapter
To raise the epMotion worktable
4 feet
5075 751.054
Thermoadapter for Deep Well Plates, 96 wells
5075 769.000
Thermorack for 24 Safe Lock tubes
temperature control
0.5 mL
5075 771.004
Rack for 24 Safe Lock tubes
temperature control
1.5/2.0 mL
5075 772.000
Adapter
for 25 Safe Lock tubes 0.5 mL
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
10.1.12 Expansion/upgrade kits
Hint!
Order No.
(International)
All the expansions and upgrades listed here must only be carried out by service personnel who
have been specifically authorized by Eppendorf.
Description
5075 000.610
Conversion kit LH to VAC
for retrofitting an LH version into a VAC version
5075 000.628
Conversion kit LH to TMX
for retrofitting an LH version into a TMX version
5075 851.440
Software and Hardware Upgrade Set 1
Upgrade kit for epMotion 5075 with serial numbers < 1,000
5075 851.520
Upgrade kit
for retrofitting a Control Panel version into an PC version
5075 000.830
Software and Hardware Upgrade Set epBlue ID
For epMotion PC to support barcode based documentation
Incl. barcode reader with barcode reader stand
10.1.13 Accessories for real-time PCR
Order No.
(International)
Description
5075 790.009
Rack Smart
5075 795.000
Rack LC 20/100 μL
5075 751.305
Thermoadapter LC Sample
For MagNA Pure LC sample cartridge
5075 767.031
Thermorack CB
100 μL
5075 787.008
Thermoadapter
for PCR 96 wells, skirted
5075 788.004
Thermoadapter
for PCR 384 wells, skirted
5075 789.000
Thermoadapter FROSTY
5075 766.000
Thermoblock for PCR 96 wells
5075 767.007
Thermoblock for PCR 384 wells
0030 128.648
0030 128.672
twin.tec PCR Plate 96
Wells colorless
skirted, colorless, 25 pcs.
skirted, blue, 25 pcs.
0030 128.656
0030 128.664
0030 128.680
twin.tec PCR Plate 96, skirted
Wells colorless, 25 pcs.
yellow
green
red
0030 128.800
twin.tec PCR Plate 96, skirted
Wells black, 25 pcs.
yellow
185
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Order No.
(International)
Description
0030 128.508
0030 128.532
twin.tec PCR Plate 384
Wells colorless
colorless, 25 pcs.
blue, 25 pcs.
0030 128.516
0030 128.524
0030 128.540
twin.tec PCR Plate 384
Wells colorless, 25 pcs.
yellow
green
red
3881 000.015
3881 000.023
3881 000.031
PCR-Cooler
Starter Set (1 x pink, 1 x blue)
Pink
Blue
All twin.tec plates can be obtained with barcoding on request.
Hint!
186
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
11
11
11.1
Transport, storage and disposal
Transport, storage and disposal
Shut down
Hint!
If you decommission the epMotion for a prolonged period of time, observe the storage conditions
(see Ambient conditions on p. 176).
Carry out the following tasks before decommissioning the epMotion:
1. Clean the epMotion and decontaminate the components (see Cleaning on p. 173).
2. Only have the transport of the epMotion carried out by the service department of Eppendorf
AG or authorized service personnel.
11.2
Installation after transport
Abb. 1:
System connections between epMotion PC and epMotion
8
4
7
3
2
1
6
plugged
Ethernet
USB
USB
RS 232
RS 232
CAN
Control
Panel
unplugged
5
Fig. 1:
1
System connections between epMotion PC and epMotion
Control panel
2
CAN
For additional epMotion systems
3
RS 232
4
USB
5
Ethernet
6
PC power switch
8
DVI monitor connection
Connection between epMotion PC and
epMotion
7
USB
Connection for mouse and keyboard
DVI connection for PC display
187
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
11.3
Disposal
In case the product is to be disposed of, the relevant legal regulations are to be observed.
Information on the disposal of electrical and electronic devices in the European
Community:
Within the European Community, the disposal of electrical devices is regulated by national
regulations based on EU Directive 2002/96/EC pertaining to waste electrical and electronic
equipment (WEEE).
According to these regulations, any devices supplied after August 13, 2005, in the
business-to-business sphere, to which this product is assigned, may no longer be disposed of in
municipal or domestic waste. To document this, they have been marked with the following
identification:
Because disposal regulations may differ from one country to another within the EU, please
contact your supplier if necessary.
In Germany, this is mandatory from March 23, 2006. From this date, the manufacturer has to offer
a suitable method of return for all devices supplied after August 13, 2005. For all devices supplied
before August 13, 2005, the last user is responsible for the correct disposal.
188
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
12
12
Appendix A: Hardware
Appendix A: Hardware
12.1
Labware
12.1.1
Introduction
Among other features, the software contains a large number of predefined consumables (tubes,
pipette tips, plates etc.), racks, holders and tools etc. You will find all labware names arranged in
specific subdirectories by labware type. These are explained in the following sections.
This is not a comprehensive description, as the range of labware is constantly being expanded.
More information on available labware components can be found in the product description of this
operating manual as well in the Internet at www.epMotion.com. All information subject to
change.
Information about the bottom tolerance and the remaining volume can be displayed via Open
labware (Home - create/edit labware tab) in the Labware Properties section.
Abb. 1:
Product properties in "Open labware"
Fig. 1:
Product properties in "Open labware"
You can display additional product information for selected labware, such as the article name,
information about volumes, and order numbers, etc. To do so, click on Info in the file window or
mark the desired labware in Worktable mode.
Abb. 2:
Product properties in the file window (after you click on Info)
Fig. 2:
Product properties in the file window (after you click on Info)
The same information is displayed in the Labware list of the Work tab (e.g., after opening an
application) if a labware has been selected.
189
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Abb. 3:
Product information in Worktable mode
Fig. 3:
Product information in Worktable mode
12.1.2
Overview of labware
12.1.2.1 epT.I.P.S. Motion
Abb. 2:
1000 μL
Fig. 2:
Abb. 3:
300 μL
Fig. 3:
300 μL
Abb. 4:
50 μL
Fig. 4:
50 μL
1000 μL
epT.I.P.S. Motion are single-use tips and are intended exclusively for dispensing tools belonging
to the epMotion family of devices. The tips are available in three volume sizes to suit the volume
of the dispensing tools (50 μL, 300 μL and 1000 μL), in each case with or without filter.
The Tips labware folder contains the selection of epT.I.P.S pipette tips. Motion pipette tips.
Name in labware folder
Product name
tips1000
epT.I.P.S. Motion 1000 μL
tips1000f
epT.I.P.S. Motion 1000 μL, filter
tip300
epT.I.P.S. Motion 300 μL
tip300f
epT.I.P.S. Motion 300 μL, filter
tip50
epT.I.P.S. Motion 50 μL
tip50f
epT.I.P.S. Motion 50 μL, filter
Tips and racks are made of polypropylene (PP). The filter of the filter tips is made of polyethylene
(PE).
Positioning fault as a result of incorrect tip handling.
NOTICE!
 Use tips only once.
 Do not autoclave tips. If purity conditions demand it, use filter tips of the PCR clean
specification.
 Do not stack tip racks.
The coding on the tray informs the optical sensor about the volume of the tips and about whether
or not these are tips with filters. As the coding is only on one side of the tray, the correct
positioning of the rack on the worktable is important. Position the racks on the worktable so that
the labeling of the rack or tip holder and the recess on the tray are facing toward you.
190
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
The optical sensor detects any supply of tips still available within a rack, i.e. tips in racks which
have been started can continue to be used for subsequent methods. A prerequisite for this is that
the tips in the rack are in contiguous positions.
Faults as a result of tips missing from the rack.
The optical sensor detects only the initial and final position of tips in a rack. Missing tips removed
from the center of a column by hand are not detected and will lead to faults in executing the
method.
NOTICE!
 Do not remove by hand any tips within an enclosed area on the rack.
A column in a tip rack which has been started and which has been created by use of a
single-channel dispensing tool is detected by the software if you switch to a multi-channel
dispensing tool and is not used. Tips from this started column will not be picked up until a
single-channel dispensing tool is being used again later.
If you use an eight-channel dispensing tool, it will accordingly not use columns which have been
started. In the case of multi-channel mode, eight tips are always picked up simultaneously.
If the optical sensor is switched off, the tips must be placed in the rack starting with coordinate
A1. Columns must be complete.
12.1.2.5 Racks, thermoracks, thermoblock and thermoadapter
Racks are tube holders which can hold up to 24 tubes of a type. They are supplied primarily for
tubes larger than 2 mL.
Tubes with a capacity of 2 mL and below are positioned in thermoracks.
A special type is the "two-location rack". This rack can hold 96 tubes of approx. 2 mL.
Thermoracks, thermoblocks and thermoadapters can be temperature-controlled on the thermal
module.
Restrictions
Rack
The combination of a rack with a tube type occurs in the labware file window in the Equip
Racks + Modules with Tubes directory.
No transport by the gripper.
Thermorack
The combination of a rack with a tube type occurs in the Equip Racks + Modules with Tubes
directory.
Active cooling or heating on a thermal module.
Thermoracks can be transported with the gripper.
Thermoblock
The combination of a thermoblocks with a skirted, semi-skirted or unskirted PCR plate is
specified in the software. No configuration or change possible.
Active cooling or heating on a thermal module.
Joint transport of thermoblock and PCR plate by the gripper.
Thermoadapter
Thermoadapters are available for 96-well and 384-well PCR plates as well as for the Deepwell
plates 96. When supplying the worktable, you can place a plate on the thermoadapter in a similar
way to putting labware on a height adapter. In contrast to the thermoblock, the thermoadapter
and plate do not form a fixed combination. The thermoadapter and the thermoblock differ in
visual terms by their different web lengths. The thermoblock also has cutouts with which the
gripper of the epMotion 5075 can engage.
Racks and thermoracks can be combined with tubes by users with level 2 rights or administrator
rights.
191
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Racks for reagent tubes
Abb. 6:
Rack for 24 reagent tubes
Fig. 6:
Rack for 24 reagent tubes
The appropriate racks are available as tube holders for reagent tubes with diameters of 12 to
17 mm. The basic area of the racks corresponds to that of a microplate, i.e. they can be placed at
any location on the worktable. The locations on a rack are numbered from 1 to 24. The rack is
available in two different heights.
The optical sensor can use the coding of the racks to check that they are correctly aligned. The
software issues an error message if the rack is inserted the wrong way round.
Tubes and racks may not exceed a total height of approx. 126 mm. The maximum immersion
depth of the 300 μL and 500 μL tips is correspondingly less than that of the longer 1000 μL tips.
The administrator determines which tube can be used with which rack and is consequently
available as a combination in the software.
Rack LC for LightCycler capillaries
The Rack LC is a tube holder for automatically filling LightCycler capillaries. It can hold 96
capillaries with a capacity of 20 μL or 96 capillaries with a capacity of 100 μL. The bores for both
sizes of capillary are arranged in an alternating pattern.
In the software you will find the Rack LC under Plates\Tube Plates.
Abb. 7:
Rack LC 20 μL
Fig. 7:
Rack LC 20 μL
Abb. 8:
Rack LC 100 μL
Fig. 8:
Rack LC 100 μL
Using the Rack LC
1. Position the Rack LC on the worktable with its label on the front.
2. Select the labware for filling the capillaries from the Labware Tube Plates list.
3. Supply the Rack LC with only one capillary size per method run.
Rack 96 (Two Location Rack)
The rack is for the absorption of cryo tubes without lid (diameter similar to Safe-Lock tubes 1.5 or
2 mL). To be able to take 96 tubes, this special rack occupies two locations.
192
Abb. 9:
Rack 96 (Two Location Rack)
Fig. 9:
Rack 96 (Two Location Rack)
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
CAUTION!
Risk of crashing if only one location occupied by Rack 96!
 When editing the worktable for the rack 96 always occupy two Locations a rear and a front
location (e.g., A2 and B2).
 Define the same detection variant of the optical sensor for both locations.
 After the start of a method, also always make identical changes and entries for both locations
of Rack 96 in the start worktable.
Do not use any tubes with lid.
Hint!
Using Rack 96
1. Select Rack 96 in the labware folder Equip Racks + Modules with Tubes under the name
Rack96_1_5 – 2_0.
2. Proceed as for supplying the 96-well thermorack when supplying this rack with tubes with an
attached lid (Safe-Lock type tube). The position numbering of Rack 96 is rotated by 90°
compared to a 96-well plate.
3. When supplying the worktable, place Rack 96 on the pins of the two locations. In the process,
the opening in the bottom tray of Rack 96 must point towards the front.
Thermoracks and thermoracks TMX
For smaller tubes (e.g., Eppendorf Safe-Lock tube for 1.5 mL or 2 mL) a Thermorack/
Thermorack TMX which can be temperature-controlled with lid holder and 24 positions is
available. The tube lids are held vertically in the holder to the right of the tube bore.
With the aid of 24 adapter sleeves you can also insert into the Thermorack/Thermorack TMX
Safe-Lock tubes with a volume of 0.5 mL. The Thermorack/Thermorack TMX for the use with
0.5 mL tubes is also available with inserted adapter sleeves.
Damage to the device from placing the thermorack on the thermomixer!
CAUTION!
The thermorack is not suitable for application in the thermomixer. Using it in the thermomixer may
result in damage to the device and dispensing errors.
 Do not place the thermorack onto the thermomixer!
 Only use the thermorack TMX on the thermomixer.
Abb. 10:
Thermorack
Fig. 10:
Thermorack
The thermorack has a high heat capacity and retains the temperature away from the
temperature-control over a longer time period. It has a slower heat transfer as the Thermorack
TMX, i.e. it takes a bit longer to reach the desired temperature. Therefore the thermorack can
also be applied for temperature-control on the epMotion without active temperature-control.
193
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Abb. 11:
Thermorack TMX
Fig. 11:
Thermorack TMX
The Thermorack TMX is optimized for the application in the thermomixer as it is easier than the
normal thermoracks and therefore permits higher rotational speed during mixing. It has a quick
heat transfer and thus reaches the desired temperature quickly. The Thermorack TMX has a
lower heat capacity as opposed to the normal thermorack and does not retain the temperature
constant for a long time outside an active temperature-control. Therefore the Thermorack TMX is
above all suitable for the application on a epMotion with thermo unit and/or thermomixer.
Thermoblocks and Thermoracks (96 Wells)
The thermoblock shown is available for 96-well PCR plates (e.g., Eppendorf twin.tec semi-skirted
or skirted).
The thermoblock and plate then form a fixed combination in the method and can only be
transported or exchanged together.
Abb. 12:
Thermoblock/Thermorack
Fig. 12:
Thermoblock/Thermorack
Skirted 96-well PCR plates can optionally be positioned in a location on the worktable with a
96-well thermoblock, a 96-well thermoadapter or solo if the administrator has defined them as a
labware combination in the software.
Unskirted or semi-skirted 96-well PCR plates can only be positioned in a location on the
worktable in conjunction with the 96-well thermoblock or 96-well thermoadapter.
The combination of Thermoblock and other PCR plates cannot be performed by the
administrator, only by Eppendorf. Fixed combinations are predefined in the software for a variety
of plates, e.g., for twin.tec plates.
Special case Thermorack and 0.2 mL tubes
If the thermoblock is to be equipped with 0.2 mL PCR tubes then the thermoblock turns into a
thermorack in the software. The combination of a 0.2 mL tube with the thermorack does not have
to be predefined in the Labware directory at the factory, it can be effected by the administrator in
the Equip Racks + Modules with Tubes labware folder.
Risk of collision as a result of projecting tube lids!
NOTICE!
Carrier travel is optimized in the z direction. As a result, the tube lids may not point upwards. They
could otherwise be contacted by the tips which could lose liquid in the process.
 Position 0.2 mL individual tubes and 8-tube strips so that their tube lids do not obstruct the
path of travel or dispensing steps of the dispensing tool.
194
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Abb. 13:
Tube lid rotated by 45° in relation to the surface of the thermoblock
Fig. 13:
Tube lid rotated by 45° in relation to the surface of the thermoblock
Use of the thermorack with 0.2 mL tubes
1. The best arrangement for the tubes is in columns, leaving every other column free for the
tube lids. Therefore you can position maximum 48 tubes in the thermoblock (see image).
2. Specify the assignment in the transport pattern when programming the method. Supply at the
start must correspond to the pattern.
Thermoblock (384 wells)
A special 384-well thermoblock is available for PCR plates with 384 wells.
Abb. 14:
Thermoblock (384 wells)
Fig. 14:
Thermoblock (384 wells)
Regarding the use of the 384 PCR plates with thermoblock a fixed combination is available in the
software just as with the 96-well PCR plates with thermoblock.
Thermoadapter
The thermoadapter cannot be transported by the gripper. But the gripper can remove a skirted
PCR plate or a 96-well deepwell plate from the thermoadapter or place them on the empty
thermoadapter. Thermoadapters can be positioned in a location with or without a plate at the start
of the method. Active cooling or heating of a thermoadapter on a thermal module is possible even
before a plate has been put on. The thermoadapter forms a temporary combination with a plate.
The combination is the result of editing the worktable or a Transport command.
Abb. 15:
Thermoadapter DWP 96
Fig. 15:
Thermoadapter DWP 96
The combination "Thermoadapter with skirted PCR plate" can also be canceled again in the
method by a Transport command. In terms of their combination options, thermoadapters are
similar to height adapters. Note: PCR plates should always be placed on a thermal module
together with a thermoblock or thermoadapter. A semi-skirted or unskirted PCR plate can only be
used on the epMotion in combination with a thermoadapter or thermoblock. A semi-skirted or
unskirted PCR plate can only be transported by the gripper in combination with the thermoblock.
When viewed from above, PCR thermoadapters look very similar to thermoblocks. However, they
can be distinguished from one another from the side by the differing lengths of their webs.
Abb. 16:
Thermoblocks and thermoadapters
Fig. 16:
Thermoblocks and thermoadapters
Thermoblock
PCR
384
Thermoadapter
PCR 384
195
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Thermoadapter LC Sample
The Thermoadapter LC Sample is a tube holder for the automated filling of MagNa Pure LC
Sample Cartridges. The adapter and the cartridge form a fixed combination and cannot be
transported with the gripper. The adapter can be temperature controlled up to 70°C. In the
software you can find the Thermoadapter LC Sample+Cartridge under Thermoblocks with plates.
Abb. 17:
Thermoadapter LC Sample
Fig. 17:
Thermoadapter LC Sample
Cooling effect of thermoracks and thermoblocks
The PCR racks are cooled by being stored in the refrigerator (passive cooling).
Active cooling is possible using the thermal modules.
For the continued temperature curve, the following values apply as a guide.
196
Thermorack or
Thermoblock
Plate or Tubes Used
Filling Volume per
Well or Tube
Time taken to heat
from 0°C to 10°C
R 1.5 / 2 mL
1.5 mL Safe-Lock
1000 μL
~ 30 min.
PCR 96
twin.tec 96-well PCR
plate
150 μL
~ 14 min.
PCR 384
twin.tec 384-well PCR 25 μL
plate
~ 10 min.
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
12.1.2.18Reservoirs and reservoir rack
To supply liquids, reservoirs in sizes 30 mL and 100 mL are available. Up to seven reservoirs are
placed in a reservoir rack to position them on the worktable.
Abb. 19:
Reservoir rack
Fig. 19:
Reservoir rack
Abb. 21:
30 mL reservoir
Fig. 21:
30 mL reservoir
Abb. 20:
100 mL reservoir
Fig. 20:
100 mL reservoir
The reservoirs are optimized for eight-channel mode:
• The 100 mL reservoir is recommended for 1000 μL tips.
• The 30 mL reservoir is suitable for all tip sizes.
• In conjunction with the eight-channel dispensing tool, 50 μL and 300 μL tips cannot reach the
bottom of a 100 mL reservoir.
Some combinations of reservoirs in the reservoir rack are already predefined in the software. As
administrator, you can furthermore define new combinations of reservoirs and reservoir racks.
The reservoir rack cannot be placed on the thermomixer.
For larger volumes, an autoclavable reservoir with a capacity of 400 mL is available. The
remaining volume with these reservoirs is approx. 10 mL. The reservoir is made of polypropylene
(PP).
Abb. 22:
400 mL reservoir (Eppendorf)
Fig. 22:
400 mL reservoir (Eppendorf)
197
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Channeling plate and reservoir
In the context of Qiagen applications (QIAamp 96 DNA Blood and QIA_Rnsimple 96) for the
epMotion 5075 VAC, a Channeling Plate 96 is used.
This can only be used with the 400 mL reservoir of the vacuum unit. Both parts are managed by
the software as a single unit under the name EP_Res_400_PP_ChanP in the Tubs labware folder.
12.1.2.23Reservoir rack with module racks
You can insert up to seven different module racks supplied with tubes in the reservoir rack.
Tubes can be placed in the reservoir rack when they are in module racks and reservoirs with
holders which can be temperature-controlled. Uniform tubes of the same type must be used
within a module rack. The reservoir rack can be supplied in any sequence.
Abb. 24:
Supplied reservoir rack
1
2
3
4
Fig. 24:
Supplied reservoir rack
1
Reservoirs
2
Module racks
3
Locations in reservoir rack
4
Reservoir rack
You can use the following TC (temperature-controlled) module racks:
Item Designation
No.
1
198
RR Module TC Ø 29 mm
Labware name for software
Module TC 29mm
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Item Designation
No.
Labware name for software
2
RR Module TC Ø 17 mm
Module TC 17mm
3
RR Module TC Ø 100 mL
Module TC Reserv100 mL
4
RR Module TC Reservoir 30 mL
Module TC Reserv30ml
5
RR Module TC Ø 16 mm
Module TC 16mm
6
RR Module TC Ø 12 mm
Module TC 12mm
7
RR Module TC Safe Lock
Module TC Safe Lock (for 2 mL and 1.5 mL
Safe-Lock tubes) and
Module TC Safe Lock 0.5ml (for 0.5 mL
Safe-Lock tubes) (use with adapter)
8
RR Module TC PCR 0.5 mL
Module TC PCR0_5ml
9
RR Module TC PCR 0.2 mL
Module TC PCR0_2ml
Reservoir rack and module racks can be actively temperature-controlled.
The reservoir rack cannot be placed on the thermomixer.
Burns from hot surfaces.
The reservoir rack may get hot during temperature control.
CAUTION!
 Wait until the reservoir rack and the module rack have cooled down completely.
Material damage as a result of incorrect positioning of module racks.
NOTICE!
If the module racks have been put in the reservoir rack with the code facing forwards, there is a
risk of collision and faulty dispensing.
 Ensure that all module racks are inserted correctly.
Insert the module racks square in the rack with the coding facing backwards. The contact
surfaces should be clean and be parallel on the plate of the thermal module. This ensures
optimum temperature transfer.
During temperature-control, you should occupy empty positions in the reservoir rack with empty
reservoirs and lids. This will reduce temperature-control time and minimize the temperature
difference between setting and tube liquid. We recommend temperature-controlling supplied
module racks to the desired temperature in advance in order to reduce temperature-control time
still further. When temperature-controlling, take account of the fact that module racks are
temperature-controlled less well in positions 1 and 7.
If you use the 30 mL and 100 mL reservoirs with holders which can be temperature-controlled
they must be fastened by two connecting webs on each module rack.
If the reservoir rack is to be supplied exclusively with the reservoirs which can be
temperature-controlled, a maximum of six positions in the rack can be supplied.
199
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
1
Adjusting pin in the depositing
position
3
Connecting web
2
Adjusting pin (here height adjustment
50 mm)
Bores in the module racks with diameters 12, 16 and 17 mm and two pins enable tubes of five
different heights (50, 60, 70, 80, 90 mm) to be positioned. Both pins must be inserted on both
sides at the desired height, even if not all the positions are occupied by tubes. The module racks
with the diameters 17 and 29 mm occupy two positions in the reservoir rack.
Do not place the supplied reservoir rack on A locations or B0.
If you are using the reservoir rack with module racks and reservoirs in your method, you can only
use irregular patterns. Exception: the reservoir rack is occupied throughout with identically
loaded module racks or reservoirs. In this case, the pattern with automatic pattern detection and
the standard pattern (in the case of sample transfer) can also be used.
Level detection can only be switched on or off for the entire reservoir rack. If you use supplied
module racks next to one another which contain volume ranges which the optical sensor is
unable to read (e.g., PCR tubes 0.2 mL and 0.5 mL), you will have to work with volume input.
Material damage as a result of the gripper colliding with the module rack.
 Ensure that module rack and tubes do not exceed a height of 126 mm.
NOTICE!
Possible module rack supply
The following list contains possible arrangements of module racks with predefined tubes:
Rack
Tube (labware name)
Manufacturer
RR Module TC Ø 12 mm
BD_Tube_5ml_1
BD Biosciences
CHA_Tube_6_2ml
Chase
GR_Tube_5ml
Greiner
SAR_Tube_4_5ml
Sarstedt
SAR_Tube_5000
Sarstedt
BD_Tube_11ml
BD Biosciences
BD_Tube_12ml
BD Biosciences
BS_Tube_13ml
Bibby Sterilin
RR Module TC Ø 16 mm
200
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
RR Module TC Ø 17 mm
RR Module TC Ø 29 mm
Gr_Tube_11ml
Greiner
SAR_Tube_10ml
Sarstedt
SAR_Tube_11ml
Sarstedt
QSP_Tube_11_5ml
QSP
USP_Tube_10ml
USA Scientific plastic
BD_Tube_14ml
BD Biosciences
GR_Tube_14ml
Greiner
GR_Tube_15ml
Greiner
SAR_Tube_11ml_1
Sarstedt
SAR_Tube_14ml_3
Sarstedt
SAR_Tube_14ml_2
Sarstedt
SAR_Tube_14_5ml
Sarstedt
Roth_Tube_54ml
Roth
Temperature-controlling the module racks
The following values are intended as guide values for temperature-controlling module racks.
Temperature change
Temperature change
from 23°C to 4°C
from 23°C to 37°C
Tube
Set
Temperatur
temperature e-control
time
Set
Temperatur
temperature e-control
time
RR Module TC PCR 0.2 mL or
PCR Tube 0.2 mL
3°C
RR Module TC PCR 0.5 mL
PCR Tube 0.5 mL
Module Rack
3x
approx.
15 min.
38°C
approx.
8 min.
approx.
20 min.
38°C
approx.
12 min.
approx.
30 min.
38°C
approx.
17 min.
3°C
approx.
39 min.
39°C
approx.
23 min.
1°C
approx.
21 min.
39°C
approx.
15 min.
1°C
approx.
46 min.
40°C
approx.
28 min.
Safe Lock 0.5 mL
3°C
Safe Lock 1.5 mL
2°C
Safe Lock 2.0 mL
3°C
RR Module TC Ø 12 mm or
Tube Ø 12 mm
3°C
RR Module TC Ø 16 mm or
Tube Ø 16 mm
3°C
Falcon Tube 15 mL
2°C
3x
RR Module TC Safe Lock
3x
2x
RR Module TC Ø 17 mm
2x
RR Module TC Ø 29 mm
Falcon Tube 50 mL
1x
RR Module TC Reservoir 30 mL
Reservoir 30 mL
1x
RR Module TC Ø 100 mL
Reservoir 100 mL
201
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
12.1.2.25Height Adapter
In order to keep transfer times and distances as short as possible for the carrier, there are various
height adapters which can be used to compensate for plates of differing heights.
Height Adapter and plate may not exceed a total height of 126 mm. Combinations taller than
126 mm are rejected with an error message during configuration of the worktable.
For this reason, racks and reservoir holders may not be placed on height adapters.
Abb. 26:
Height Adapter
Fig. 26:
Height Adapter
The adapters are marked with the height in question. The following heights are available.
40 mm: This adapter is suitable for use with 50 μL and 300 μL tips, for example. Labware which
fits on taller height adapters can likewise be positioned here.
55 mm: This adapter is suitable for deepwell plates, 300 mL reservoirs, semi-skirted or unskirted
PCR plates in a thermoblock and for some skirted PCR plates in a thermoblock, for example.
85 mm: This adapter is suitable for almost all microplates from 6 to 384 wells as well as almost all
PCR plates with 96 or 384 wells. The Eppendorf PCR plate twin.tec (skirted, 96 or 384 wells) can
be inserted with a thermoblock at this height.
Vac Holder: this adapter is required in conjunction with the vacuum unit. The Vac Frame is
temporarily stored on the Vac Holder with the aid of the gripper. The Vac Holder is always
positioned in location C4.
Thermoadapter Frosty
The Frosty thermoadapter is a special type. It is particularly suitable for users who have used the
Eppendorf PCR Cooler during manual PCR setup and who wish to continue using this form of
cooling. To do so, the cooling unit of the PCR Cooler is placed in a modified height adapter and a
skirted PCR plate (e.g., a 96-well twin.tec PCR plate) positioned on that. Other PCR plates
cannot be used. It is not possible to supply the cooling unit with 0.2 mL PCR tubes when using in
the epMotion.
Abb. 27:
Modified height adapter and cooling unit or "Frosty Thermoadapter"
Fig. 27:
Modified height adapter and cooling unit or "Frosty Thermoadapter"
The cooling unit does not affect the overall height of height adapter and skirted PCR plate.
Note on editing the method: when editing the worktable for the Frosty Thermoadapter
(Adap_frosty), only select a skirted PCR plate for the location. The cooling unit to be used is not
named in the software.
202
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Notes on the cooling unit.
• The unit should be deep-frozen with the underside of the unit facing upwards.
• The cooling unit then displays the overshooting of a temperature of 7°C by changing color
from purple to pink or from dark blue to light blue. A key factor in cooling samples is the color
value in the depressions in the cooling unit.
• The cooling action of the cooling unit is comparable to manual use of the PCR Cooler.
12.1.2.28Plates
Files are available for the following labware:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Microplates (MTP) with different numbers of wells
Deepwell plates (DWP) with different numbers of wells
Skirted PCR plates with different numbers of wells
Filter plates
Tube plates with 96 individual tubes
Rack for microtubes in a 96-well grid
The plates described here can be positioned straight onto the surface of the worktable at a
location. The prerequisite for this is that the plates in question have been activated in the software
(see Activate or deactivate labware on p. 101).
Hint!
Abb. 29:
Microplate (MTP) with 96 wells
Fig. 29:
Microplate (MTP) with 96 wells
Abb. 31:
Deepwell plate (DWP) with 96 wells
Fig. 31:
Deepwell plate (DWP) with 96 wells
Abb. 30:
Microplate (MTP) with 24 wells
Fig. 30:
Microplate (MTP) with 24 wells
Semi-skirted or unskirted PCR plates can only be used on the epMotion in conjunction with a
thermoadapter or thermoblock.
Plates and racks must be inserted at right-angles to the base.
Hint!
In the Plates labware folder you will find a large selection of various plates. These are arranged in
specific subfolders by plate type:
203
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Tab. 1:
Plates labware folder
MTP 96
Microplates, 96 wells
MTP 384
Microplates, 384 wells
MTP 24 + DWP 24
Microplates and deepwell plates, 24 wells
MTP 6
Microplate, 6 wells
PCR 96
PCR plates, 96 wells
PCR 384
PCR plates, 384 wells
DWP 96
Deepwell plates, 96 wells
DWP 384
Deepwell plates, 384 wells
Filter Plates 96
Filter plates, 96 wells
Filter Plates 384
Filter plates, 384 wells
Tube Plates 96
Plates with up to 96 individually removable tubes
12.1.2.32Lids
Vac Lid (epMotion 5075 VAC only)
The Vac Lid (epMotion VAC sealing foil U.S. Pat. No. 6,666,978) contains 96 bores which match
the positions of the 96 wells of the filter plates. If there are unfilled wells in a filter plate, the
relevant bores of the Vac Lid can be covered with Vac Lid mats. This improves extraction of the
liquid.
Abb. 33:
Examples of covering
Fig. 33:
Examples of covering
16, 32, 48, 64 or 80 bores of the Vac Lid can optionally be covered by Vac Lid mats. The number
of bores which can be covered is embossed in the individual Vac Lid mats. The Vac Lid mats are
held in the correct position on the Vac Lid with the aid of pins.
Vac Thermo Lid (epMotion 5075 VAC only)
epMotion 5075 VAC only. The Vac Thermo Lid is for optimizing vacuum steps within automated
nucleic acid preparation methods. Using the Vac Thermo Lid the remaining alcohol in filter plates
can be minimized in a Vacuum command. This reduces the risk of alcohol contamination in
sample solutions.
To use the Vac Thermo Lid, it is necessary for there to be a thermal module on the epMotion. The
Vac Thermo Lid can only be placed on a thermal module next to the vacuum unit.
204
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
However, the Vac Thermo Lid cannot be placed on the thermomixer.
Burns from hot surfaces.
CAUTION!
 The underside of the Vac Thermo gets hot during temperature control.
 Wait until the Vac Thermo Lid has cooled down completely.
• The heating of the Vac Thermo Lids to 110°C (max. achievable temperature) takes approx.
30 min. For the expedient execution of a method it is therefore useful to bring the Vac Thermo
Lid to the desired temperature before starting the method.
Hint!
• When placing the labware on the worktable ensure that no reservoir rack with modules (only
reservoir racks with reservoirs) are in the transport path of the Vac Thermo Lids. The height of
this labware means it is not possible to travel over it.
• The maximum stack height is 126 mm.
Position the Vac Thermo Lid on a thermal module and heat it to a temperature of 110°C. The
high heat capacity of the lid stores the heat. Before the actual start of the Vacuum commands the
Vac Thermo Lid is transported by the gripper via a Transport command from the thermal module
to the vacuum unit. During a Vacuum command air is sucked inside the Vac Thermo Lid through
the 96 boreholes which heats up when flowing through the block. The heated air flows through
the filter plates and supports elimination of the remaining alcohol in the process. After exiting the
Vacuum command the Vac Thermo Lid must be positioned on the temperature control unit again
via another Transport command.
12.1.3
Abbreviations used
Each labware Name includes information about the manufacturer and labware type, e.g.,
EP_pDNA_384_MTP_1 (EP = Eppendorf, pDNA_384 = Collection Plate for PerfectPrep Plasmid
384 Kit, MTP = micro test plate). If no manufacturer abbreviation is used, it is an Eppendorf item.
In the following sections you will find explanations of the abbreviations used.
12.1.3.1 Manufacturer
Abbreviation
Manufacturer
AB
Abgene
AXYG
Axygen Scientific
ABI
Applied Biosystems
BD
BD Biosciences
BRAN
BRAND
BS
Barloworld Scientific
CO
Corning/Costar
ELK
Elkay
EP
Eppendorf AG
FALC
Falcon
GENE
Genetix
GR
Greiner
IWA
Iwaki
LAMB
One Lambda
MAT
Matrix
MI
Millipore
205
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Abbreviation
Manufacturer
MJ
MJ Research
MN
Macherey+Nagel
NUNC
Nunc/Nalgene
PACK
Packard
PALL
Pall
POR
Porex
PR
Promega
ROB
Robbins
QIA
Qiagen
SAR
Sarstedt
SCI
Scientific
TPP
TPP
USP
USA Scientific
WHAT
Whatman
12.1.3.2 Other abbreviations in labware names
12.1.4
Abbreviation
Description
DWP
Deepwell plate (DWP) with 24, 96 or 384 wells
FP
Filter plate
MTP
Micro test plate with 6, 24 ... 96, 384 wells
PCR
Plate for PCR (Polymerase Chain Reaction)
TP
Tube plate (plate with individually removable tubes)
Cleanup
Plate is included in the PCR Cleanup Kit
DNA/RNA
Plate is included in the kit for purification/isolation
TT
Eppendorf twin.tec
PCR Plate
Thermo
Fixed combination of thermoblock and PCR plate
Numbers
For example _5ml_ or _200_ = maximum filling volume (each tube or well)
in mL or μL.
Labware definitions
The following folders are present for labware and labware combinations:
Labware folder/
Contents
Description
Tips
Pipette tips
(see p. 190)
Plates
Various subfolders for plates (e.g., MTP 96,
Tube Plates)
(see p. 203)
Equip Racks + Modules Combinations of racks, thermoracks and tubes (see p. 191)and(see p
with Tubes
and Safe-Lock tubes and for supplying module . 198)
racks
206
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Labware folder/
Contents
Description
Equip Holder with Tubs For reservoirs, supplied module racks and the
+ Modules
reservoir rack
(see p. 198)and(see p
. 200)
Adapters
Height adapters and thermoadapters
(see p. 202)and(see p
. 195)
Lids
CycleLock, Vac-Lid and Vac Thermolid
(see p. 204)
Vacuum Frames
Vac Frame 1, the frame for the filter plates in
PerfectPrep test kits and Vac Frame 2 for
Qiagen filter plates
(see p. 202)
Thermoblocks with
plates
Fixed combinations of skirted PCR plates (in
(see p. 194)
which temperature-control of the thermoblock
is to be used) and semi-skirted or unskirted
PCR plates (which cannot be placed in a
location without an adapter). In these cases,
the thermoblock functions as an adapter and if
required, for temperature-control.
Tubs
Reservoirs with a capacity of 400 mL or
300 mL which can be positioned in a location
without an additional holder
(see p. 197)
For example, both reservoirs can be used in
the vacuum unit as collection vessels.
12.1.5
Compile your own labware combinations
The labware combinations are summarized in the labware file window in folders. You can activate
or deactivate labware in the folders.
You can also create your own labware combinations from the components that are available
(e.g., rack-tube combinations), or delete them using the icon or the Delete popup menu.
When editing a method, activated labware combinations as well as activated labware are
displayed in a list.
12.1.5.1 Folder for labware and labware combinations and liquids
Hint!
Beyond the preconfigured standard labware available ex works, it is also possible to dimension
individual or external labware for use with the epMotion 5075 and to incorporate it in the labware
directories of the software. For more information on this, contact Eppendorf Service.
12.1.5.2 Request labware definition
You can find more than 350 labware files for downloading at www.epMotion.com.
Hint!
If tubes or plates you require are not yet defined in the software, send the appropriate request to
the following address:
Eppendorf AG
Application Support:
Phone: +49 180 366 67 89
E-mail: [email protected]
Fax +49 538 01 556 or +49 539 901 25
207
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
12.2
Tools (dispensing tools)
Dispensing tools are piston-stroke pipettes working on the air-cushion principle. If the piston in
the dispensing tool moves up, liquid can be aspirated into the tip. Piston movements in a
downward direction dispense the liquid. The piston movement is effected by a stepper motor in
the carrier, in all 8 channels simultaneously in multi-channel tools.
Abb. 3:
Single channel dispensing tool TS 50, volume range 1-50 μL
Abb. 4:
Eight channel dispensing tool TM 50-8, volume range 1-50 μL
50
Fig. 3:
Single channel dispensing tool
TS 50, volume range 1-50 μL
Abb. 5:
Single channel dispensing tool TS 300, volume range 20-300 μL
Fig. 4:
Eight channel dispensing tool
TM 50-8, volume range 1-50 μL
Abb. 6:
Eight channel dispensing tool TM 300-8, volume range 20-300 μL
300
Fig. 5:
Single channel dispensing tool
TS 300, volume range 20-300 μL
Abb. 7:
Single channel dispensing tool TS 1000, volume range 40-1000 μL
Fig. 6:
Eight channel dispensing tool
TM 300-8, volume range 20-300 μL
Abb. 8:
Eight channel dispensing tool TM 1000-8, volume range 40-1000 μL
1000
Fig. 7:
Fig. 8:
Single channel dispensing tool
TS 1000, volume range 40-1000 μL
Eight channel dispensing tool
TM 1000-8, volume range 40-1000
μL
More information about tools can be found in the product description of this operating manual
(see Dispensing tools (tools) on p. 16).
Following the start of a method, all the subsequent steps run fully automatically.
• If required, the Optical Sensor checks the correct selection, positioning and filling level of
tubes and the supply of tips in Tip Racks.
• The correct dispensing tool is detected by the code in the tool.
• Depending on the dispensing tool, one or eight pipette tips are picked up.
• If the further procedure has been defined in the method by supply of the worktable and in the
procedure by commands, the carrier moves the dispensing tool to the source location. The
required liquid is aspirated. The carrier then moves the dispensing tool to the first destination
location.
208
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Furthermore
• Water can be pipetted from 1 μL and multidispensed from 3 μL.
Hint!
An undershooting of the recommended dispensing volumes is possible but it is your own
responsibility. Ensure that in this case the dispensing for your application is sufficient.
• Depending on the method, other destination positions are possible. The dispensing or
transport pattern is likewise specified within the command.
•
•
•
•
•
12.3
The number of samples can be entered at the start or specified with priority in the method.
The time of the pipette tip change can likewise be programmed.
Liquid can likewise be mixed in the pipette tip before aspiration and after dispensing.
Optimum dispensing parameters are achieved by selecting a liquid type in the commands.
If other commands in a method require different dispensing tools, the change in dispensing
tool which will have to be performed by the user is shown in the display in the started method.
Thermal module
The temperature of thermal modules can be set in the software from 0 °C to 110 °C.
Tab. 1:
Duration of cooling and heating of different components with the aid of the thermal
module
Filling
Cooling
volume
from 25 °C to
with water/ 4 °C
well
at a
temperature
setting to
Thermal module
without labware
With a thermoadapter
with a 96-well skirted
twin.tec PCR plate on it
Minute
s
Heating
from 25 °C to
37 °C
Minute
s
at a
temperature
setting to
5
Heating
from 25 °C to
95 °C
Minute
s
at a
temperature
setting to
2
8
50 μL
3°C
7
38°C
5
104°C
11
With a thermoblock
50 μL
with a 96-well skirted
twin.tec PCR plate on it
3°C
6
37°C
4
101°C
10
With a thermoadapter
with a 384-well skirted
twin.tec PCR plate on it
10 μL
3°C
5
37°C
5
103°C
8
With a thermoblock
10 μL
with a 384-well skirted
twin.tec PCR plate on it
3°C
5
37°C
5
98°C
7
With 24 well
350 μL
thermorack with 0.5 mL
Safe-Lock tubes
3°C
24
37°C
16
101°C
35
With 24 well
1200 μL
thermorack with 1.5 mL
Safe-Lock tubes
3°C
30
38°C
18
104°C
44
With 24 well
1700 μL
thermorack with 2.0 mL
Safe-Lock tubes
3°C
25
37°C
17
100°C
40
209
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
The statements made here apply to an ambient temperature of approx. 25 °C and to the edge
positions of the labware in question. The thermal modules were temperature-controlled to the
relevant target temperature before the labware was put on.
12.4
Optical sensor
12.4.1
Function
The optical sensor (U.S. Pat. No. 6,819,437) is used, among other things, for detecting the filling
level of tubes. If you are working in a method with defined and constant volumes and you specify
these when editing the method, filling level detection can be dispensed with. On MTPs with 384
wells and 0.2 and 0.5 mL tubes, it is not possible to measure liquid. Liquid measurement is not
recommended for MTPs with 96 wells.
Principle
Detector
Diaphragm
Diaphragm
Light source
Semi-transparent
mirror
Z
Imaging optics
Z0
The reflection of light is detected by a receiver with the aid of a lateral light source, a
semi-transparent mirror, a lens and motion in the z direction in the desired position; the software
then evaluates the maximum. The reflections of light provide information about surfaces and
liquid level. Detection operations can be performed using the reflections of light.
Use the Functions tab to define a default setting for the optical sensor:
• Liquid detection (detection of liquid surfaces) (see p. 212)
• Tips (tip detection) (see p. 213)
• Locations (detection of location occupation) (see p. 215)
Abb. 1:
Default setting of the optical sensor via the Functions tab
Fig. 1:
Default setting of the optical sensor via the Functions tab
Double-click on the labware on the worktable to show the detection variants. In Worktable mode
you can switch scanning of liquid surfaces on or off for any marked labware:
210
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
To switch scanning on or off for a specific run for all locations, activate the corresponding option
immediately after starting the method.
If the filling volumes of the tubes are easy to detect in the method to be started, you can reduce
processing time by switching off the optical sensor and entering volume manually. If destination
tubes are empty, it is quicker to enter a volume "0" than to scan with the optical sensor. Filling
volumes which are known should be defined when you edit the method.
If the optical sensor is switched off, a display for entering filling volume is automatically faded in
as the method continues.
Detection is possible up to a labware height of 126 mm.
Hint!
211
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
12.4.2
Detection version 1: detecting liquid surfaces
Level Detection applies generally for Liquid Detection in all labware. You switch Level Detection
on or off when you start a method.
If Levels is activated, the surface of the liquid is scanned in the case of labware for which Liquid
Detection is set to All positions. If Levels deactivated, there is no detection of liquid surfaces (liquid
detection).
Liquid Detection relates to the labware. Liquid Detection switches the optical sensor for detecting
the surfaces of liquids on or off. When detecting the surface of a liquid, the optical sensor can
only detect approximately horizontal (plane) surfaces. The surface must be at 90° ± 3° in
relation to the optical beam axis. If the curvature of the surface is too extreme as a result of the
physical properties of the liquid, tube or tube geometry, the optical sensor can no longer detect
the liquid level. In this case, the user must enter the volume.
It is not possible to detect filling levels in 384-well plates; it is recommended to only a limited
extent for 96-well plates to minimize the time required. Where Number of Samples 10, only Off
and All Positions are displayed for selection.
12.4.2.1 Liquid Detection selection options
Off
If you set the optical sensor to Off, 24 individual volumes can already be defined for a 24-tube
rack when editing, for example:
212
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
If you start with the volume entry in the first row, the volume will be adopted for all positions
automatically. To do this, mark the Volume column and then click in another field. One correction
per row is then possible.
For locations in which the optical sensor is switched off, the required volume is automatically
displayed upon starting. The volume is displayed if the volume has been specified in the
Worktable. Volumes can be corrected at this point. Empty destination locations are not
automatically displayed to allow the volume to be checked and entered at the start of the method.
If a volume is to be displayed automatically for destination labware at the start, enter a volume not
equal to "0" when editing. If you are using the Rack 96 (two-location rack), you must make
identical entries to the worktable for the two occupied locations.
Random Access
Random access allows scanning for the first and last position plus 8 other random positions.
Random access is recommended when tubes or wells have very similar filling levels within a
location and the scanning procedure time is to be reduced.
Random access performs liquid detection only in positions which are defined via Number of
Samples and Pattern. In the case of random access, the smallest volume determined is always
used for all tubes or wells of a location for aspirating or dispensing the liquid. If there is a number
of samples of 10 or less when the method is started, all the tubes affected are scanned by the
optical sensor.
Notes: If filling levels differ significantly in one location, check whether the Aspirate from bottom
and Dispense from top options are better alternatives to Random Access.
All positions
If automatic detection is required, Liquid Detection must be marked with All Positions.
If all wells are scanned in a 96-well plate or 24-tube rack, each volume is administered separately
when a single-channel dispensing tool is used.
In the case of eight-channel dispensing tools and a 96-well plate, the following applies: observe
the largest volume within a column (8 wells) when dispensing liquid. Observe the smallest
volume within a column (8 wells) when aspirating liquid.
12.4.2.2 Optical sensor check run
If the optical sensor is unable to perform location detection successfully, you have the option of
bypassing detection and entering the volume manually. To do so, mark User input. Check first
whether the correct labware is positioned in the location. The method may not be continued if
there is incorrect labware in the location.
213
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
12.4.2.3 Switch Level Detection on and off
If Level Detection is switched on and if variants for scanning the surface of the liquid are selected
in the method for these locations, scanning is effected in the start routine.
If Liquid Detection for labware or Level Detection are switched off, all the volumes required are
queried at the start.
If you would like to specify the volume, exceed the specified minimum volume after the start.
Make sure that you do not exceed the maximum volume. Once you have completed your input,
press Enter. The entry should match the actual filling level of tube.
The specified volume does not take account of the way the shape of the meniscus of the liquid
varies in the different tubes, for example. An inadequate volume could therefore lead to faulty
dispensing.
At the start, it is possible to make an individual volume entry or volume correction for each tube in
racks and reservoirs. With 96-well and 384-well plates, the one volume input applies to all wells.
12.4.3
Detection variant 2: Tip detection
Both the identity of the tip racks (volume range; with/without filter) in the locations and the
presence of tips in the rack are detected. A code on the sides of the tip rack enables the tip type
and supply quantity to be detected. If more tips are required for the method than are present,
these extra tips are requested in the method once the existing tips have been exhausted. If tip
detection is switched off, you will have to ensure that the tip rack is adequately supplied starting
from the back left (coordinate A1) and that the specifications of the worktable corresponds to the
method to be started.
12.4.4
Detection variant 3: Location detection
A code in the corresponding racks enables correct occupation of a worktable location to be
detected. Even racks positioned the wrong way round are detected, with the exception of
reservoir racks. Plates are detected by height.
214
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
12.4.5
Detection limits
Depending on tube geometry, there are different detection limits for the optical sensor when
detecting filling level (liquid detection). Information about the detection limits can be displayed if
you click on Info in the file window. So that aspiration can be performed from tubes with filling
levels below the detection limit of the optical sensor, a volume must be entered at the start of the
method. This entry can be made in the start routine using the keyboard, even after the relevant
error message from the optical sensor. The detection limit of the optical sensor generally starts at
filling levels above 3 mm.
215
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
13
13
13.1
Appendix B: Software
Appendix B: Software
Commands, parameters, options
This section includes detailed information about commands and parameters. This information is
supplemented by the descriptions in the section entitled "Operation".
The parameters and options of the commands are described in detail in the section entitled
"Sample Transfer". Parameters and options of individual commands which deviate from Sample
transfer are described separately.
13.1.1
Number of Samples
Use the Number of Samples command to specify how many samples are to be processed in the
subsequent steps of the procedure. It applies to all commands until the next Number of
Samples of the procedure. If you do not enter this command, a question is asked about the
number of samples when the device starts up. This entry then applies to all the commands of the
method.
The maximum number for Number of Samples results, dependent on the command, from the
plate or rack type in the destination or source tube location. For example, the largest value for two
384-well plates is 768.
Further restrictions on the maximum number result from the pattern and the number of tubes per
rack or wells per plate. For example, the sum of the aspiration locations in the source tube
location during Sample Transfer can be smaller than the sum of the dispensing locations in the
destination tube location.
Depending on the type and purpose of the subsequent commands Number of Samples has
different effects:
• Sample Transfer: number of samples picked up by the source tube plate.
• Reagent Transfer: number of wells of the destination tube plate into which the reagent is
dispensed.
• Dilute: number of samples to be diluted.
• Pool and Pool One Destination: number of wells in the source tube plate from which liquid is
aspirated.
• Mix: number of wells in the plate in which the liquid is mixed.
13.1.1.1 Define parameters
• Fix Number of Samples:
Activate this option if a fixed number of samples is to be defined for each method start. At the
start, there is no Number of Samples request.
Deactivate this option if the number of samples at the start of the method is to be entered by
the user.
216
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
• Max Number of Samples:
At the start of the method, the number entered here is accepted as the maximum input value.
When the pattern is displayed, Max number of Samples is taken into account.
• Comment is displayed at the start of the method and the Number of Samples request. The
comment can provide information about which entries are meaningful here or to which
commands the entry relates (e.g., maximum number of samples, to single-channel or
eight-channel dispensing tool and Reagent or Sample Transfer).
Fix Number of Samples and Max Number of Samples both apply until the next Number of Samples
command in the procedure.
The Number of Samples request is asked first at the start. If Number of Samples is contained
several times in a procedure, the request occurs in succession as many times as required
(exception Fix Number of Samples).
If part of a procedure in the method is not to be executed, enter "0" as a value.
13.1.1.2 Information about entering Number of Samples
• Eight-Channel Dispensing Tools
Example for Number of Samples entries with an eight-channel dispensing tool:
An entry of "1" to "8" means that 8 "samples" will be processed. An entry of "9" means that 16
"samples" will be processed etc. This applies correspondingly to a 384 plate. Note that with a
384-well plate, only every other well in a column will be served by the eight-channel
dispensing tool. Further procedure depends on the pattern.
• Sample Transfer
Example: a 96-well plate is to be filled by two full 24-position racks. For every rack the method
contains a Sample Transfer command in which a rack has been defined as source tube. The
Number of Samples command has been entered once. In order to transfer 24 samples to
the plate from both the racks, enter the value "24". A total of 48 transfers is thus effected. An
entry of 10 would mean that in each rack, the tool aspirates from 10 locations. The maximum
number for Number of Samples is 24.
If both racks are to be processed consecutively, a Sample Transfer command with both racks
as source tube is defined in the method. An entry of 30 would then mean that the Sample
Transfer would be carried out in full in the first rack (24 transfers) and six times in the second
rack. The maximum number for Number of Samples is 48.
In order for the different execution options to be detected at the start, enter a comment on the
Number of Samples when editing the method.
• Reagent Transfer
The entry of the Number of Samples for the Reagent Transfer relates to the destination tube.
• Dilute
Number of Samples before the Dilute command defines the numbers of samples to be
diluted. The dilution steps are defined in the pattern. Dilution steps are possible only within a
location; they are limited by a row or column. In other words, with a 96-well plate, all the wells
of one row can be filled with diluent and 12 dilution steps could be performed. In this case, the
undiluted sample would be aspirated from another location in the first step.
• Pattern
Examples for limiting the Number of Samples by the pattern in a Sample Transfer: If only
every second sample is aspirated from a 96 well plate (source tube), the maximum input is:
48 (96 : 2 = 48).
If one sample is aspirated from a 96 well plate (source tube) and dispensed twice into another
96 well plate (destination tube), then the maximum Number of Samples is 48.
Reason: Sample Transfer applies here from one source tube to one destination tube; here 48
x 2 = 96 applies. If, however, a second 96 well plate was available in the command as
destination tube, the 96 samples could be transferred either continuously (first plate A
complete, then plate B) or alternating (plate A, plate B, plate A, etc.). Whether the transfer is
continuous or alternating is defined in the pattern of the method.
217
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
13.1.2
Sample Transfer
The command transfers samples from several locations of a source tube plate to several
locations of a destination tube plate in accordance with the defined patterns.
Abb. 1:
Diagram of Sample Transfer
Fig. 1:
Diagram of Sample Transfer
The number of samples picked up from the source tube plate depends on the preceding
command Number of Samples.
The Sample Transfer command automatically carries out an ID tracking (transfer of IDs to the
destination tube labware) when the source tube labware is provided with IDs.
Barcode
13.1.2.2 Define parameters
Pipet.Tool
Filter Tips:
Volume
Transfer type
Select Dispensing Tool The name "TS" (tool, single channel) stands for single-channel
dispensing tools while "TM" (tool, multi channel) stands for eight-channel dispensing tools. The
selection depends on the tubes used as well as on volume. Eight-channel dispensing tools
cannot be used with 24-tube racks, for example. When selecting the dispensing tool, be aware of
immersion depth into the tubes.
Define whether tips with filters are used in the method.
Enter the volume and select μL or nL. With volumes of up to 99.9 μL a decimal place is available.
Pipette: Aspiration and dispensing of the volume entered.
Multidispense: Dispensing of the volume entered at every dispensing step. Number of steps and
quantities aspirated depend on the Number of Samples.
Hint!
With small volumes, pipetting always provides better free-jet capability as well as precision and
correctness. When pipetting, in contrast to multidispense, only the required volume is aspirated
and dispensed. However, please note that multidispense represents a very rapid type of
dispensing. With the multidispense option, a 96-well plate can be filled in 35 to 60 seconds.
However, with multidispensing the measurement errors identified for pipetting are
exceeded(see Dispensing Tools on p. 177).
218
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Source and
Destination:
A selection is only possible if the worktable is already equipped with labware. When you press
the Source or Destination button, displays with corresponding selection lists are available. The
selection is made using the labware positioned on the worktable. Up to four locations can be
selected as source or destination tubes within a command.
After selecting the source and destination tubes the respective labware names are displayed.
You can also dispense within a plate, in which case the source tube and destination tube are
identical.
If the source tube or destination tube labware is deleted from the worktable, the labware name is
shown in gray in the parameter configuration. The source tube or destination tube labware has to
be defined afresh or an error message is issued when starting the method.
Pattern:
Define pattern. You can define Pattern using automatic pattern detection, simple standard
pattern (Sample Transfer only) or free pattern (irregular). The patterns are independent of
direction. Regular patterns are detected by the software after just a few entries and completed
without further entries.
If the labware is changed after the pattern has been entered, the appropriate warning appears
when new labware is selected. If the same tube type (e.g., MTP 96) is retained, the pattern can
be adopted.
If no destination tube is defined in the pattern in default pattern or in pattern with automatic
sample detection, the software automatically completes the pattern in the direction of the rows
(from left to right).
13.1.2.3 Pattern with several plates as source or destination tubes
If several plates are available as source tubes and/or destination tubes, the display pattern is
expanded as follows:
Begin entering the pattern with the top labware. The labware is displayed here in the order of the
source or destination tube definition. The source tube is shown on the left, the destination tube
on the right.
If the same sample or liquid is to be transferred to specific wells of all plates following the same
pattern, an entry for all plates in the Source or Destination display is only required for the first
transfer. During the second transfer only an entry in the very first labware of the source or
destination is required.
219
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
13.1.2.4 Example pattern for several plates
Hint!
Detailed descriptions on pattern can be found in the chapter "Operation" (see Editing the pattern
for a Transfer command on p. 78).
Objective
One sample is to be transferred from a 24-tube rack in each case eight times to four 96-well
plates. The pattern for one plate is also to apply to the other plates.
This example describes only the steps relevant to a pattern. It is assumed that the worktable has
been supplied and commands and parameters have been specified.
1. Define the 24 well rack as source tube.
2. Define the 96 well plates as destination tube.
3. Define the pattern. To do so, define an aspiration location of the source tube.
4. Define the dispensing locations of the destination tube.
220
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
5. Click on the first well in the second plate.
The entire column will be adopted in accordance with plate 1. Continue analog with additional
destination tubes.
6. Complete the pattern. Subsequently the pattern for the destination tube only has to be
entered for the first plate. The pattern is transferred to all additional destination plates.
13.1.2.5 Options
You can make further settings via Options.
Immersion depth and dispensing height
Aspirate from
bottom
This version is especially recommended for smaller tubes. It is not necessary to scan MTP and
PCR plates if the required volume is much smaller than the existing one.
At start only enter a volume for the plate which approximately corresponds to the actual volume
and allows for any aspirations and additions which may be required. The volume entered does
not affect the position of the pipette tip with Aspirate from bottom or Dispense from top. To prevent
the tubes overflowing during aspiration, the filling level of tubes must not exceed the working
volume. With Aspirate from bottom, the tip is positioned approx. 1 mm above the bottom of the
tube. The distance from the bottom of the tube depends on the tolerances of the tube type and
can be modified by the administrator. After liquid has been aspirated, the tip is moved slowly out
of the tube.
221
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Aspirate from bottom is not recommended for tubes > 3 mL with high filling levels. In the case of
viscous solutions, the outer wetting which results may increase the risk of contamination and
falsify the dispensing result.
With very large tubes (e.g., Falcon or Reservoir) and high filling levels, it is even possible for the
entire tip and the cone of the dispensing tool to become wet. You should always avoid high filling
levels.
With large tubes, the length of the 50 μL and 300 μL tips and the dispensing tool result in
restrictions on immersion depth, leading to a higher remaining volume compared to the 1000 μL
tip.
Dispense from top
Elution from filter
Dispense from top is a fast version for dispensing a liquid into a destination tube, because the z
movement up to approx. 3 to 4 mm above the liquid prior to dispensing is omitted. Liquid is
dispensed in the top area of the tube. The tubes may not be filled above maximum filling volume.
Dispense from top can also be used for pipetting and on smaller tubes or plates with different
filling levels. As the tip remains in the top area of the tube and does not move down into the tube,
the risk of contamination is virtually ruled out. The greater distance from the liquid may impair
target accuracy at minimal dispensing volumes. With a small volume and tubes > 5 mL, the tip
might not reach the bottom of the tube or the liquid provided. There is a risk of the liquid touching
the tube wall above the liquid provided. With larger volumes, liquid could well splash up. Certain
dispensing speeds may not be exceeded for acceptable dispensing. Dispense from top should be
validated by corresponding trials.
This function is especially suited to the aspiration of liquids from corresponding filter plates
(currently only PCR cleanup filter plates). The following special features apply to this option:
• Do not enter a volume for Sample Transfer.
• The piston movement in the dispensing tool for aspirating liquid starts as soon as the tip
starts moving down in the well. Maximum stroke is used on every dispensing tool. This also
applies to dispensing.
• The tip travels gently into the resilient filter material.
• In combination with the test PCR cleanup a Mix before aspirating is recommended.
• The Elution from filter function relates to the source tube.
With the elution function, virtually complete aspiration of the liquid from the filter plate is
achieved.
• In the Sample Transfer command under Transfer Type select pipette.
• The aspired liquid is dispensed into the destination tube.
When transporting the liquid, the usual appearance of the liquid in the pipette tip does not apply.
There may be air bubbles at several points in the pipette tip. The air segment at the bottom end of
the pipette tip may not be clearly pronounced.
222
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
At different volumes you save time if the optical sensor is not used to determine liquid level.
However, selecting Aspirate from bottom and Dispense from top ensures that liquids are dispensed
and professionally dispensed. You are still asked at the start to enter a volume for a plate with 96
wells (exception: destination plates which had a volume "0" when the worktable was edited). The
intention is to select an average volume for all wells with Aspirate from bottom or Dispense from
top.
13.1.2.6 Changing pipette tips (Change Tips)
Under Options you can determine the time when tips are changed.
The following is displayed:
Change tips ...
• ... when command is finished
The tips are not ejected until the command is finished. This is recommended in the case of
repeated aspiration of a particular reagent for filling all the wells of a plate, for example.
• ... before asp. for next destination, well
Tip change before aspirating from a new location. If many different liquids are aspirated from
a plate or rack, the new liquids must not come into contact with old remaining liquid in the tip.
Tip change is therefore advisable.
• ... before each aspiration
No tip is filled twice, Even if it is the same source tube for the aspiration. Should always be
used for Mix after dispensing to prevent contamination of the source with liquid traces from
mixing in a destination tube.
• ... keep tips, do not change tips
The tips continue to be used in the next command. If the next command is likewise defined
keep tips, do not change tips, use also continues to the command after next and so on
(sensible if a nutrient medium is to be distributed on many empty plates, for example).
Particularly with liquid which tends to foam, failing to change tips after multiple aspirations can
lead to extra volume in the tip. This extra volume may cause contamination of the dispensing
tool. If transfer type pipette is changed to multidispense, after the first command an ejection
occurs even if keep tips, do not change tips is selected.
• ... after: aspirations In the input field you can set the number of strokes after which the tips
should be ejected. This function is available if ... keep tips, do not change tips has been
selected.
Special features of multidispense:
With multidispense, a slight extra volume needs to be aspirated.
223
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
• ... before asp. for next destination, well:
– Extra volume is returned into the old source tube
– Change tip
– Liquid aspiration from new source tube
• ... before each aspiration:
– Extra volume is discarded into the waste
– Change tip
– Liquid aspiration from new or old source tube
13.1.2.7 Mix
Mix before aspiration or after dispensing
If Mix before aspirating and/or Mix after dispensing is selected, a display for setting mixing
parameters appears when you click on the adjacent button.
If Fixed height is not selected, the following applies:
• The settings for immersion depth, blow-out (to remove remaining liquid), delay time to start
blow-out etc. are automatically taken from the selected liquid type.
• If Aspirate from bottom has been selected, this immersion depth also applies to Mix before
aspirating.
• If Dispense from top has been selected, the volume known at the start is used for mixing in
conjunction with the Liquid type immersion depth for Mix after dispensing.
Unlike with all other forms of dispensing (free flow) in dispensing with mixing there is contact with
the liquid in the destination tube. Particular note should be taken of this when setting tip change.
Mixing volume is always less than the current filling volume in the tube, as the remaining volume
of the aspiration cannot be used for mixing. The remaining volume for the correspondingly
marked tube may be viewed in the Labware properties section via the Open a labware window, for
example. In the case of very large tubes (e.g., 15 mL Falcon) larger remaining volumes result
with the 50μL and 300 μL tips in combination with the geometry of the dispensing tool than with
the 1000 μL tips.
In the case of deviations from the predefined liquid type, determine the optimum mixing speed in
trials. Carefully increase mixing speed during these trials. Use very high speeds only for
correspondingly viscous solutions. At very high speeds, large volumes and multiple mixing
cycles, liquid may get into the dispensing tool (e.g., foam formation). The use of filter tips will
increase reliability.
The complete mixing process takes place in the liquid. When the liquid is aspirated and
dispensed, the dispensing tool is moved on accordingly in the z direction. Blow-out is performed
at the end above the liquid. A mixing cycle consists of an upward and a downward movement.
The Mix after dispensing mixing variant can only be used in conjunction with the Pipette dispensing
variant.
224
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
More information on mixing is provided separately (see Transport on p. 238).
Hint!
13.1.2.8 Liquid types
If liquids whose physical properties of viscosity, vapor pressure and surface tension differ
significantly from those of water are to be dispensed, we recommend selecting a different liquid
type. The predefined liquid types are arranged to work at a consistent immersion depth for
aspiration. During aspiration, the dispensing tool moves on to suit aspiration speed, tube
geometry and aspiration volume.
Check every selected liquid type and every parameter change in conjunction with other
commands by test-running the method. The predefined liquid types represent recommendations.
Adapt the settings to your requirements as necessary.
~ 6 - 8 mm
~ 3 - 4 mm
A Dispense
B Drawing-up Following Aspiration
Dispensing is effected approx. 3 to 4 mm
above the liquid. During dispensing, the
tool moves up so that the gap is
maintained. Exception: liquid type
"ProteinC" at 5 mm
Before the liquid is transported, the liquid
is drawn up in the pipette tip so that the
bottom part of the tip contains air during
the transport operation.
The following liquid types are available:
Liquid Type
Dispensing data
optimized for
50 μL tip:
pipetting
from
Alcohol 75%
Mixture of 75% ethanol 1 to 3 μL
and 25% water
50 μL tip:
dispensing
from
Remarks
3 μL
Washing reagent in kits for nucleic acid
purification. See applications in ep-Folder
Nucleic acid prep.
Speed Aspiration: low to medium
Speed Dispense: low to high
Alcohol 98%
Alcohol 98%
1 μL
3 μL
A new tip is prewetted with the liquid for
aspirating.
Speed Dispense: low
Only for multidispense using 300 μL filter tips:
very small gap from filter with 300 μL
aspiration. To avoid filter being wetted, in this
case default to pipetting from 280 μL.
Glycerol
Mixture of 40% glycerin 1 μL
and 60% water
5 μL
Glycerin content in many enzyme solutions is
much less than this, so Water can also be
used as the liquid type here.
Speed Aspiration: medium
Speed Dispense: medium to high; ZN
300-8:low
225
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Liquid Type
Dispensing data
optimized for
50 μL tip:
pipetting
from
Protein
Water with 1% albumin 5 μL
(10 g/l), 0.01% Triton
X-100
50 μL tip:
dispensing
from
Remarks
5 μL
When using a new tip, prewet it with the liquid
to be aspirated before the first dispensing
operation. Attention! Curvature of the liquid
surface will impair free-jet capability when
dispensing into cell culture plates. See
Proteinc.
Speed Aspiration: low to medium
Speed Dispense: low to medium
ProteinC
As for Protein
As for Protein
As for Protein
Proteinc uses when dispensing higher
distance to the calculated plain liquid surface
(4 to 5 mm) than Protein. All other data such
as Protein. Recommended for nutrient media.
Speed Aspiration: low to medium
Speed Dispense: low to medium
Rinse
For demineralized
1 μL
water and water with a
low surfactant content;
use the mix option or
independent MIX
command
3 μL
Like the Water liquid type but with a
significantly delayed blowout. Recommended,
e.g., in combination with mix to reduce the
residual moisture in the tip, but it can also
increase the contamination risk regarding
smaller containers (e.g., wells in PCR plate).
Speed Aspiration: medium
Speed Dispense: medium
Speed_xl
Demineralized water;
mixed by means of
high dispensing speed
1 μL
3 μL
Thorough mixing in a 96-well DWP, for
example, with a 750 μl sample and 750 μl
dispense.
Caution! Higher risk of contamination,
especially with small tubes because of high
dispensing speed!
Speed Aspiration: medium
Speed Dispense: medium to high
Speed_xs
Water
Demineralized water;
very low aspiration
speed to avoid raising
sediment
1 μL
Demineralized water
1 μL
3 μL
E.g., for slow aspiration from filter plates.
Speed Aspiration: very low
Speed Dispense: medium
3 μL
Technical data relating to systematic and
random measuring deviation was determined
using this liquid type. Recommended for most
methods.
Speed Aspiration: medium
Speed Dispense: medium
226
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Change parameters of the liquid type
The first time the display is called up, the standard parameters specified in the software for the
previously-selected liquid type, the previously-entered volume and the previously selected
dispensing type are displayed. This is indicated by default in the top right of the display. In the
event of changes, the display changes from default to changed. The liquid type can be reset to the
default parameters at any time with the Set Default button.
The variation of Movement Blow, Speed Blow and Delay Blow serves to optimize the dispensing of
remaining liquid.
227
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Tab. 1:
Liquid Type Parameter
Parameter
Input range
Remarks
Speed Aspiration
0.2 to 110 mm/sec
In the case of viscous solutions and relatively large aspiration
volumes, Speed aspiration should be increased only moderately
so that the delayed aspiration of liquid can be completed before
the z movement of the carrier. Low values are meaningful for
phase separations, for example, or to avoid raising sediments or
particles.
Speed Dispense
0.2 to 110 mm/sec
Especially when dispensing relatively large volumes into an
empty tube, the risk of liquid splashing back can be reduced by
lower Speed Dispense values. At higher values, be aware of the
increased risk of contamination from the liquid splashing out.
Higher values are meaningful, for example, when dispensing into
a relatively large tube to achieve more thorough mixing.
Delay Blow
0 to 99990 msec
With liquids which have higher wetting properties and
consequently delayed draining characteristics, we recommend
increasing Delay Blow. The time can be set to zero for liquids
which do not wet very much. Increasing Delay blow means that
the method takes longer.
Speed Blow
0.2 to 110 mm/sec
The term Blow is used to describe the blow-out like with a
manual pipette. At lower values for Speed Blow, bubbles may form
at the outlet opening of the pipette tip in liquids with low surface
tension.
Movement Blow
0 to 100%
Extent of piston stroke in the blow-out step. This is slightly
different depending on dispensing tool. Speed Blow and Movement
Blow can be varied with the objective of reducing the splashback
of the liquid to be dispensed or the liquid already in the tube.
Initial Stroke
0 to 100%
Extent of piston when blowing out air after completed absorption
of liquid.
With changes of Initial Stroke the tips are changed automatically
due to technical reasons.
Prewetting
0 to 9 cycles
Prewetting is carried out only with a new unused tip in order to
create the same conditions for the first and for subsequent
dispensing steps. It is recommended for liquids with a low vapor
pressure to enrich the air space in the dispensing tool with
evaporated liquid to a comparable extent in all cases. It is also
recommended for liquids with reduced surface tension and
consequently delayed draining properties so as to achieve
comparable prewetting of the tip with solution for all dispensing
steps. Prewetting (1 cycle) it preset with the liquid types Alcohol
98%, Protein and ProteinC.
If the optimal setting of Initial Stroke is changed, it may lead to cross contamination.
Hint!
Hint!
Changes in the liquid types are carried out at one's own responsibility and can possibly lead to a
deterioration of the technical data.
Please check the setting regarding the dispensing accuracy for each application.
The speed of liquid aspiration, liquid dispensing, drawing up and blow-out are optimized for the
liquid in question in each liquid type in order to achieve low-contamination dispensing up to the
working volume of the tubes.
228
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
With critical liquids, start checking with demineralized water. If this is successful, repeat the test
with the liquid actually envisaged.
The following must be confirmed in the check:
• Adequate precision and correctness are still achieved.
• No liquid splashes out (probability of contamination remains unchanged at low).
Abb. 9:
Aspirate, dispense and blow
upper end position
basic position
end of blow-out
Fig. 9:
Aspirate, dispense and blow
A Aspirate
To aspirate a sample, the piston moves
upwards from the default position.
B Dispense
Multidispense: return to default position
by means of short individual steps.
Pipette: total path in one step.
C Blow
Remaining liquid is discarded by means
of blow-out.
13.1.3
Reagent Transfer
A reagent is transferred from a source tube labware location to several destination tube labware
locations. Reagent Transfer is best suited to transferring a reagent to several plates.
Abb. 1:
Reagent transfer principle
Fig. 1:
Reagent transfer principle
In Reagent Transfer the entry for Number of Samples relates to the destination tube.
All other entries and selection options are comparable to those of Sample Transfer.
In Reagent Transfer several source tube locations with liquid might be present.
Hint!
ID tracking does not take place with the Reagent Transfer command. If the source tube labware
is provided with IDs, these IDs are only recorded in the logfile.
Barcode
229
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
13.1.3.2 Special case: use of several sources
For Reagent Transfer you can define methods in which more than one tube is defined as source
tube. The software can access the next tube automatically after the first tube has been emptied,
to fill the destination plate for example. You no longer have to fill the first tube completely.
If the optical sensor is switched on, the first source tube is scanned. If, during this process, the
software detects that there is too little liquid for the number of samples, the Checkrun window
appears. The minimum volume, maximum volume and calculated volume are displayed. You can
now select how the optical sensor is to proceed (continue, abort, etc.).
To incorporate the next tube in the calculation, select accept level and continue. The optical sensor
continues by scanning the next tubes. The volumes determined are totaled and the method
started when the volume is adequate.
The optical sensor also detects empty tubes that have been defined as source tubes in the
pattern. The message appears with a Calculated volume of 0 μL. Confirm with Accept level and
continue to scan the subsequent tubes.
If the level detection is switched off, a request for entering the volume appears for the source tube
locations of the pattern. The total volume required is assigned only to the first tube in the entry
list. For all other source tube locations the left-hand column contains "1". The "1" serves as a
reminder to assign the individual volumes to the tubes.
13.1.4
Dilute
Dilute facilitates the creation of dilution series. A defined volume is transported from well to well
by means of pipetting. Before the Dilute command diluent (diluent reagent) must be dispensed
using a Reagent Transfers. The Reagent Transfer command fills the wells with the diluent
required. Dilute can be executed using a source plate (undiluted samples) and a destination plate
(dilution steps).
Abb. 1:
Dilute command principle (destination tube plate)
Undiluted Sample
Fig. 1:
Diluent
Diluent
Diluent
1. Dilution
2. Dilution
3. Dilution
Dilute command principle (destination tube plate)
The Number of Samples command before Dilute defines the numbers of samples to be diluted.
The dilution steps are defined in the pattern and only possible within one location. They are
limited by a row or a column.
If the Dilute command is executed within a single plate, the source and destination tube areas on
the plate must not overlap. This can be achieved by limiting the number of samples with the
Number of Samples command.
230
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
The Dilute command automatically tracks the IDs (transfer of IDs to the destination tube
labware) when the Dilute command is executed over different source tube and destination tube
labware and the source tube labware is provided with IDs.
Barcode
Hint!
To achieve thorough mixing of sample and diluent, under Mix you should use Mix after dispensing.
Mixing is performed after every dispensing step. Mix before aspirating refers only to mixing before
the first aspiration, i.e. mixing the undiluted sample. All other entries and selection options are
comparable to those of Sample Transfer.
13.1.4.2 Example dilution series
This example explains the principle of a dilution series. This is not a concrete application.
Sequence and objective of a dilution series
• 24 samples are in a rack with 24 containers and are to be diluted 1:1000.
• Dilution takes place in 3 stages with 1:10 dilutions in each case.
To achieve this, the 24 samples are transferred to a 96-well plate.
Diluent is transferred from a 300 mL reservoir to the 96-well plate.
Work is performed first with a single-channel dispensing tool and then later, to speed up the
process, with an eight-channel dispensing tool.
Method
First samples and then diluent should be transferred to the 96-well MTP. The dilutions are
performed in the MTP 96.
In the Sample Transfer command 200 μL of sample are respectively put in the micro test plate.
231
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
The pattern for the 24 samples in the destination tube looks as follows:
In the Reagent Transfer command the empty wells of the micro test plate are filled with 225 μL of
diluent. From this point on, an eight-channel dispensing tool executes the task.
The pattern of the destination tube looks as follows:
In the Dilute command 25 μL of sample (A-1) is aspirated and mixed with the 225 μL of diluent
(e.g., A-2). This is performed three consecutive times (A-3 and A-4). These three dilutions (1:10)
lead to a 1:1000 dilution (MTP columns 4, 8 and 12).
Calling up Show Process in the Dilute command must show the following pattern for Dilute:
232
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Each dilution step in this example is a 1:10 dilution. The desired dilution of 1:1000 is achieved by
the third 1:10 dilution. The volume which is aspirated from the undiluted sample also applies to
the dilution steps.
13.1.5
Pool
With the Pool command you combine liquids from several wells as well as different source tube
locations.
Because with multiaspirate following each sample aspiration a drawing-up of the liquid in the tip
occurs, the aspirated liquid segments are in the beginning separated by air bubbles. With a filled
tip the content is dispensed into the destination tube. Which locations of the source are pooled for
one location each of the destination tube is defined in the pattern.
13.1.5.1 Define pattern
The pattern for the Pool command differs slightly from the pattern for other transfer commands.
The following steps briefly describe the special features of the Pool command.
1. In the parameter window of the command click on the Pattern button.
2. In the pattern window click on the source locations from which the liquid is to be pooled in the
desired order.
3. In the destination tube plate click on the location where the pooled liquid is to be dispensed.
4. In the source click on the next sequence of locations from where the liquid is to be pooled.
5. In the destination click on the next location where the pooled liquid is to be dispensed.
6. As soon as the pattern is identified, confirm with the OK key.
233
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
13.1.5.2 Options
Change Tips
Change tips ...
• .... before asp. for next destination, well ...
Is the default setting. Tips are only changed when the next pool has been assembled for the
next destination location.
All other entries and selection options are comparable to those of Sample Transfer.
13.1.5.3 Enter Number of Samples for Pool
The entry of the Number of Samples relates to the source tube. The number of samples divided
by "Number of Samples per Destination" gives the number of destination locations. If a decimal
place results from the division, the number is rounded up for destination locations. The pattern in
the source is also executed completely for the last destination location. In the Pool pattern, a
maximum of the samples occurring in a row or column can be pooled.
Example: the samples of each column of a 96-well plate are to be pooled in a destination plate.
In other words, 8 samples are always put into a tube.
• Number of Samples entry at start: 48
48 : 8 = 6
6 destination tubes are filled.
• Number of Samples entry at start: 50
50 : 8 = 6.25
7 destination tubes are filled.
The command is executed in the source up to location 56 inclusive (prerequisite: no limit in
the Number of Samples command).
13.1.6
Pool One destination
With the PoolOneDest command you dispense the liquids from several source tube locations into
one destination tube location.
The Number of Samples entry determines the number of locations in which aspiration will be
performed. There is only one location as destination tube.
With the multiaspirate transfer type, the liquid is drawn up in the tip following every dispensing
step. The same criteria apply here as to the Pool command.
234
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
13.1.6.1 Define pattern
The pattern for the Pool One Destination command differs slightly from the pattern for other
transfer commands. The following steps briefly describe the special features for the Pool One
Destination command. In the pattern the locations are defined for the source tube where
aspiration is to take place and the direction of the aspiration steps. Next the destination tube is
only selected once.
1. In the parameter window of the command click on the Pattern button.
2. In the pattern window click on the first and the second source tube location to define the
direction for pooling the liquid.
3. In the destination tube plate click on the location where the pooled liquid is to be dispensed.
4. As soon as the pattern is identified, confirm with the OK key.
13.1.6.2 Options
Change Tips
Change tips ...
• ... when command is finished
Is the default setting. The tips are not ejected until the command is finished.
All other settings are comparable with Sample Transfer.
235
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
13.1.7
Mix
Use this command to mix liquids within a location.
The complete mixing process takes place in the liquid. When the liquid is aspirated and
dispensed, the dispensing tool is moved on accordingly in the z direction. A mixing cycle consists
of an upward and a downward movement. The travel results from the selected volume.
Use only 50 μL tips for mixing in 384-well plates!
Hint!
The descriptions of the mixing process for Sample Transfer (see Mix on p. 224) also apply to this
stand-alone Mix command.
13.1.7.1 Recommended mixing speeds (Speed)
Enter the mixing speed in the Speed window. The speed range is between 0.2 and 110 mm/sec.
As long as there is no entry in the input field for Speed, this field always displays the aspiration
speed of the selected liquid type. The speeds in the Liquid Type parameters are optimized for
pipetting or multidispensing in combination with the selected dispensing tool and the selected
volume.
Dispensing tool
Recommended
lower volume range
(mm/sec)
Recommended
medium volume
range
Recommended high
volume range
(mm/sec)
(mm/sec)
TS 50
15 - 88
15 - 44
10 - 40
TM 50-8
15 - 88
15 - 44
10 - 40
TS 300
5 - 15
6 - 16
6 - 16
TM 300-8
2 - 11
2 - 11
2 - 11
TS 1000
4 - 15
4 -15
4 - 15
TM 1000-8
4 - 15
4 -15
4 - 15
The optimum mixing speed should be determined in trials. Increase mixing speed carefully during
these trials. Use very high speeds only for correspondingly viscous solutions.
Hint!
236
At very high speeds, large volumes and multiple mixing cycles, liquid may get into the dispensing
tool (e.g., foam formation). In this case, perform method run tests using demineralized water. The
use of filter tips will increase reliability.
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
13.1.7.2 Mixing volume
The mixing volume must always be less than the current filling volume in the tube, as the
remaining volume of the aspiration cannot be used for mixing.
You can have the remaining volume displayed in the Labware properties. In the case of very large
tubes (e.g., 15 mL) larger remaining volumes result with the 50 μL and 300 μL tips in combination
with the geometry of the dispensing tool than with the 1000 μL tips.
13.1.7.3 Mixing functions at Fixed Height
With Fixed Height a mixing process with a defined aspirating height and dispensing height can be
determined.
Hint!
Fixed Height should only be used for filling levels below the filling volume. At larger filling volumes,
depending on the immersion depth selected, liquid may be forced out of the tube or well.
Enter the distance from the bottom of the tube in mm as the height.
Asp. stands for the distance of the pipette tip to the bottom of the tube when aspirating, Disp.
stands for the distance of the pipette tip to the bottom of the tube when dispensing.
If you enter 0 mm in the Asp. field a correction of approx. ca. 2 mm upwards occurs after the
execution. The correction depends on tube type and the tolerances of the tube type.
If you choose for Disp. a height which lies above the tube the dispensing is reduced automatically
to the height of the tube.
If you select a height for Disp., which is below that of Asp., Disp. is raised to a height of Asp. on
execution.
237
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
13.1.8
Transport
This command uses the gripper to transport labware from one location to another or to the
vacuum unit (epMotion 5075 VAC).
In the parameter settings for the transport command, you select from lists the labware to be
transported and the destination location.
The Vac Frame can be transported with a filter plate on it. Tips, racks, thermoadapters and height
adapters cannot be transported. Semi-skirted and unskirted PCR plates can only be transported
in the form of a thermoblock.
If the gripper is being used, location B0 may only be occupied by a
• 300 mL or 400 mL reservoir,
• CycleLock or
• Height Adapter
.
13.1.9
Temperature (only epMotion 5075 with thermal module)
The Temperature command is used to specify the temperature of a thermal module. The
command can only be used on an epMotion equipped with thermal modules. If several thermal
modules are available on the epMotion, you will have to make the appropriate selection. For
temperature-control you can select a temperature between 0°C and 110°C. The current
temperature of the thermal modules is displayed in the Functions tab.
1. From the Location list select the thermal module for which you want to set the temperature.
2. Then mark Temperature On.
238
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
If Temperature On is deactivated, the thermal module is not temperature controlled or a
previously temperature-controlled thermal module is switched off.
If Hold Temperature is activated, the thermal module is also temperature-controlled outside a
method. This function can also be used for pre-heating a thermal module for a subsequent
method. You can switch off a thermal module being heated beyond a method with Hold
Temperature by executing a temperature command with Temperature On.
Temperature-control is switched off after shutdown.
13.1.10 Thermomixer (only epMotion 5075 with thermomixer)
With the Thermomixer command you can specify the mixing parameters and the temperature of
the thermomixer. The command can only be used on an epMotion equipped with thermal
modules. For mixing you can set a maximum rotational speed of 2000 rpm and a temperature of
4°C to 95°C can be set for temperature-control.
Hint!
Hint!
The lowest temperature reached by the thermomixer depends on the ambient temperature and
can be a maximum 15°C below room temperature. With a room temperature of, for example
20°C, the lowest temperature reached by the thermomixer are 5°C.
Not the liquid level in your tube in relation to the desired rotational speed in order to avoid cross
contamination and splashing of liquids. Do not mix with high rotational speed in combination with
high liquid level.
1. For some mixing tasks, optimized Templates are available which you can select from the list if
necessary. This selection is optional. You can change the Templates as you wish and also use
Save to create your own templates which then also are available for selection in the list. In the
labware file window under TMX you can delete your own templates or deselect them in order
to hide them in the list (see Deleting a labware combination on p. 60).
2. Activate the Speed on function if you want to mix. Then you can enter the rotational speed
(Speed) and the time (Time). You can enter a rotational speed between 300-2000 rpm and a
time between 30 s and 120 min.
3. Activate the Temperature on function if you want to temperature-control the thermomixer. Then
you can enter a Temperature between 4°C and 95°C.
If you want that the temperature is maintained during the method, activate the keep temperature
after method run function. This function can also be used for preheating the thermomixers for a
subsequent method. If the thermomixer is heated with keep temperature after method run beyond
a method, you can switch it off by executing a thermomixer command with the function
Temperature On disabled.
Temperature-control is switched off after shutdown.
239
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
13.1.11 Vacuum (only epMotion 5075 VAC)
This command can only be executed on the epMotion VAC.
Use the Vacuum command to set the vacuum in the vacuum unit. To enable you to define the
parameters for the Vacuum command in full, a Vac Frame and a Vac Lid must have been defined
for the worktable.
The required vacuum (maximum 850 mbar/85 kPa) is set using Vacuum Pressure. You can select
between the units of pressure mbar and kPa.
The Vacuum Time can be up to 99 minutes and 59 seconds.
To transport the Vac Lid at the beginning of the command through the gripper from the location
T0 to the filter plate in the vacuum unit activate Use Vacuum Lid . After the Vacuum time, at a
residual vacuum of 100 mbar or 10 kPa, the Vac Lid is taken off again by the gripper and taken to
location T0.
Check Levels causes the scanning of all wells of a filter plate to detect any remaining volume. In
this case, apply a vacuum again if required. With plates, Check levels can take a relatively long
time.
ID tracking does not take place with the Vacuum command. You can however transfer IDs to the
filter plate using the previous Sample Transfer command (see p. 218).
Barcode
240
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
13.1.12 Wait
Use the Wait command to insert a pause in the method, e.g., to take account of
temperature-control periods between two additions of reagent.
The duration of the pause is specified in the parameter settings.
The following applies only to epMotion systems with thermal modules:
If Wait for Temperature is selected, a selection list appears from which the relevant thermal
module (TEMP1 to TEMP3) can be selected. In addition, the following command is executed only
once the specified temperature for the thermal module has been reached. The Wait Time only
starts after the preset temperature has been reached on the defined thermal module.
13.1.13 Comment
Use the Comment command to display a comment at a certain point during execution of the
method.
The comment command entered is shown marked as a command line during the method run, no
separate window is displayed.
241
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
13.1.14 User intervention
Use this command to interrupt a method, for example to perform manual steps.
If there is to be an alarm immediately before the manual intervention, mark the Alarm field.
Enter a corresponding comment on the intervention in the Comment field.
For methods with external steps which lead to a change in volume, divide these into 2 methods.
The following things must not happen at all with User Intervention:
•
•
•
•
Change in position of carrier.
Exchange of dispensing tools in locations T1 – T4.
Positioning of labware which is not known to the method.
Labware which is removed and then replaced may not be changed externally in terms of
volume.
• Distance from labware required in the method. The waste container can be emptied in
conjunction with this command. Then position the waste container correctly again.
13.2
Importing commands from a CSV file
When working with biological material (e.g., protein solutions, nucleic acid solutions), it may be
necessary to transfer defined quantities of different samples from various parent solutions to a
target container in order to adjust the concentration (thus creating standards). The quantities of
sample material that must be transferred can be determined by physical measurements (e.g., by
using spectroscopic methods, enzymatic analysis, or chemical methods), and the resulting
quantities can then be listed in a table.
Using the menu function Edit - Import from CSV you can import a table in CSV format defining the
volumes of sample material to be transferred from locations of a source tube to selected locations
of a destination tube.
The imported table is converted into a sequence of Sample Transfer commands. With every
imported Sample Transfer command the liquid of a specific source location is transferred to a
specific destination location. The automatic pattern detection is not active for this command.
You can create and edit tables in CSV format using an editor or a spreadsheet. By importing a
procedure from a file you can reuse the same sequence of commands in different methods by
simply importing the sequence again from the same source file.
At the top of the CSV file allocate names and barcode ID lists to the labware if required. From
line 7 you can allocate the IDs to the individual steps and save them.
Barcode
242
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
13.2.1
Creating a CSV file for import
A CSV file is an ASCII text file defining the structure and content of a table. Each line of text in the
CSV file describes a row in the table. The content of the cells in each table row are separated by
commas, semicolons or tab keys. You can create and edit a CSV with any simple ASCII text
editor (e.g., Windows Notepad) or a spreadsheet (e.g., Microsoft Excel). The format of the CSV
file has changed compared to epBlue Version 10.x.
Hint!
If you use Microsoft Excel to create or edit a CSV file for import, make sure that the default
separator for lists is not identical to the decimal point. I.e. in the Regional Settings for "English" in
the Windows Control Panel the default separator for lists is a comma, so you cannot use the
comma as a decimal point. Save your edited table in CSV format before exiting Excel (you do not
need to save it also as an Excel file).
To create a CSV file make sure that the following prerequisites are met.
1. If you create your table in a spreadsheet and then export it to the CSV format make sure that
the original spreadsheet file only contains one sheet, because only one sheet with table data
can be exported to a CSV file.
2. Every Transfer command must be defined in a separate line. The values must always be
sorted as follows: The first line contains Rack, Source Barcode, Source List Name, Destination
Barcode and Destination Name. The names can also be abbreviated and also apply to plates.
Rack 1-4 must be specified. In row 7 you enter Barcode-ID, Rack (Source rack), Source
(Source location), Rack (Destination rack), Destination (Destination location), Volume (Transfer
volume in μL), Tool (dispensing tool) and Name (Sample name). The values in every line must
be separated by commas, semicolons or tab keys. For decimal figures the decimal point or
comma can be used. Make sure that the separator for lists is not identical to the decimal
point. If you do not use barcodes the respective columns can be left without a value.
Hint!
Even if you do not use barcodes the 1st and 7th row must be completed as described above.
Each row must contain exactly 7 separators even if optional columns (e.g., barcode ID, name)
are to remain empty.
To illustrate the required file structure the first table rows of a CSV file are shown in the
example below the way they appear in the spreadsheet:
In comparison the same CSV file is shown here as it appears in an ASCII text editor:
243
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
3. The values in the 6 rows of the CSV file must start in the second line of the file and then
continue uninterrupted. No further entries must be made under these values because these
would be interpreted as a command during import and cause errors.
4. If a line starts with “#”, it is interpreted as comment and not imported.
5. A maximum of 500 Transfer commands can be imported from a CSV file into a method.
6. The number of racks specified in the CSV file as source and definition locations must match
the number of racks defined in the first Sample Transfer command added manually to the
method prior to importing the file . A maximum of 4 source locations and 4 destination
locations can be used on the worktable. The exact source and destination locations on each
plate can be entered as figures (1, 2, 3, etc.) or as alphanumerical coordinates on the plate
(A1, B5, A3, etc.)
7. The tool numbers in the CSV file must match the dispensing tools as follows:
• 1 - TS_50
• 2 - TS_300
• 3 - TS_1000
TM dispensing tools cannot be used. It is recommended to avoid frequent dispensing tool
changes within a method.
13.2.2
Importing a CSV file
Proceed as follows to import a sequence of Sample Transfer commands from a CSV file.
Make sure that the CSV file meets the requirements for import .
Hint!
1. As a first step always add a Number of Samples command in a new procedure (see Adding a
command to the program on p. 74).
2. In the parameter area of the Number of Samples command, enable the "Fix number of
samples" option and set the number of samples to 1.
The number of samples is now limited for the following steps, so that every Sample Transfer
command that follows is only executed once (i.e. for one sample).
244
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
3. As a second step add a Sample Transfer command in the procedure (see Adding a command
to the program on p. 74).
The first Sample Transfer command and its source and destination locations on the worktable
serve as master configuration for the complete sequence of the commands imported from the
CSV file. Only the source and destination locations defined manually in this first Sample
Transfer command will be available during the sequence of the imported command.
4. Define the source and destination locations for the Sample Transfer command (see Define
the source tube (Source) and destination tube (Destination) for a transfer on p. 77).
The following example shows a Sample Transfer command with 2 source locations and 2
destination locations. These locations are available for the imported command sequence.
The number of racks specified in the CSV file as source and destination locations must match
the number of racks defined with the first Sample Transfer command. A maximum of 4 source
locations and 4 destination locations can be defined. The rack locations are then used in the
order in which they appear in the parameter area of the first Sample Transfer command. I.e. if
source rack 2 is specified in the file, the second rack in the list of source locations is used as
source rack for the step.
5. In the Options and Mix tabs in the parameter area of the Sample Transfer command define the
options and mixing configurations you want to use for the sequence of the imported
commands.
The options and mixing configurations manually defined for the first Sample Transfer
command are copied and used for all imported commands. The "Elution from filter" option is
not available for imported commands.
245
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
6. Check the parameter settings for the first Sample Transfer command and ensure that they
meet the requirements for the complete sequence of commands.
Please pay particular attention to the mixing volume and the mixing speeds, because these
settings must be suitable for all imported commands. The preset value for the mixing speed
must be overwritten manually with a different value. If you want to use different dispensing
tools (including TS_300), a mixing speed of 11 mm/sec is recommended.
7. To import the command sequence from the file click on the Sample Transfer command in the
program list to make sure it has been selected.
8. In the main menu select Edit - Import from CSV.
9. Select the CSV file you want to import and click on Open.
The CSV file is imported. Every line defined in the CSV file is added to the procedure as a
Sample Transfer command with the settings defined in the file for source, destination, volume
and tool. The imported command sequence is displayed in the program list.
A maximum of 500 Transfer commands can be imported from a CSV file into a method.
246
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
13.3
Importing and exporting labware combinations
13.3.1
Importing labware combinations
1. In the start menu under File select the item Import Labware.
The following window opens:
2. Add the labware to be imported to the list via Add and the following folder selection. Use
Remove to delete individual files. Click on Clear to delete all files simultaneously.
3. Click on Import.
The following window opens:
4. The labware (e.g., holder with the complete, added labware) is displayed in a list. Deselect
any labware not required or already present, if necessary.
5. Define the import rules. The following are available:
• Keep existing: Keeps the existing file with the same name.
• Overwrite older: Older files are overwritten.
6. Click on Import.
The labware files are imported to eBlue. An import summary appears in a window.
7. Click on Finish to complete the process.
247
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
13.3.2
Export labware combinations
1. In the start menu under File, select the Export Labware item.
The following window opens:
2. Select the Labware Type and the category of the labware to be exported.
3. Select the file to be exported from the list on the right.
4. Click on Export or click on Clear to reset the window to its original state.
5. Select a target folder and click on OK.
6. The labware (e.g., holder with the complete, added labware) is displayed in a list. Deselect
any labware not required or already present, if necessary.
7. Click on Export.
The labware files are exported to the destination folder. The import summary appears in a
window.
8. Click on Finish to complete the process.
13.4
Predefined methods
The User ep contains four subfolders with several applications for you to copy to your user
directory where you can edit or start them.
Mehods contained in ep cannot be started or edited there directly.
This section provides you with an overview of the available applications and a short description.
More detailed information on the applications in the list below and for additional applications can
be found under "Applications" at www.epmotion.com.
Hint!
248
To better understand the descriptions you should display the contents of a method. Select the
method and the information is displayed on the right-hand side of the screen.
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
13.4.1
Nucleic acid prep
QIA RNeasy 96
RNA isolation with the help of a Qiagen kit.
QIAamp 96 DNA Blood
DNA isolation in blood samples with the help of a Qiagen kit.
Promega_mag_96
Method for the automated DNA extraction with the "Promega Wizard Magnetic 96
DNA Plant System".
13.4.2
PCR setup
Modular rack A
13.4.3
Method for filling a PCR plate with 8 different DNA samples and 12 different primer
pairs from a full reservoir rack.
Routine
10 ml tubes to plate
Uses a 16 mm rack with 10 mL tubes (tubes with conical bottom and screw cap) to fill
four rows of a 96er twin.tec PCR plate in turn.
384 to 4x96
Sample transfer of a 384 well plate to four 96 well plates. Design with eight channel
dispensing tool.
4x24 to 96
Sample transfer of four thermoracks to a 96 well PCR plate.
4x96 to 384
Sample transfer of four 96well plates to one 384 well plate.
96 to 4x24
Sample transfer of a 96 well plate to four thermoracks. Design with single channel
dispensing tool.
Admirable results
Filling of two Deepwell plates 2.2 mL with 1000 μL per well. Sampling from four
100 mL reservoirs.
Dilute 1to10 – 1to1000
Executing a diluting series using the Dilute command. By way of reagent transfer
diluent is transfered to a 96 well plate. By way of sample transfer samples are then
transfered from a 24 well rack into the still empty columns of the plate in front of the
already dispensed diluent.
The transfered undiluted sample is then diluted in three stages (Dilute command).
Disperse from 1 to 2
Using Sample Transfer a transfer is made from a 96 well plate to two 96 well PCR
plates.
An eight channel dispensing tool is used. Each sample is dispensed with the same tip
to two different plates.
The tip is changed prior to sampling a new sample.
Fill 24
Simple fast method for filling a 24 well thermorack with 1000 μL liquid pro Safe Lock
tube. Sampling from a 30 mL reservoir.
Fill 384
Simple fast filling of a 384 well twin.tec PCR plate with 20 μL water per well using the
dispensing tool TM 50-8.
Dispensing is carried out as multi-dispensing. Sampling from a 30 mL reservoir. The
method is recommended for checking the dispensing precision.
It is highly recommended to also dispense and evaluate using the dispensing version
"pipette".
Fill 96
Simple fast filling of a 96 well twin.tec PCR plate with 100 μL water per well using the
dispensing tool TM 300-8.
Dispensing is carried out as multi-dispensing. Sampling from a 30 mL reservoir. The
method is recommended for checking the dispensing precision.
It is highly recommended to also dispense and evaluate using the dispensing version
"pipette".
249
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
LI384_1
Method fills a 384 well plate with different solutions in a "checkered" pattern using a
single channel dispensing tool.
The method and in particular the pattern shown can thus be used as the basis for
independent contamination checks
Modification of volume, plate, liquid type etc. is recommended for the actual task.
LI384_8
Similar to LI384_1 but using an eight channel dispensing tool.
The checkered pattern results from the fact that the eight channel dispensing tool can
only fill every second well of a 384 well plate. The method and in particular the pattern
shown can thus also be used as the basis for independent contamination checks
Modification of volume, plate, liquid type etc. is recommended for the actual task.
Modular rack B
Filling of two 24 well platds with 1,800 μL liquid A and 2,000 2.000 μL liquid B from a
reservoir rack equipped with modular rackes with 50 mL and 15 mL tubes.
Pattern1
Filling every second column of a 96 well plate using the dispensing tool TM 300-8.
Filling the columns using a reagent transfer.
Reagent sampling from a 30 mL reservoir.
Pool
Using the Pool command 4 adjacent wells in a column of a 96 well plate are combined
("aspirate") and transfered into a Safe Lock tube in a thermorack.
PoolOneDestination
Collecting the content of a 96 well plate in a 300 mL reservoir.
Stack
Example for stacking plates in a method with greater throughput.
13.4.4
Sequencing setup
ABI 384
For preparation of the mastermixe see method properties. The method can be
executed with every epMotion
The method dispenses mastermix and templates in a 384well twin.tec PCR plate.
ABI 96
For preparation of the mastermixe see method properties. The method can be
executed with every epMotion
The method dispenses mastermix and templates in a 96well twin.tec PCR plate.
250
Amersham 384
The method dispenses mastermix and template to max. 384 locations of a twin.tec
PCR plate.
Amersham 96
The method dispenses mastermix and template to max. 96 locations of a twin.tec
PCR plate.
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
14
14
14.1
Appendix C: BIOS password
Appendix C: BIOS password
Changing the BIOS password
To prevent unauthorized access to the BIOS setup a password can be set up:
1. Switch on the PC.
2. As soon as the BIOS starts press "F2" to open the setup.
3. Use the cursor to go to "security".
4. Use the cursor to go to "set supervisor password" and press Enter.
The password field opens.
5. Enter and confirm a password.
6. Press F10 to save and exit the BIOS setup.
251
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Accessories for nucleic acid purification
Item number .............................................................182
Dispensing Tools...................................................... 173
Gripper ..................................................................... 174
Thermoadapter, thermoblock, thermorack ............... 174
Thermomixer............................................................ 174
Vac Lid ..................................................................... 174
Vacuum unit ............................................................. 174
Work surface adapter............................................... 173
Worktable................................................................. 173
Activate labware.............................................................101
Client connection ........................................................... 118
Adapters
Labware folder/.........................................................207
Thermoadapter Frosty..............................................202
Command check.............................................................. 82
Add a command to a method...........................................74
Command parameters ............................................... 76, 82
Admin tab.......................................................................117
Command reference list................................................... 82
Administrator login .........................................................117
Commands
Comment ................................................................. 241
Dilute........................................................................ 230
Mix ........................................................................... 236
Number of Samples ................................................. 216
Pool.......................................................................... 233
Pool One destination................................................ 234
Reagent Transfer ..................................................... 229
Sample Transfer....................................................... 218
Temperature............................................................. 238
Thermomixer............................................................ 239
Transport.................................................................. 238
User intervention...................................................... 242
Vacuum .................................................................... 240
Wait.......................................................................... 241
Index
Index
A
Accessories
Item number .............................................................181
Application files................................................................49
Application properties ......................................................55
Application Support........................................................207
Aspirate from bottom......................................................221
Aspiration volume ............................................................27
Autoclaving
CycleLock................................................................175
Dispensing Tools .....................................................174
Vac Lid ....................................................................175
Vacuum unit ............................................................175
Gripper .....................................................................174
Thermoadapter, thermoblock, thermorack ...............175
Automated pipetting system
Item number .............................................................181
B
Barcode ID lists................................................................48
Export.........................................................................48
Import.........................................................................48
Remove ......................................................................49
Command overview......................................................... 73
Comment ....................................................................... 241
Comment command ....................................................... 89
Connect client................................................................ 118
Control method run.......................................................... 96
Control tab ....................................................................... 96
Copying applications ....................................................... 54
Barcode reader
Cleaning ...................................................................174
Create user account ...................................................... 121
before aspiration for next destination, well.....................223
CycleLock
Autoclaving ............................................................. 175
before each aspiration ...................................................223
Bottom tolerance............................................................102
C
252
Command icons............................................................... 73
Creating a user account ................................................ 122
D
Deactivate labware ....................................................... 101
Carrier
Technical data ..........................................................179
Debug log ........................................................................ 96
Change tips....................................................................223
Decontamination............................................................ 175
Change liquid type .........................................................225
Changing the user password .........................................124
Define module rack................................................ 104, 198
Item number............................................................. 183
Channeling plate ............................................................198
Defining the procedure .................................................... 72
Check commands ............................................................82
Delete application ............................................................ 55
Check levels...................................................................240
Deleting user accounts .................................................. 123
Check the method............................................................82
Destination....................................................................... 77
Cleaning
Barcode reader ........................................................174
Detection versions ......................................................... 212
Debug log for method run................................................ 96
Device list ...................................................................... 119
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Dilute..............................................................................230
Dilute command ..............................................................85
Dispense from top..........................................................222
Dispensing error ............................................................140
Dispensing tool
Sealing ring replacement .........................................172
Dispensing Tools......................................................16, 208
Autoclaving...............................................................174
Cleaning ...................................................................173
Item number .............................................................181
Technical data ..........................................................177
G
Gripper........................................................................... 113
Autoclaving .............................................................. 174
Cleaning................................................................... 174
Item number............................................................. 181
Labware ..................................................................... 39
Tasks.......................................................................... 17
Technical data.......................................................... 179
Group overview ............................................................. 125
H
Disposal .........................................................................188
Height Adapter............................................................... 202
Item number............................................................. 184
Dosing device ................................................................116
History ............................................................................ 10
Duplicate application........................................................63
Home tab ........................................................................ 46
Duplicate command .........................................................75
DWP...................................................................................8
E
Edit command..................................................................76
I
Import application ............................................................ 56
Import commands (CSV) ................................................. 82
Edit labware ...............................................................59, 71
Intended Use
Warnings.................................................................... 30
Edit pattern ......................................................................78
Irregular pattern ............................................................... 81
Edit procedure .................................................................72
Edit worktable ..................................................................66
Editing user accounts ....................................................121
Elution from filter ............................................................222
epT.I.P.S. Motion ............................................................190
Item number .............................................................182
Equip Holder with Tubs + Modules
Labware folder/.........................................................207
Equip Racks + Modules with Tubes
Labware folder/.........................................................206
Error messages
Dispensing error.......................................................140
Optical sensor read error .........................................140
Example method ...........................................................128
Export application ............................................................58
F
K
keep tips, do not change tips ......................................... 223
L
Labware
definition .................................................................. 207
Folder....................................................................... 207
Labware ..................................................................... 38
Labware bottom tolerance ............................................. 102
Labware combinations
Export ...................................................................... 248
Import....................................................................... 247
Labware editing ............................................................... 59
Labware files ................................................................... 50
Labware on the Worktable............................................... 66
Labware positioning......................................................... 67
Labware properties.......................................................... 71
Fault finding ...................................................................139
Labware tab ..................................................................... 99
Features...........................................................................13
File window ......................................................................49
Lids
Labware folder/ ........................................................ 207
Fill rack ..........................................................................104
Liquid Detection ....................................................... 21, 214
Fill reservoir rack ...........................................................107
Liquid options ................................................................ 225
Filled module rack..................................................107, 107
Liquid Type ...................................................................... 84
Filling volume ...................................................................25
Firmware Update ...........................................................116
Liquid types
Parameter ................................................................ 228
Fix Number of Samples .................................................216
List of commands ............................................................ 82
Fluid displacement...........................................................25
Loading the worktable ..................................................... 66
Folder properties..............................................................55
Log off ............................................................................. 43
Functions tab .................................................................110
Logfiles ...................................................................... 64, 98
Logging in as administrator ........................................... 117
253
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Login ...............................................................................42
Logs tab ...........................................................................98
M
Maintenance
Dispensing tool sealing ring .....................................172
Dispensing Tools ......................................................173
Max Number of Samples ...............................................217
Method
Check Labware prior to start ....................................139
Method check ..................................................................82
Method run.................................................................89, 96
Method run logfile ...........................................................98
Methods
Nucleic acid prep......................................................249
PCR setup................................................................249
Predefined................................................................248
Routine.....................................................................249
Sequencing setup ....................................................250
Mix .................................................................................236
Fixed Height .............................................................237
Mixing volume ..........................................................237
SPEED .....................................................................236
mix after dispensing.......................................................224
mix before aspirating......................................................224
Mix command ..................................................................87
Overview of commands ................................................... 73
P
Parameter .................................................................. 76, 82
Filter Tips ................................................................. 218
Fix Number of Samples ........................................... 216
Max Number of Samples ......................................... 217
multidispense ........................................................... 218
Pipet.Tool ................................................................. 218
Pipette...................................................................... 218
Transfer Type ........................................................... 218
Volume..................................................................... 218
Parameter test ................................................................. 82
Parameters for Transfer command .................................. 83
Password ....................................................................... 124
Password forgotten........................................................ 124
Pattern ............................................................................. 78
PCR ................................................................................... 8
PCR accessories
Item number............................................................. 185
Mixing ............................................................................224
PCR setup
Methods ................................................................... 249
Mixing speed..................................................................236
Pipet.Tool....................................................................... 218
Mixing volume ................................................................237
Pipette tips..................................................................... 190
Change .................................................................... 223
Item number............................................................. 182
Mode of operation............................................................13
MTP ...................................................................................8
Network..........................................................................118
Plates............................................................................. 203
Labware files............................................................ 203
Labware folder/ ........................................................ 206
New application ...............................................................52
Pool ............................................................................... 233
New folder........................................................................51
Pool command ................................................................ 86
New user account ..........................................................121
Pool One destination ..................................................... 234
Noise level .............................................................178, 179
Pool One Destination command ..................................... 86
Nucleic acid prep
Methods ...................................................................249
Positioning labware.......................................................... 67
Number of Samples .......................................................216
Print headers ................................................................. 120
Number of Samples command .......................................84
Procedure tab .................................................................. 72
N
O
Open an application.........................................................50
Operating controls
Dispensing Tools ........................................................16
Gripper .......................................................................17
Optical sensor ............................................................21
Overview ....................................................................14
Worktable ...................................................................14
Optical sensor................................................................112
Detection limits .........................................................215
254
Detection versions ................................................... 212
Function ................................................................... 210
Read error................................................................ 140
Tasks.......................................................................... 21
Technical data.......................................................... 179
Tip detection ............................................................ 214
Print application ............................................................... 64
Q
Quick start ..................................................................... 127
R
Rack 96 ......................................................................... 192
Rack LC ......................................................................... 192
Racks............................................................................. 192
Item number............................................................. 183
Random Access ............................................................ 213
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
Reagent reservoirs
Item number .............................................................183
Reagent Transfer ...........................................................229
Reagent Transfer command ...........................................85
Reagent tubes ...............................................................192
Recent applications .........................................................47
Reference list of commands ............................................82
Remaining volume ...........................................................26
Special cases .............................................................26
Remove command...........................................................75
Remove labware ..............................................................71
Reservoir rack........................................................107, 197
Reservoirs......................................................................197
Item number .............................................................183
Thermal module
Item number............................................................. 181
Technical data.......................................................... 179
Temperature settings ............................................... 209
Thermal module x.......................................................... 113
Thermoadapter .............................................................. 195
Autoclaving .............................................................. 175
Cleaning................................................................... 174
Thermoadapter Frosty ................................................... 202
Thermoadapter LC Sample ........................................... 196
Thermoblock
Autoclaving .............................................................. 175
Cleaning................................................................... 174
Cooling effect ........................................................... 196
Thermoblocks ........................................................ 193, 194
Reset a user password ..................................................124
Thermoblocks with plates .............................................. 207
Reset password .............................................................124
Thermomixer ........................................................... 18, 114
Cleaning................................................................... 174
Command ................................................................ 239
Maximum revolutions per minute ............................. 114
Technical data.......................................................... 179
Reverse stroke .................................................................27
Revision history ...............................................................10
Routine
Methods ...................................................................249
Run tab ............................................................................89
Run the method .........................................................89, 96
S
Safety devices..................................................................33
Sample Transfer.............................................................218
Sample Transfer command..............................................84
Save application...............................................................64
Sequencing setup
Methods ...................................................................250
Short instructions ...........................................................127
Source and destination ....................................................77
Stacking labware........................................................69, 69
Starting the method .........................................................89
Stop method.....................................................................96
Support ..........................................................................207
T
Technical data
Barcode reader ........................................................178
Carrier ......................................................................179
Dispensing Tools ......................................................177
Gripper .....................................................................179
Noise level................................................................179
Optical sensor ..........................................................179
Thermal module .......................................................179
Thermomixer ............................................................179
Vacuum unit .............................................................179
Thermomixer command................................................... 88
Thermorack
Autoclaving .............................................................. 175
Cleaning................................................................... 174
Cooling effect ........................................................... 196
Thermorack and 0.2 mL tubes....................................... 194
Thermoracks.......................................................... 193, 194
Tip detection .................................................................. 214
Tips................................................................................ 190
Labware folder/ ........................................................ 206
Tool interlock.................................................................. 112
Tools .............................................................................. 208
Transfer command .................................................... 77, 83
Transfer Command Pattern.............................................. 78
Transport
Command ................................................................ 238
Transport command ........................................................ 88
Tubs
Labware folder/ ........................................................ 207
Two Location Rack ........................................................ 192
U
Update Firmware ........................................................... 116
Use vacuum lid .............................................................. 240
User account overview .......................................... 120, 120
User accounts................................................................ 121
User groups ................................................................... 125
Temperature
Command.................................................................238
User intervention ........................................................... 242
Temperature command ...................................................88
User password....................................................... 124, 124
User Intervention command ............................................ 89
255
epMotion® 5075 PC and epBlue™ — Operating manual
V
Vac Lid
Autoclaving..............................................................175
Cleaning ...................................................................174
Vacuum
Command.................................................................240
Vacuum command ..........................................................87
Vacuum Frames
Labware folder/.........................................................207
Vacuum time ..................................................................240
Vacuum unit ...............................................................19, 40
Autoclaving..............................................................175
Cleaning ...................................................................174
Technical data ..........................................................179
Volume.............................................................................27
Aspiration volume.......................................................27
CORRECTION ...........................................................29
Extra aspiration ..........................................................27
Filling volume .............................................................25
Remaining volume .....................................................26
Required volume ........................................................28
Reverse stroke ...........................................................27
terms ..........................................................................25
Working volume .........................................................25
Volume check ..................................................................28
W
Wait................................................................................241
Wait command .................................................................89
when command finished ................................................223
Work surface adapter
Cleaning ...................................................................173
Work tab ..........................................................................61
Working volume ...............................................................25
Worktable
Cleaning ...................................................................173
Locations....................................................................14
Placing the gripper .....................................................39
Position labware .........................................................38
Worktable tab...................................................................66
256
Eppendorf offices
Eppendorf offices
AUSTRALIA & NEW ZEALAND
Eppendorf South Pacific Pty. Ltd.
Phone: +61 2 9889 5000
Fax: +61 2 9889 5111
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.com.au
CANADA
Eppendorf Canada Ltd.
Phone: +1 905 826 5525
Fax: +1 905 826 5424
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorfna.com
FRANCE
Eppendorf France S.A.R.L.
Phone: +33 1 30 15 67 40
Fax: +33 1 30 15 67 45
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.fr
ITALY
Eppendorf s.r.l.
Phone: +390 2 55 404 1
Fax: +390 2 58 013 438
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.it
SLOVAKIA
Eppendorf Czech & Slovakia s.r.o.
Phone: +421 911 181 474
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.sk
SWITZERLAND
Vaudaux-Eppendorf AG
Phone: +41 61 482 1414
Fax: +41 61 482 1419
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.ch
USA
Eppendorf North America, Inc.
Phone: +1 516 334 7500
Fax: +1 516 334 7506
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorfna.com
AUSTRIA
Eppendorf Austria GmbH
Phone: +43 (0) 1 890 13 64 - 0
Fax: +43 (0) 1 890 13 64 - 20
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.at
CHINA
Eppendorf China Ltd.
Phone: +86 21 38560500
Fax: +86 21 38560555
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.cn
GERMANY
Eppendorf Vertrieb
Deutschland GmbH
Phone: +49 2232 418-0
Fax: +49 2232 418-155
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.de
JAPAN
Eppendorf Co. Ltd.
Phone: +81 3 5825 2363
Fax: +81 3 5825 2365
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.jp
SOUTH & SOUTHEAST ASIA
Eppendorf Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd.
Phone: +60 3 8023 2769
Fax: +60 3 8023 3720
E-mail:
[email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.com.my
THAILAND
Eppendorf (Thailand) Co. Ltd.
Phone: +66 2 379 4212-5
Fax: +66 2 379 4216
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.com.my
OTHER COUNTRIES
Internet: www.eppendorf.com/
worldwide
BRAZIL
Eppendorf do Brasil Ltda.
Phone: +55 11 30 95 93 44
Fax: +55 11 30 95 93 40
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.com.br
CZECH REPUBLIC
Eppendorf Czech & Slovakia s.r.o.
Phone: +420 323 605 454
Fax: +420 323 605 454
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.cz
INDIA
Eppendorf India Limited
Phone: +91 44 42 11 13 14
Fax: +91 44 42 18 74 05
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.co.in
NORDIC
Eppendorf Nordic Aps
Phone: +45 70 22 2970
Fax: +45 45 76 7370
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.dk
SPAIN
Eppendorf Ibérica S.L.U.
Phone: +34 91 651 76 94
Fax: +34 91 651 81 44
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.es
UNITED KINGDOM
Eppendorf UK Limited
Phone: +44 1223 200 440
Fax: +44 1223 200 441
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.eppendorf.co.uk
Your local distributor: www.eppendorf.com/worldwide
Eppendorf AG · 22331 Hamburg · Germany · Tel: +49 40 538 01-0 · Fax: +49 40 538 01-556 · E-Mail: [email protected]
Eppendorf North America, Inc. · 102 Motor Parkway, Suite 410 · Hauppauge, NY 11788-5178 · USA
Tel: +1 516 334 7500 · Toll free phone: +1 800 645 3050 · Fax: +1 516 334 7506 · E-Mail: [email protected]
Application Support
Europe, International: Tel: +49 1803 666 789 · E-Mail: [email protected]
North America: Tel: +1 800 645 3050, menu option 2 · E-Mail: [email protected]
Asia Pacific: Tel: +60 3 8023 6869 · E-Mail: [email protected]
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement